Home

Omega Vehicle Security OMB-NETSCAN 1500 User's Manual

1. 0P oom Ol 0 il 0 0 0 D0 0 0 0 H 0 O 5 ALLY O om 2 g og ale Qu a EE ee AL p 0 l a a a Qu 0 0 i E RER p CHARTSCAN LV BNC TR INPUT CARD i 02 O O e a D F os O Aw Itech Ine Copyright 1997 Z OMMAAAOOAAAAAACALY CIMACT CSN14 LV T CSN14 LV B Z 2 SS Is oo So Ss Se Sd dd de de Ge Ge dd d ds d E oe I J it I tol E yE mi a imi tw IEONCSICIORCHICIMMCSICSMMCSICIMMES CIONCIICSMESICSMmCSICSMmESICS RCSICSMmCSIETMmCSICSMEESIESONESIPSmmED EY sue Thy OH gage n A E 0 OO ut aooo Ono wik H Minoo CSN1
2. ial O O T C Card in Chassis E rales E i Twisted Pair Hi Voltage and Sensing Twisted Pair Calibrator and Lo Voltage and Sensing Voltage Reference Tables a Use of cold cell with 0 C reference and Volts DC Calibrator T C Calibrator Thermometer Not Recommended Hot Cell Temperature Simulator c Use of T C Calibrator Simulator b Use of Hot Cell with hot temperature reference not recommended due to transient effects Three Methods of Verifying Calibrated Temperature 6 20 Calibration NetScan User s Manual Hardware 7 Overview 7 1 External TTL BNC Connectors 7 11 Front Panel 7 1 Signal Conditioning Cards 7 11 Rear Panel 7 2 CSN14 TC P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs 7 12 ONE ASPEC aS CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards 7 14 Changing the Voltage Setting 7 3 CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse 7 4 Connectors 7 15 Memory Configuration 7 4 CSN Relay Card for High Current Digital
3. A Z ERTH do do dO dO dO do dO ch A A di A A d do bi J D CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors Number of Inputs 16 differential programmable by channel for input range Input Connectors Safety Jack Voltage Range Accuracy and Resolution e 2 5V 0 02 78 14 uV bit e 25V 0 02 781 4 uV bit 250 V 0 02 7 81 mV bit Digital Filtering Used for AC line cycle noise rejection Selectable off 1 256 samples in a binary count Temperature Coefficient lt 0 01 C Input Impedance 10 MQ typical Input Bias Current 20 pA maximum Maximum Common Mode Voltage 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Maximum Normal Mode Voltage 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Allowable Input 500 VDC or 500 VAC peak Channel to Channel Isolation 500 VDC or 500VAC peak Channel to Power Ground Isolation 500VDC or 500 VAC peak Note 1 Specified for coupling impedance gt 30 MQ and common mode frequency lt 60 Hz 700 VDC or 700 VAC peak 325 VDC or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC 24 scanning module before equipment damage occurs Note 2 325 VDC or 325 VAC peak if used in the same system with a MTC 24 scanning module Hardware 7 15 CSN R elay Card for High Curren
4. D 2 Data Format F 2 2 2222 20 222 e nnn n nnn nn nnn nnn n nnn e enn n nnn n nee e enn n ne eenn eee eeenneeeeeeeee D 5 Data Input Formats D 5 Data Output Formats D 6 Engineering Units Data Format D 6 Binary Data Format D 8 Counts Data Format D 8 Configuring Power Up State 2 222 022 2222 e nen n nnn n nnn n nnn n nee e nnn n ne eeeeeennnee D 9 Queries 22 22 2222 222222 enon een n nn nnn n nnn nee n nn een n nnn enn n nnn n nnn n nnn e enn n eee nnn eeen ne eeeeneeeeee D 10 Query Commands D 10 U Status Commands D 11 Status Event Report
5. D 18 Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks D 18 Real Time Clock 2 2 00 0 2002200220002 00020002 0002 D 18 Open Thermocouple Range Error Checking 2 2 2222200 002222200 D 18 NetScan User s Manual D 1 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Using High Low Last HLL Registers The High Low Last HLL registers are an alternative method of getting channel data from the NetScan The HLL registers are updated during an acquisition and at the current programmed scan rate At any time the HLL registers can be queried for channel values without affecting the buffered data The returned data will be in the engineering unit and format ASCII or binary defined by the user Data formats are described later in this appendix HLL Register Contents The HLL Registers contain the following for each configured channel e The High Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query U5 e The Time Date Stamp of the High Reading e The Low Reading for the channel since the beginning of the current acquisition or since the last HLL query U5 e The Time Date Stamp for the Low Reading e The Last or most recent Reading for the channel Note HL
6. Comm Port Comm 1 X Comm Port Comm 1 v Baud Fate a600 v Eaud Rate 3600 X Parity None v Parity IN one v HandShaking RTS CTS z HandShaking RTS CTS Modem No z Modem Yes v IV Use Cancel Call Waiting Enter cancel code below Cancel Code Phone Number ZOH fi 555 555 1234 Comm Port 1 16 Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Parity None Odd or Even Handshaking None or RTS CTS Modem No or Yes Cancel Codes 70 70 1170 or type in other acceptable code for Call Waiting NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 23 Network Network brings up the Network Interface Settings dialog box A valid registration number must be entered 1 screen below to gain access to the ChartView s Network Interface support feature The second dialog box allows users of NetScan or Net232 to configure the ethernet interface Network Interface Settings Ed Network Interface Settings Ej Network Interace Registration ID Network Interface Registration ID Contact your sales office to obtain your Network Interface registration ID Registered users have access to Charyiew s Network nterace support feature Network Intertace IF Address Enter IP Address of the Interface 127 ooo ooo ooo Network Interace Seral Port Settings Comm Fort Com2 H Baud Rate z0 t itst s s YS Parity None A HandShaking RTSCTS A Data Bits f
7. 1 10 Operation 1 4 Connect Channel Signal Inputs 1 10 Install Software Configure Address Settings for Ethernet Operation 1 5 For successful operation your computer needs to have the following e 10 Base T Type Ethernet card and cables e Available COMM Port e PC system with Pentium processor e Windows 3 1 Windows 95 or Windows 98 e Atleast 8 Mbytes of RAM for Windows 3 1 16 Mbytes recommended e At leasr 16 Mbytes of Ram for Windows95 98 32 Mbytes recommended Overview This chapter explains how to configure NetScan for ethernet use The chapter provides steps for making proper connection to the ethernet and includes power up instructions Note that Chapter 7 Hardware Reference contains detailed information pertaining to hardware issues including setup for RS 232 and RS 422 operation Inspect Your System If you have not already done so carefully unpack your shipping carton and check all contents for damage which may have occurred during shipment Immediately report all damage to the shipping agent and your sales representative Retain all shipping materials in case the unit must be returned to the factory Each NetScan is shipped with the following NetScan Ethernet Internet Based Data Logging and Control Instrument Signal Conditioning Card s pre installed per customer order 1035 0901 NetScan User s Manual 1035 0601 Programmed Disk Set includes ChartViewNET Software CN 1
8. 7 3 Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse 7 4 Memory Configuration 7 4 Expanded Memory Options 7 4 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable Ethernet Interface Configuration 7 6 RS 232 422 Interface Configuration 7 6 Configuring RS 322 422 Parameters 7 7 Serial Port Pin Connectors 7 8 Digital I O Lines 7 10 Logic Levels 7 10 Digital I O Port Pinout 7 10 External TTL BNC Connectors 7 11 Signal Conditioning Cards 7 11 CSN14 TC P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs 7 12 CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards eee 7 14 CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors 7 15 Output 7 16 NetScan User s Manual iii NetScan User s Manual Configuring and Starting NetScan Overview 1 1 NetScan and TCP IP Addressing 1 8 Inspect Your System 1 1 Protocol 1 8 Check and Install Hardware 1 2 Ceara ue Sub net Mask 1 8 Verify Voltage Setting 1 2 Gateway Address 1 8 Verify DIP Switch Settings 1 2 Install Signal Conditioning Card s 1 2 Configuration les g l g AAT Point to Point Setup 1 9 Connect Expansion Chassis option 1 3 Private LAN Setup 1 9 Setup for Ethernet Operation 1 4 Private LAN Setup with Multiple Networks 1 10 Complete Hardware Setup for Ethernet LAN Setup with Internet Access
9. 4 35 Alarm Configuration Columns 4 36 Data Destination Dialog Box 4 39 Data Destination 4 39 Auto Re arm ChartView Plus only 4 39 Why use Auto Re arm 4 40 Disabling Auto Re arm 4 40 Chart Setup Wizard 4 41 Introduction 4 41 Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard 4 42 Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup 4 43 ChartViewNET Plus and Chart Setup Wizard For very first time start up of a ChartView application Reference Note This chapter serves as a reference for ChartView ChartView Plus ChartViewNET or to run through the program tutorial refer to Chapter 2 ChartViewNET refers to a ChartView program that has the network feature of the program activated much like ChartView Plus refers to a ChartView program that has the enhanced chart feature of the program activated The NET and Plus features are each activated by separate registration ID codes thus it is possible to have ChartViewNET Plus when both codes are used For ease of discussion this chapter s use of the term ChartView also refers to ChartViewNET and ChartView Plus refers to ChartViewNET Plus Overview ChartView is a graphic Microsoft Windows based program that can be used for various data acquisition applications The program was designed for ease of use with no need for programming or expertise in configuration y N 7 Important B Notice 4 detailed information NetScan U
10. Expanded Memory Options 7 4 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable 7 6 Output ce Ethernet Interface Configuration 7 6 Expansion Chassis CSN Exp Option 7 17 RS 232 422 Interface Configuration 7 6 Connecting the Expansion Chassis 7 17 Configuring RS 322 422 Parameters T 1 Automatic Channel Assignment 7 19 Serial Port Pin Connectors 7 8 Digital I O Lines 7 10 Logic Levels 7 10 Digital I O Port Pinout 7 10 Overview This section provides information regarding NetScan hardware The chapter begins with brief discussions and illustrations regarding the unit s front and rear panels The text is divided into sub sections which include material on voltage settings fuse replacement memory expansion and serial interface configuration RS 232 422 Ethernet configuration is detailed in Chapter 1 Additional hardware related topics are included such as signal conditioning cards and the optional NetScan Expansion Chassis Front Panel NetScan s front panel reveals up to four sets of connectors one set for each signal conditioning card used The front panel contains no switches or other types of control Each connector row is dependent upon the type of signal conditioning card used With different combinations of cards a variety of setups is possible tTc volts Scanning Card with Mini Plugs EP Ene AE EE ee ee e
11. Set Trigger Tstart Configure an acquisition of scan data with the following Configuration stop parameters re arm start is the start event and stop is the stop event sync re arm determines if the unit should continue acquiring after the first acquisition completes where 1 is on and 0 is off sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronized with the internal timebases where 1 is on and 0 is off Query the present trigger configuration User Status Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where req refers to one of the following request types 0 Query and clear the Event Status Register ESR 1 Query the Status Byte Register STB 2 Query and clear Calibration Status Register CSR 3 Query system settings 4 Query current High Low Last registers 5 Query and clear current High Low Last 6 Query the Buffer Status String 7 Query assigned alarm outputs 8 Query configured channels 9 Query digital inputs 10 Query memory option in Kbytes 11 Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints 12 Query last calibration time date 13 Query last scan read 14 Query card IDs 15 Query product information 16 Query measuring parameters 17 Query root mean square RMS 18 Query acquisition states and various system flags V Set User Terminator Vval Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value val is in the range 0 to 255
12. a Q 5 Verify that the Advanced tab under Automatic Chart Creation is selected Simple must be used for standard program Q 6 Choose 2 for the number of groups Standard program is limited to 1 group Q 7 Choose 3 for the number of charts Q 8 Choose 4 for the number of channels Q 9 Click Automatic Chart Creations Create Charts At this point your chart appears on the Main Window Q 10 Click on the Display Configuration button item 7 see toolbar figure below Though you usually won t do this at this point this act permits you to see a representation of your configuration and permits you to make changes You should end up with a configuration display of two groups each with 3 charts and each chart with 4 channels for standard ChartView users the display will be for 1 group only Because Automatic Chart Creation was chosen starting with Channel 1 for ChartView Plus users the Channel arrangement was automatically assigned as follows Group 1 Group 2 Chart 1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Chart 1 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 Chart 2 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Chart 2 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 Chart 3 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 Chart 3 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 By using the mouse arrow and clicking on a Group Chart or Channel you will alter the appearance of the display but not alter its actual configuration For example in the previous Display tree figure we see channels 1 through 4 assigned to Chart 1 of the
13. Appendix G NetScan Error Messages At initial power up NetScan performs automatic self tests to ensure it is fully functional The rear panel LEDs indicate errors if they occur Possible error conditions and their corresponding indicator light patterns are shown in the following table Any pattern not shown is an internal error that is not field serviceable in this case contact the factory When only the POWER and ERROR LEDs are on a configuration error exists as a result of the setup information in NV RAM If you observe a configuration error perform an error status query see E in Appendix A If you observe any other type of error condition make note of the error and contact your service representative If no problems are found NetScan will begin its power up initialization This self test is performed each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power on was caused by the power switch or the Power On Reset R command LED Indications of Error Conditions Error Condition General Hardware Failure O LED Indicators ALARM TRIGGER SCAN ERROR POWER ROM Invalid for U22 COMM2 U21 COMM1 U22 COMM2 Non Volatile RAM Error N N Dynamic RAM Error Interorocessor COM Error Configuration Error S ON ON ON in O BARR ON p N Error Status Query E is used to determine the present error condition After execution of the E command NetScan will respond with one of several possible
14. C 20 Through the Auto Rearm capability of the NetScan it is possible to capture more than one trigger block in the unit s Acquisition Buffer Each trigger block would contain one and only one trigger point These trigger blocks are stacked end to end in the buffer as the last reading of the first trigger block is read by the controller the next scan to be read will be from the second trigger block The trigger can only be re armed after a trigger block has been completed If the Auto Rearm feature is not in use a T command must be issued to re arm the NetScan for acquisition It is important to note Auto Rearm does not allow the user to change the configuration while armed To stop Auto Rearm the user must issue a T command with the flag set to zero If Auto Rearm is selected another acquisition will take place on the next trigger without any controller intervention This allows NetScan to store several acquisitions contiguously in its internal memory The buffer locations of the trigger points and their associated time tags can be found in the Buffer Status String The read pointer is always on the oldest unread trigger block so requests for pointer status will always correspond to the trigger block available to be read The next trigger however must be initiated AFTER the previous acquisition was completed Otherwise a trigger overrun will occur Additional information about triggering and trigger error conditions can be found in the
15. Data Formats e ASCII and binary binary format returns a 16 bit compensated and linearized temperature value 0 1 C bit user programmable for hi low byte or low hi byte Statistical Parameters e High Low and Last available per channel during acquisition only Not available in single channel burst mode Time Stamp e Available for each scan group and for each channel s high low and last parameters Time Format e Relative time hh mm ss mil absolute time hh mm ss mil or absolute date and time dd mm yy hh mm ss mil Not available in single channel burst mode Alarm Stamp e Available for each scan group Not available in single channel burst mode NetScan User s Manual General Information and Specifications 3 5 Digital I O Interface amp Alarms Installation Category e CE Category 1 Number of Digital Inputs e 8 bits LS TTL compatible Number of Digital Outputs e 32 bits TTL level compatible Can be programmed as alarms Note The 32 TTL outputs can be set or cleared via program control Alarm Conditions e May be detected by software query Alarm Update Rate e Alarms are updated whenever a channel assigned to an alarm is measured Connector e Female DB50 50 pin 32 Alarms 8 digital inputs 10 ground pins mating connector supplied Note See chapter 7 for information regarding External TTL BNC Connectors WARNING Service must be performed by qualified personnel All electrical connec
16. Disable alarm stamping NetScan User s Manual A 17 API Command Reference Appendix A C Configure Channels TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX Cchans Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units chans and type type are required arguments while Lowsp highsp and hyst are oe optional hyet chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 type is the type to assign to those channels Query current channel configuration DESCRIPTION The optional arguments Lowsp highsp and hyst are the low setpoint high setpoint and hysteresis values respectively for the Configure Channels C command These arguments are only needed if it is desired to configure alarms on the specified channel s The format for these optional arguments follow the rules for readings input defined under the Set Data Format F command The channel type is used by the unit to determine how a certain channels readings are to be interpreted Because of this fact defining the channel type is critical to the proper configuration of the channel Each channel must be assigned a channel type in order for it to be included in the scan group Likewise assigning a channel type of 0 will remove that channel from the scan group The following table outlines the channel types for
17. High speed single channel mode the Scan Intervals parameters section is replaced with a High Speed Setup parameters section with boxes for selection of Channel and Scan Rate as indicated in the following figure Note In the High speed single channel burst mode all ChartView display functions are intentionally disabled Data acquisition and storage to disk are the only services that remain functional When you select the High speed single channel mode a Warning dialog box appears with this information providing you with the opportunity to cancel if desired NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 37 Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Event Configuration Trigger Keyboard Stop Count from trigger Count 100 Enter number of blocks of 256 samples Acquisition Parameters Scan Counts 0 Pre triqger High peed Sep i 0 Post Stop Channel i Average weight 1 E Scan Aate 20000 Hz Mode Normal Acquisition Setup Dialog Box High Speed Single Channel Mode Acquisition Setup Parameter Options Event Configuration Trigger Seta trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following Keyboard Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan Note If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre trigger is disabled External TTL Use an external signal to start
18. If you want to operate your NetScan unit independent of not connected to the ethernet refer to Chapter 7 for serial operation If you ordered a expansion chassis CSN Exp please refer to Chapter 7 for installation instructions Connect a DB9 cable to NetScan s Configuration Port Connect the other end of the cable to an Note 1 The DB9 connection to available COMM Port on your PC see Note 1 NetScan s CONFIG Port is a required only during initial Ensure the Interface Selector p ETHERNET ACTIVITY O pgm CONFIG Switch is setto ETHERNET COMfiguration The up position LINK E lt e hO ETHERNET O Note 2 If conneting NetScan directly to your PC s ethernet connection a 10 Base T cross over Connect a 10Base T Cable to NetScan s Ethernet connector Connect the other end to your PC s 10Base T connector adapter or a Cross over cable or to your PC s Ethernet Hub as applicable must be used Initial Connections for Ethernet Setup RS 232 422 Perform the following hardware related steps to setup NetScan for ethernet operation L 8 If connecting NetScan directly to your PC a connect the cross over adapter CA 192 Adapter to your PC s ethernet connector b connect the straight through 10 Base T type cable CA 192 5 to NetScan s ETHERNET Port c connect the other end of the straight through cable to the the cross over adapter Option A 10 Base T cro
19. O 050000 O 050000 Reset Peak Hold Indicator 9 0 100000 0 100000 Show Trend Indicator 40 1 CH1 2 0CH2 Set Limita MATE 75 0 035473 Shea Live Y Y Properties Bargraph Meters Shown with 3 Meters Selected for Viewing Note 1 Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop up menu item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu The items in this window are as follows A Start C Reset Peak Hold E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu These items are discussed in more detail following the description of Digital Meters Configuration Note for Bar Graph Meters For Bar Graph Meters configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection adding peak hold indicators etc Refer to the section entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail 4 28 ChartView Software Reference itstsi iO NetScan User s Manual Analog Meters Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Analog Meters window This window displays several channels in a dial gage format To
20. On The ethernet interface can now be used Follow additional software installation prompts as applicable to your application Note After you have finished using the NetScan Configuration Utility to complete your unit s address settings you can remove the DB9 cable the cable conecting the computer COMM Port to NetScan s Ethernet Interface CONFIG connector NetScan s Ethernet Interface panel contains 3 indicator LEDs These indicators have the following meanings when lit ACTIVITY Data is being transmitted over the ethernet LINK There is a good connection to the ethernet ETHERNET NetScan s ethernet interface mode is enabled and functional Important AA b CAUTION A flashing ETHERNET LED indicator located on NetScan s Ethernet Interface panel implies that the NetScan unit could have an internal malfunction If the ETHERNET LED flashes please turn the unit Off and contact your service representative NetScan User s Manual Configuring and Starting NetScan 1 7 NetScan and TCP IP Addressing Protocol The NetScan uses TCP IP Transport Control Protocol Internet Protocol for communications over the ethernet You can access NetScan devices from virtually anywhere in the world since the World Wide Web uses this same protocol TCP IP addressing consists of three parameters the JP address the Sub net Mask and the Gateway Address Each of these parameters consists of four different numbers
21. Returns information in the Event Status Register Returns information in the Status Register Returns information in the Calibration Status Register Returns system settings similar to invoking a combination of the following query commands F 1 L P Q S T Y U0 U He Returns high low last register data in the current data format for each channel defined by the C command such as the high reading the high time stamp the low reading the low time stamp and the last reading 5 Returns the same information as U4 but resets the current high low for all channels Returns the following current trigger block information the trigger block current read scan in block current write scan in block the trigger time date stamp the scan that stop occurred the scan number that end of acquisition occurred and the block completed flag U7 Returns the channels that have been assigned alarm output in the form of Achan output where 744 lt chan gt 1 and 32 lt output gt 1 Returns the channel settings for each configured channel 9 Returns the digital input values corresponding to each of the eight digital inputs U10 Returns memory size in the form mmmmm where m is each digit in the memory size Kbytes U11 Returns the channel number followed by 0 for not in an alarm state or 1 for in an alarm state Queried channels are those having programmed valid alarm setpoints U12 Returns the last date the unit
22. used in binary mode where X indicates that the terminator is asserted at the end of the response O indicates that the terminator is asserted within the response to separate channel and scan readings and a blank cell indicates that the terminator does not affect the command Command E e gt A R first lastXx O XT Uae S oi S ax e y Use S o S ax y y i3 S XK Allothers x Jo o o o e S EXAMPLE PRINT 1 C1 4 1X PRINT 1 F0 0X PRINT 1 Q7 7 0 0 0X PRINT 1 Q X LINE INPUT 1 A PRINT AS PRINT 1 U13X INPUT 1 A PRINT AS INPUT 1 A PRINT AS INPUT 1 A PRINT AS INPUT 1 A PRINT AS PRINT 1 Q7 0 0 0 0X PRINT 1 U13X LINE INPUT 1 A PRINT AS NetScan User s Manual ee eee ee Configure four channels for T C Type J Configure engineering units degrees C Set the resp and h11 terminators to LF EOT and the scan and block terminators to None Get the current query terminators Screen shows Q07 07 00 00 00 Request the last readings Get reading for channel 1 Screen shows 0104 20 Get reading for channel 2 Screen shows 0010 40 Get reading for channel 3 Screen shows 0064 10 Get reading for channel 4 Screen shows 0006 30 Set the resp terminator to LF EOI and the h11 scan and block terminators to None Request the last readings Get readings for channels 1 4 Screen shows 0104 20 0010 40 0064 10 0006 30 A 39 API
23. No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO E004 Channel configuration error E008 Calibration error E016 Trigger overrun E032 Open T C or Range Error E128 Command conflict error DESCRIPTION When an error has occurred the ERROR indicator light on the front panel of the unit turns on Error Status Query E is used to determine the present error condition After execution of the Error Status Query command the unit responds with one of the following error codes E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC due to a command syntax error E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO A command parameter was out of range or missing E004 A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with the card type installed E008 A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately calibrated E016 A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger state or when a non expectant trigger event occurs E032 An Open T C Error or Range Error occurs when the hardware circuitry detects an open thermocouple or when the software detects the A D input has reached or exceeded its linearization E128 A Com
24. Query the present user terminator value Set Average Weight In Normal mode specify the number of samples to average for line cycle integration or high speed multi channel use where wt is the average weight Valid options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 with 32 being the default value x Execute X Execute preceding command string Set Counts Ypre post When in Normal mode set acquisition counts where pre is the stop pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and stop is the post stop count Select Blocks YO count 0 When in High speed single channel mode burst mode set count where count is the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Query current acquisition count selections NetScan User s Manual A 9 API Command Reference Appendix A Command Reference The following pages provide the command set for NetScan For each command the command name the descriptive name and the command description are given In turn the command description includes the following format Command Description Format Type This item refers to the part of the system that the command acts upon The defined Types are as follows Refers to those commands which affect how the scans channels are acquired Calibration Execution This item refers to the point in time which an interpreted command is executed The defined Executions are as follows Execution Definition Immediate Indicat
25. User s Guide C OMEGA http www omega com e mail info omega com OMB NETSCAN Ethernet Internet Based Data Logging amp Control Instrument User s Guide pin OMB 1035 0901 Rev 1 0 omega com CEOMEGA OMEGAnet On Line Service Internet e mail http www omega com info omega com USA ISO 9001 Certified Canada Servicing North America One Omega Drive Box 4047 Stamford CT 06907 0047 Tel 203 359 1660 FAX 203 359 7700 e mail info omega com 976 Berger Laval Quebec H7L 5A1 Tel 514 856 6928 FAX 514 856 6886 e mail canada omega com For immediate technical or application assistance USA and Canada Mexico and Latin America Benelux Czech Republic France Germany Austria United Kingdom ISO 9002 Certified Sales Service 1 800 826 6342 1 800 TC OMEGA Customer Service 1 800 622 2378 1 800 622 BEST Engineering Service 1 800 872 9436 1 800 USA WHEN TELEX 996404 EASYLINK 62968934 CABLE OMEGA Tel 95 800 TC OMEGA FAX 95 203 359 7807 En Espanol 95 203 359 7803 e mail espanol omega com Servicing Europe Postbus 8034 1180 LA Amstelveen The Netherlands Tel 31 20 6418405 FAX 31 20 6434643 Toll Free in Benelux 06 0993344 e mail nl omega com ul Rude armady 1868 733 01 Karvina Hranice Tel 420 69 6311899 FAX 420 69 6311114 e mail czech omega com 9 rue Denis Papin 78190 Trappes Tel 33 130 621 400
26. As there are 32 samples per line cycle setting wt to 32 64 128 or 256 samples will automatically enable line cycle noise rejection Note Due to hardware constraints weights greater than 128 limit the number of channels which can be active in an acquisition to 122 channels maximum Weight wt Maximum of Channels 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 128 a i 256 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 M OX Select line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode PRINTH 1 W 64X Select number of samples 64 PRINT 1 Y0O 1 0 0X Setup to read 10 post trigger scans PRINT 1 C1 3 1X Enable channels 1 3 for Type J thermocouples PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 X Trigger unit and collect scans NetScan User s Manual A 49 API Command Reference Appendix A X Execute TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX X Execute preceding command string DESCRIPTION Most commands are interpreted and processed as they are received but are not executed until the Execute X command is issued Commands sent without an X are stored in an internal buffer and are not executed until an X is received While a command line is being interpreted the front panel LEDs will not be updated These LEDs will only be updated when the unit is in a ready state In order to determine if the unit is in a ready state perform a Serial Poll for the ready bit 4 If multiple system commands are used in the same string each use of
27. Input Transmit Data TxD Output No connection N A Ground Ground No connection N A Request to send RTS Output Clear to send CTS Input No connection N A NetScan User s Manual NetScan to PC Connection RS 232 DB9 Male Cable DB9 Female Pin amp Signal Wiring Pin amp Signal 3 NetScan Connection RS 422 DB9 Male Cable Wiring Pin amp Signal TLETT p Serial Port Pin Connector Signals for RS 232 422 Applications RxD Receive Data Negative Input This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS 232 or RS 422 device The serial data received is expected to match the word length baud rate stop bits and parity configuration of the particular port The signal is low true RxD Receive Data Positive Input This pin accepts serial data sent by an RS 422 device only The signal is high true TxD Transmit Data Negative Output This pin transmits serial data to an RS 232 or RS 422 device The serial data received is sent with the word length baud rate stop bits and parity configured for the particular port The signal is low true TxD Transmit Data Positive Output This pin transmits serial data to an RS 422 device only The signal is high true CTS Clear To Send Negative Input CTS input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent NetScan from transmitting serial data to an RS 232 or RS 422 device when it is not able to accept it When RTS CTS handshaking is selected NetScan will not transmit data out
28. PostView post acquisition data viewer button accesses the PostView program This independent program allows you to view waveforms recorded by data acquisition programs such as ChartView ChartView Plus and TempView PostView is detailed in Chapter 5 of this manual Arm Acquisition You can use the Arm Acquisition button to activate an acquisition When you click on this button the system is armed to begin collecting data by a recognized trigger as set in the acquisition setup dialog box Three cases are as follows 1 If there is no Pre trigger defined the Trigger option under the Event Configuration portion of the Acquisition Setup dialog box will determine when the Arm process is initiated Console Trigger 2 When a Pre trigger is defined the Arm process is initiated as soon as the Arm Acquisition is selected 3 Ifa keystroke is chosen as the trigger the Console Trigger dialog box will appear when the Arm Acquisition is selected Disarm Use the Disarm button to deactivate the data acquisition process at any point during an active acquisition The following confirmation dialog box will appear when this item is selected Disarm and Clear Data x This operation will end the acquisition and erase all the data in the data buffer You will lose any data that has not been uploaded Cancel NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 15 Print Charts The Print Charts button
29. Reading button again will freeze the Reading column s display NetScan User s Manual ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial 2 9 4 Configure Acquisition Q 18 Click on the Acquisition Setup tab see previous figure An Acquisition Configuration dialog box appears The box can be in either of two modes 1 Normal or 2 High speed single channel Note that you can also access the Acquisition Configuration dialog box from the Setup pull down menu or the Channel Configuration button item 8 below 1 Group Select 7 Display Configuration 2 Start Charts amp Indicators 8 Channel Configuration 3 Pause Charts 9 PostView 4 Stop Charts 10 Arm Acquisition 5 Scroll Faster 11 Disarm 6 Scroll Slower 12 Print Charts ChartView Toolbar Reference The information entered in the Acquisition window is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters OF Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Event Configuration Trigger Channel Value Stop Count from trigger ka Count 100 Acquisition Parameters Scan Counts q Pre tigger Searels Hie Min See 0 Post Stop Pre trigger fo Jo a7 o amp post stop Average weight 1 g Post T rigger Jo O
30. VAL AS WEND PRINT 1 R1X Get the scan LINE INPUT 1 AS NetScan Users Manual AD API Command Reference Appendix A R Read Last Readings TYPE System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX R chans Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan DESCRIPTION The Read Last Readings R command will return a subset of the Query Last U13 command It allows the specifying of specific channels within the current channel configuration This command is useful for querying specific channels without having unwanted channels returned The response to this command takes the same form as the Query Last U13 command whereby each reading conforms to the reading output format specified by the Set Data Format F command In addition each channel is terminated by the HLL terminator h11 as specified with the Set Query Terminator Q command Note If the specified channel or a range of channels is not currently defined in the scan group as configured by the Channel Configuration C command a conflict error will be flagged EXAMPLES PRINT 1 C1 16 1X Configure channels 1 16 for T C Type J PRINT 1 F1 0X Set format for engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 R 16X Get the last reading for channel 16 LINE INPUT 1
31. characters DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The Change Calibration Keyword K command allows the changing of the Calibration Keyword which is a user defined password The password is a safety feature to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering calibration mode and potentially altering calibration constants The new keyword must be a 5 digit decimal number Once the keyword is set it will thereafter be used by the Enter Calibration Mode K command to determine entry into Calibration Mode Note This command is only valid when calibration protection is disabled via the rear panel calibration disable enable pushbutton Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed instructions on calibration EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345X Enter Calibration Mode Keyword 12345 PRINT 1 U2X Check for Keyword Error INPUT 1 A C VAL AS Get the Calibration Status Register IF C AND 16 THEN PRINT ERROR INVALID KEYWORD SLEEP 5 If so wait until keyword check jumper is disabled PRINT 1 K67890X Enter new Keyword 67890 ENDIF PRINT 1 EX End Calibration Mode P Adjust Calibration Card Pots TYPE Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Pchan Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment Valid options for chan are 01 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card 02 Enable 4 4 Vo
32. s Main Window will appear The window contains pull down menus a toolbar and calibration instructions The options available from the pull down menus File Instrument and Calibrate are the same as those offered by the toolbar with one exception the Calibrate pull down menu contains a selection to Upload Cal Constants M Scan Cal File Instrument Calibrate B ES Instructions 1 Verity the nterface parameters 2 Click the Inventory tool to perform a syetenn inventory 3 Select the desired devices from the inventory list 4 Click the Calibrate Tool ICOM LEGEND Open Interface Parameters Save lnterace Parameters Setup Interface Parameters Inventory Instrument System Calibrate Selected Devices SR E k ScanCal Main Window and Icon Legend File Open Interface Parameters Save Interface Parameters Instrument Take Inventory About E xit Setup Interface Parameters Calibrate Calibrate Selected Devices Upload Cal Constants ScanCal Main Window Pull Down Menus NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 3 Using ScanCal To use ScanCal simply follow the four steps listed under the word Instructions in ScanCal s Main Window The steps are repeated below along with the proper tool icon and equivalent pull down menu option Instructions for setting up calibration equipment are contained in specific sections of this chapter for example the section Offset Cali
33. 1X Set the reading separator flag ON PRINT 1 FO 0X Data format is engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 V44X Set the User Terminator to be a comma PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure channels 1 4 as T C type J PRINT 1 1I00 00 01 0 00 00 00 1 Configure scan interval PRINT 1 Y0 1000 0X Configure acquisition counts PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Configure acquisition start trigger is Trigger On command stop trigger is Counts PRINT 1 X Trigger the acquisition PRINT 1 R1X Read a Scan LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve the Scan PRINT A Screen shows 0020 30 0023 80 0034 90 0013 50 PRINT 1 V58xX Set the User Terminator to be a colon PRINT 1 R1X Read a Scan LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve the Scan PRINT A Screen shows 0020 30 0023 80 0034 90 0013 50 WH Set Average Weight TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX W Specify the number of samples to average in the Normal mode where wt is the average weight Valid options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 with 32 w being the default value t DESCRIPTION Normal mode is used for line cycle integration for noise filtering or for high speed multiple channel use when noise is not a problem The selection for Average Weight W determines how many samples to average for each thermocouple or DC volts channel or how many samples over which the root mean square RMS is calculated for AC volts
34. 23 97 Time and Date last modified Temperature Sensor 4 Offset Temperature Sensor 3 Offset Temperature Sensor 2 Offset Temperature Sensor 1 Offset Refer to the Select Card C command for selecting chassis card only or card chassis information EXAMPLE PRINT 1 C 5X Select card 5 PRINT 1 QC X Read back the card 5 information LINE INPUT 1 A PRINT AS NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference R Read Buffered Data TYPE EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Rtype Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where type is the type of data request being made Valid options for type are 1 Read the oldest scan currently residing in the acquisition buffer 2 Read the oldest complete trigger block currently residing in the acquisition buffer and 3 Read all the scan data that currently resides in the acquisition buffer Query the contents of the data buffer DESCRIPTION The Read Buffered Data R command may only be used to extract data from the acquisition buffer which has been collected as a result of an acquisition that has been previously configured For more information regarding the configuration of acquisitions refer to the Set Trigger Configuration T command Since the unit s buffer is organized as a FIFO first in first out the Read Buffer Data command will always read the oldest data available in the buffer first As the controller requests buffe
35. 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 X Trigger unit and collect scans PRINT 1 M 1X Select Single Channel High Speed Burst Mode PRINT 1 F 10000 0X Set sampling frequency 10 KHz PRINT 1 YO 4096 0 Set count to take 1 MB s worth of samples PRINT 1 C1 26X Select channel 1 for reading 250 Volts AC samples PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 X Trigger unit and collect scans NetScan User s Manual A 33 API Command Reference Appendix A N Set Event Mask System Deferred SYNTAX Nmask Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register ESE where mask is in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed from the following conditions 000 Clear event mask 016 Execution Error 001 Acquisition complete 032 Command Error 002 Stop Event 064 Buffer 75 Full 004 Query Error 128 Power On 008 Device Dependent Error DESCRIPTION The Set Event Mask N command directly sets the Event Status Enable ESE Register ESE conditions in turn determine which Event Status Register ESR conditions are enabled to generate the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the Status Byte STB Register Multiple ESR bits can be enabled simultaneously by issuing Set Event Mask N commands separately or by combining them in one command string The programmed Event Mask remains enabled until a Clear Event Mask NO command is sent or the controller sends a Pow
36. Alarm Setup Dialog Box The pull down list selection or copy paste process are useful for making multiple channel configuration changes within a column You may double click within a cell to make your way through all the possible selections The selections are repetitive in other words you will eventually advance to the same selection with which you started The following text provides more detail regarding the channel and alarm configuration parameters The number preceding the text refers to the column number with 1 being the left hand column and 10 being the right hand column of the Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box 4 34 ChartView Software Reference NetScan User s Manual Channel Configuration Columns 1 Channel CH This column serves only as a channel number indicator The channel number cannot be changed from this column 2 On The On column allows you to enable a channel for data collection When a cell or block of cells in this column is selected a selection box will appear that allows On to enable or Off to disable the channel Double clicking a cell in this column toggles the channel s enable status Clicking the Make All Channels Active button enables turns all channels on Clicking on the Make All Channels Inactive button disables all channels turns them off with the exception that channels assigned to charts can only be turned off from the display configuration setup
37. ChartView Software Reference siistsi iO NetScan User s Manual Data Destination Dialog Box Data Destination The Data Destination portion of the box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data select an Excel or binary format TXT or IOT respectively and to select optional Time Date and or Alarm Stamps to be included in the data if desired The dialog box can be accessed from the Channel and Alarm Setup and Acquisition Setup dialog boxes by selecting the Data Destination tab or by selecting Data Destination from the Setup pull down menu You can quickly access the Channel and Alarm Setup and Acquisition Setup dialog boxes by selecting the appropriate folder tab image located near the top of the Data Destination dialog box Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Data Destination Folder CACHART VWA Filename DATOOOO0 TT Browse Format lexel Sean Format Time Diate Stamp Alarm Stamp Digital Input Stamp Auto Re arm Capture multiple tigger blocks in indexed files First Index 1 PATOOOOT TXT Last Index z PATO0005 TXT Destination Dialog Box The following items describe key areas of the Data Destination box If you have ChartView Plus you can use the lower section of the Data Destination box to configure Auto Re arm as described in the sub section below entitled Auto R
38. Charview Plus Registration Sheet Otherwise choose Next lt Back Cancel Screen Prompt for Entering the ChartView Plus ID Using the NetScan Configuration Utility NetScan must be configured before you can use it in the ethernet mode Configuration is accomplished through the NetScan Configuration Utility that activates after you select NetScan as your device type The utility s window displays a welcome prior to prompting you through the required configuration steps The following steps appear in the utility s screen prompts Note that each step has a corresponding tab see following figure Note The network interface must be properly configured before NetScan can communicate with a computer via the ethernet The NetScan Configuration Utility application completes this task by sending configuration settings from your computer s serial port to the configuration port CONFIG on NetScan s Ethernet Interface Step 1 Select an available serial communication port COMM Port from your computer Step 2 a Disconnect the network cable 1OBase T type from NetScan s ETHERNET connector on the Ethernet Interface portion of NetScan b Cycle NetScan s power switch Off then On c Check 3 the on screen box that states I have performed the actions desribed above Basic information regarding TCP IP Addressing begins on page 1 8 The section includes definitions and describes four different
39. Command The calibration status register indicates which calibration errors if any have occurred The individual errors are described in the U2 command Any calibration error will be mapped into the Calibration Status which maps to the Calibration Error bit in the Error Source Register Error Source Register E Command The error source register indicates which errors if any have occurred The individual errors are described in the E command When an error occurs it sets the appropriate bit in the error source register This in turn sets a bit in the event status register as shown in the previous figure Event Status Register The event status register is read with the UO command The contents of the register are cleared after the UO command is satisfied The event status register indicates which events if any have occurred Its bits and the event that set them are as follows Bit No 0 Event Acquisition Complete Stop Event Query Error Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error 75 Limit Exceeded Power On Set Clear Information Set when acquisition operation has been completed An acquisition is complete when the acquisition device has finished the current acquisition The bit will be cleared when a new acquisition is configured through the T command Set when the pre trigger count specified in the trigger configuration by the T command has been satisfied This bit is cleared when a
40. Configuring the NetScan to power up under the factory defaults or recalling the factory default settings will not affect pre existing calibration factors of the NetScan or its slave units The following table lists the execution steps and effects when the NetScan is configured to power up under the factory default configuration step Command ema o Q7 0 0 0 0 Set general response Term to CR LF EOI All others to None Set the User Term to ASCII code 00 Hex NUL Foo Setthe data format to Engr Units Degrees 0 PMO 8 80 Set Event Status Enable ESE to 000 T00 00 00 1 00 Set both timebase intervals to 0 1 seconds 00 00 1 TO 0 0 0 Un configure acquisition triggering Set measuring mode to line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode F 20000 0 Set burst mode frequency to 20kKHz Set sampling weight to 32 NetScan User s Manual D 9 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Queries The NetScan provides many ways to query the unit for specific information Most commands have a corresponding query command which responds with the configuration or mode of a previously executed command In addition the U Status commands can be used at any time without interfering with normal Operation to return information about the various NetScan conditions Query Commands Most commands have a corresponding query command formed by appending a question mark to the command letter Query commands place their respo
41. D 0 Oa 4 5 eet _ ay fo LE i 6 el i BS A f7 oH Heli tn Bel ct Ho piro S Phol m i a J aL oL 11 ME JR oS E L EN 2 A 9 EE i l 5 Ty S A g a O i 4 kes Us A agl 3 a i Oo IDA ae 6 ey i P 2 X N Y Ll gt i 4 m O K Kh E Taa 20 D oL Ht _ i Cold Cell aD i H LE S Simulator for 0 C A gi jf6 o o s Connection Box U Type Copper Shorti
42. Fie Exit Network No interface selected C Simulated Instrument OF Cancel After the selection has been made when ChartView is shutdown the selected interface device and all channel configuration settings will be automatically saved in a default configuration file Upon the next start of ChartView the default configuration is automatically loaded If the default configuration becomes corrupt or if you would like to bypass the default configuration when starting ChartView you can hold down the Shift Key when starting ChartView This causes the program to ignore the default channel configuration settings and causes the ChartView Startup dialog box to appear This allows you to select Load File to make use of a specified channel configuration file from a previously saved configuration Chart wizard Claw Setup Display configuration Open Save Start FA l l jave g stop FE Page EF est noun Et AE z Faster Chrl ae Slower Ctrl Chart 2 Chart 3 _ oom ee ee w OH Ctrl F Absolute Ctrl F4 Grid limit lines Solid Ctrl F2 w Relative Ctrl F5 Timestamp d Dots Ctri F3 Wizard Ctrl W Accesses Chart Setup Wizard feature for automated chart configuration Setup Accesses Chart Setup window allowing you to edit your display configuration NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 17 Display config Note Start F5 Stop F6 Pause F7 Next Group Ctrl G Faster C
43. I00 00 10 0 00 00 00 1 would set the scan interval to once every 10 seconds and set the post trigger scan interval to once every 0 1 seconds As mentioned earlier the scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current configuration will allow This is referred to as fast mode Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying 00 00 00 0 as the argument for the I command for the desired timebase interval For example the following command I100 00 10 0 00 00 00 0 will set the normal scan interval to once every 10 seconds and the acquisition scan interval will be set to fast mode The two scan intervals may be queried any time via the I software command Pre trigger Trigger Post trigger Post stop Scans Scan Scans Scans Scan Interval A Scan Interval B Scan Interval A Stop Event occured before interval B Scans amp Scan Intervals Acquisition Configuration Introduction To collect and buffer scans it is necessary to configure an acquisition An acquisition can consist of the following components Pre Trigger Scans taken before the Trigger is satisfied Post Trigger Scans taken between the Trigger and the Stop event Scans taken after the Stop event However if the Post Trigger is set to 0 the Trigger scan is collected 1 scan but no Post Stop scans are collected Trigger Point Post trigger Post stop Scans Scans a Te Te CENT ES HEHEA HEHHE Stop Event occurs somewhere between
44. Indicates charting is in progress This indicator is useful when charts are scrolling at a very slow speed Disk Indicates ChartView is writing to disk Buffering in Indicates the data acquisition instrument is storing scans that are not being saved to disk Instrument Uploading Indicates data in the instrument is being uploaded to the PC Note 1 The Status LEDs and their labels listed above do not appear when using Windows 3 1 However when using Windows 3 1 the labels will appear at the time the function is active e g when uploading the text Uploading shows in region 24 This text message is in addition to the text in the Status Message Box Item 22 NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 7 Main Window Toolbar Each item in the toolbar with exception of Group Select 1 is represented by an individual button icon Toolbar related functions can also be activated from pull down menus discussed later Placing the cursor on the button and clicking the mouse button enables the tool or opens a corresponding dialog box Each Toolbar button has a pop up label that appears when the mouse is placed over the button Note The toolbar represented below is for ChartView s Main Window Separate toolbars exist for Bar Graph Digital Meters and Analog Meters options selectable from the Windows pull down menu These other toolbars are discussed later in the chapter Group 1d L l Group Select 7 Displ
45. Infrared Pyrometers PRESSURE STRAIN AND FORCE NNNAN M Transducers amp Strain Gauges M Load Cells amp Pressure Gauges M Displacement Transducers M Instrumentation amp Accessories FLOW LEVEL M Rotameters Gas Mass Flowmeters amp Flow Computers M Air Velocity Indicators MV Turbine Paddlewheel Systems M Totalizers amp Batch Controllers pH CONDUCTIVITY M pH Electrodes Testers amp Accessories M Benchtop Laboratory Meters M Controllers Calibrators Simulators amp Pumps M Industrial pH amp Conductivity Equipment DATA ACQUISITION Data Acquisition amp Engineering Software Communications Based Acquisition Systems Plug in Cards for Apple IBM amp Compatibles Datalogging Systems Recorders Printers amp Plotters EATERS Heating Cable Cartridge amp Strip Heaters Immersion amp Band Heaters Flexible Heaters Laboratory Heaters ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING AND CONTROL Metering amp Control Instrumentation Refractometers Pumps amp Tubing Air Soil amp Water Monitors Industrial Water amp Wastewater Treatment pH Conductivity amp Dissolved Oxygen Instruments NNNNN E NNAK RERERERERER
46. NetScan Syntax parameters interpretation and error codes are explained Sections on the individual commands include their parameters types typical use related information and a sample program excerpt Appendix B Ethernet API provides information regarding ethernet related commands Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation channel and scan configuration triggers alarms and digital I O operation Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries provides information regarding registers data formats status and event reporting and other operation related factors Appendix E NetScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control Appendix F ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes Appendix G NetScan Error Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to NetScan Appendix H Abbreviations CAUTION If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual or if specification limits are exceeded the function of the equipment as well as the protection provided by it may be impaired 1998 by IOtech Inc November 1998 Printed in the United States of America Table of Contents 1 Configuring and Starting NetScan Overview 1 1 Inspect Your System 1 1 Install Software 1 2 C
47. NetScan can return each data point in a waveform In addition NetScan can provide the true RMS value of an AC voltage Because high sampling rates can be achieved in the High speed single channel mode the conditions indicated in the following table apply High Speed Single Channel Mode Necessary Item Conditions Due to High Sampling Rates High Low Last registers Alarms Trigger Start Trigger Stop Pre Trigger Post Stop Count Time Stamping Alarm Stamping Digital Input Stamping Disabled Averaging weight Frequency In regard to AC voltage frequency must be such that it results in a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle NetScan collects samples for the selected channel in blocks of 256 samples in one time increment This appears similar to a scan of 256 channels while in the normal multiple channel mode since you must e program the number of 256 sample blocks to acquire in the post trigger count parameter of the y command and will e retrieve the data from NetScan as post trigger count scans of 256 samples Note High speed single channel mode is a one shot operation It permits NetScan to collect the specified number of samples then stops The mode is not continuous nor does it allow for memory overflow and wrap around The maximum number of samples is limited by the amount of memory available See the Y command reference in Appendix A for related information Note In regard to AC voltage m
48. Note For re assembly first reconnect the AC power line next reconnect the analog terminals and then any other cables prior to reapplying power to the entire system 6 Carefully reassemble the NetScan unit Hardware 7 5 Calibration Memory Write Enable Disable NetScan s constants for chassis calibration and the calibration password are stored by NetScan in Non Volatile RAM NV RAM The password is a safety feature used to prevent unauthorized personnel from entering calibration mode and altering the calibration constants As a Safeguard the calibration password and chassis calibration constants are hardware protected This protection is enabled and disabled from the pushbutton located on the lower left of NetScan s rear panel see figure next page The calibration button is disabled as the factory default setting It should not be changed unless you want to change the password or chassis calibration constants If it is necessary to change the calibration password via the K command or to calibrate the chassis this hardware write protection can be disabled by pushing the calibration enable disable button so it is indented enabled For details on calibration refer to Chapter 6 NetScan Calibration CAUTION Ensure the calibration enable disable pushbutton is not indented during normal NetScan operation Otherwise the calibration password and calibration constants may be corrupted and normal operation may be disr
49. The Restore Factory Defaults F command may be used to restore the unit to the same configuration it had when it left the factory Issuing this command will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration into the working configuration The factory default configuration is defined in the Configuring Power Up State section of Appendix D This command may not be issued while an acquisition is configured since it will cause certain settings upon which the acquisition depends to change Issuing this command while an acquisition is configured will cause a Conflict Error to occur Note Issuing the F command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings LINE INPUT 1 AS Get the settings PRINT AS Screen shows Q1 7 7 7 0 TO 3 0 0 Y000100 001000 000000 PRINT 1 FX Restore factory default configuration PRINT 1 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings LINE INPUT 1 A Get the settings PRINT A Screen shows 01 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 YOOOOOO 000000 000000 A 12 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference K Change Calibration Keyword Aawon ooo EXECUTION Immediate eee Seton Kkey Change the calibration keyword where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5
50. TxD while this signal is un asserted low If XON XOFF or no handshaking is selected the CTS line is ignored when transmitting data The signal is low true CTS Clear To Send Positive Input CTS input is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent NetScan from transmitting serial data to an RS 422 device when it is not able to accept it The signal is high true RTS Request To Send Negative Output RTS output is used as a hardware handshake line to prevent an RS 232 or RS 422 device from transmitting serial data to NetScan when it is not able to accept it When automatic RTS CTS handshaking is selected NetScan will assert high the RTS signal when greater than 4096 memory locations are available in its internal buffers If available memory drops below 4096 bytes NetScan unasserts low the RTS signal The signal is low true RTS Request To Send Positive Output RTS output is used as a hardware handshake line for an RS 422 device The signal is high true GND Ground This signal sets the ground reference point for the other RS 232 RS 422 input and output signals Hardware 7 9 Digital I O Lines NetScan has eight digital input lines and thirty two digital output lines available on a rear panel DB 50 connector These lines can be output and or input using NetScan commands Note The first 16 output lines are available for use with relays via the high current CSN Relay card option If used the relay card must be insta
51. Xx Continuous channels 1 16 with JTC Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A CSN14 LV T B or S Configuring Low Volts Channels When the CSN14 LV T B or S signal conditioning module is used NetScan measures voltages providing a programmable range per channel To configure the channels on a CSN14 LV T B or S use the Configure Channel C command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module Channels not included in the channel scan do not have to be configured The following table highlights channel types for the CSN14 LV T B and S signal conditioning card Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a low volts channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A C 8 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers CSN14 HV S Configuring High Volts Channels When the CSN14 HV S signal conditioning module is used NetScan measures high voltages providing a programmable range per channel To configure the channels on a CSN14 HV S use the Configure Channel C command to assign a range to each channel on the signal conditioning module Channels not included in the
52. a 0 Char FAR local Always a null string Char FAR remote A null terminated string which contains the IP address of the NetScan device Unsigned long flags Always zero Unsigned long reserved Always zero Long FAR session A variable used to receive the session handle Returns 0 if successful error code if not Description This function is used to establish a session with a specific NetScan device If a successful connection is made then a session handle is assigned and placed in the session argument Since each session is unique it 1s possible to have multiple sessions active at any given time Example ErrVal nSessionBegin 0 0 192 0 0 1 0 0 0 session NetScan User s Manual 11 09 98 B nilOLock Function int n OLock long session short iotype short channel short lock Parameters Long session The session handle of the NetScan Short 1otype Always a 9 Short port The serial port being locked 1 for the netscan 0 for the AUX port Short lock 0 to unlock 1 to lock Returns 0 if successful error code if not Description This function is used to lock the serial port of the NetScan adapter so that another session can t have access to it If a serial port is left unlocked then another session could gain access to that port causing unpredictable results Example ErrVal nlOLock session 9 1 1 nSERIALConfigure B 2 Function int nSERIALConfigure long session short po
53. activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time Piel Es R ChartView Analog Meters Control View pohiti a0 O 030000 a wiley PLL d wa oe dd N o 0 080000 Oe the 1 CHS a 5 0 046818 AICHS mw O 031212 Doon Hoon 1050000 Kaley 005000 1050000 4 Kaley 0050000 w a sy pa m T fai Te noon 0 4000 noon 0 015481 4 CH3 0 018451 Analog Meters Shown with 4 Meters Selected for Viewing Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu not shown A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop up menu see Bar Graph Meters figure item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu Note that Meter 3 CH3 in the above figure shows Peak Indicators near the pointer as well as a trend indicator in the upper right hand corner of the meter The items in this window are as follows A Start C Reset Peak Hold E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu These items are discussed in more detail following the description of the Digital Meters Configuration Note for Analog Meters For Analo
54. activates a screen print of ChartView s main window Main Window Pull Down Menus The ChartView main window features several pull down menus As an alternative to the menus you can enable several menu items by using Toolbar buttons previously discussed The common items for the pull down menus and toolbar are described in more detail in the Toolbar section see File Menu Note immediately following this text New Chrl h Open Ctri O Save Chri 5 Save As Print Ctrl P About E wit New Sets all channel parameters to their startup factory default setting Ctrl N Open Sets all channel parameters as directed by a specified configuration file cvw The Load Ctrl O ChartView Setup window prompts you to select from a list of previously saved configuration files Save Saves the existing all inclusive channel configuration settings for later recall The Save Ctrl S command overwrites the existing version if the versions are named the same Save As Saves the existing configuration for later recall asks whether to overwrite the original version or save under a new filename Print The Print Charts button activates a screen print of ChartView s main window When a chart Ctrl P contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels listed lower in the display list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels hig
55. add up to 64 additional analog channels to NetScan by using a CSN Exp expansion chassis The expansion chassis accepts the same types of signal conditioning cards as the NetScan unit and is powered and controlled by the NetScan unit Expansion channels are accessed in the same way as channels in the master NetScan unit When the main unit detects the presence of the expansion chassis during its power on sequence the system makes the additional channels available to the user The U8 command is available to query NetScan for the total number of channels in the system Note Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a NetScan unit Note The rear panel of the expansion chassis contains no controls indicators input or output connections Connecting the Expansion Chassis A ribbon cable electronically connects the expansion chassis to the main unit No additional power or interface cables are required A set of mounting blocks and machine screws is used to physically connect the expansion chassis to NetScan Perform the following steps to install an expansion chassis WARNING Before connecting an expansion chassis to NetScan power down NetScan and disconnect the unit from power In addition power down and disconnect all devices from the system Failure to do so could lead to personal injury or death CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electr
56. and the Stopped Bit of the Event Status Register ESR The NetScan is in the Post Trigger state if and only if the Triggered Bit of the STB is set and the Stopped Bit of the ESR is not set The unit will exit the Post Trigger state when the stop event occurs Post Stop State The Post Stop state is the period between the occurrence of the stop event and the completion of the acquisition While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated at the post stop scan rate The NetScan will only enter this state when a non zero value of the post stop count parameter of the Set Counts Y command has been specified If this is the case upon the occurrence of the stop event the unit will enter the Post Stop state and collect the specified number of post stop scans When the specified number of post stop scans have been collected the unit will terminate the current acquisition and return to a non acquiring state If however the post stop count parameter of the Set Counts Y command is zero the unit will return immediately to a non acquiring state upon the occurrence of the stop event unless the Auto Rearm feature is used The Post Stop state may be detected by querying the Stopped and the Acquisition Complete bits of the Event Status Register ESR The NetScan is in the Post Stop state if and only if the Stopped Bit of the ESR is set and the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR is not se
57. baud HANDSHAKE H S 01 Software Handshake only XON XOFF Hardware Handshake only RTS CTS RS 232 0 Selects RS 232 Serial ___ LF RS 422 Note 1 At 9600 and 19200 baud rates Handshake should be set for Hardware Handshake only 10 Note 2 ChartView software will not run when Handshake is set for Software Handshake Serial Port Pin Connectors NetScan is equipped with two DB9 connectors both located on the rear panel The DB9 connector labeled CONFIG is for ethernet configuration only The DB9 connector labeled RS 232 422 is for serial interface applications The serial port default is for the RS 232 connector configured as DTE Data Terminal Equipment for an IBM AT at RS 232 levels An optional CA 47 cable or equivalent connects the NetScan with the computer The NetScan side of the cable has a male DB9 connector for use with the RS 232 422 serial port The cable s computer side has 2 connectors one for DB9 and the other for DB25 Other crossover type cables can be used if wired as shown in the figure The following table lists the RS 232 and RS 422 pin connections for a DB9 Pin Computer NetScan Computer NetScan 1 DB25 DB9 DB9 DB9 DB25 AMM D Saas 7 TXD 2 2 RXD RXD 2 2 RXD ca RXD 3 3 TXD TXD 3 3 TXD 3 Gey css 5an GND 5 5 GND GND 7 7 RTS i RTS 7 7 RTS 4 RTS 4 8 CTS CTS 8 8 CTS 5 a ae 6 Interface Wiring Diagram 7 8 9 RS 232 Signal Pin Description No connection N A Receive Data RxD
58. be returned as 00000 In the following command descriptions leading zeros are included They are not however required when entering the command Conflict Errors Some combinations of commands and parameters can be sent to the unit that are out of range for a particular configuration or inconsistent with other commands For instance specifying a Scan Interval I command to less time than the unit can acquire scans results in a conflict error PRINT 1 C1 992 100 00 00 0 00 00 00 0X A conflict error lights the ERROR indicator LED on the scanning unit and returns an E4 when queried with the Error Query E command Some conflict errors result in a default value for a conflicted command For instance in the example above the scan interval defaults to the fastest possible scan interval for the number of defined channels Command Interpretation As commands are received by the unit they are interpreted in the order in which they are received Some commands are immediate which means they immediately take effect Other commands are deferred and have no effect on device operation until the Execute x command is interpreted Immediate amp Deferred Commands The immediate and deferred commands applicable to NetScan are listed in a table on the following page An example of an immediate command is Set Digital Outputs On which immediately chooses the digital output line which is being referred to An example of a deferred command is S
59. begin scanning the controlling computer must perform two operations 1 Configure each channel and 2 select the channels that are to be included in the scan These operations are illustrated in the following figure Scan Interval Timebase i time Scan Scan Scan Leb d ty des Channel Scan 13 4 5 8 68 69 80 Channels configured and included in the scan Channel Scan and Scan Interval Definition After completing these two operations the alarms and the High Low Last Registers are updated at the maximum possible scan rate However the scans are not being placed in the Acquisition Buffer at this time PRINT 1 C1 16 1X Configure master channels 1 4 with Type JTC Inspecting the unit s High Low Last Registers shows the temperature or voltage values of the configured channels PRINT 1 U4X Query HLL registers for the configured channels INPUT 1 A Get the response To begin storing scans in the unit s Acquisition Buffer at a programmed scan rate it is necessary to complete the following four steps 1 Configure each channel with the desired type 2 Select the scan intervals 3 Select the acquisition parameters 4 Select the trigger parameters Once the steps have been completed NetScan is armed and waiting for the trigger Once the trigger is satisfied NetScan begins collecting scans and storing them in the Acquisition Buffer NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects f
60. block configuration may be queried 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 r y Ta gt a gt a gt 0000000 0000000 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Time Date Time Date Acquisition Buffer Interrogation The Buffer Status String is queried with the U6 command returning 10 fields as indicated by the following figure and corresponding list The values in the figure represent a U6 response when the acquisition buffer is empty 1 Number of Trigger Blocks Available This field represents the total number of trigger blocks currently contained within the buffer A block need not be complete to be included in this total it only needs to be triggered If their are no trigger blocks available Blocks Available will be 0000000 2 Number of Scans Available This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6 command was issued It should be noted that pre trigger data is not available to the user until the defined trigger event has taken place This total represents the total number of scans available across all trigger blocks in the acquisition buffer If their are no scans available in the buffer Scans Available will be 0000000 3 Current Read Pointer This field represents the current position within the current trigger block This pointer is relative to the trigger point which is always oriented at location 0 If pre trigger scans are being read the Current Pointer will be less than 0
61. desired by using the cursor and typing in the value or by using the pull down arrows t and making the appropriate selections then click on the Create Groups button 2b Manually add groups to the setup Type in the name of the chart group then click on the Add Display Group button The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups and the number of charts for the selected black highlighted chart group see following figure From this screen you can change the number of charts in a group as well as change the group name NetScan User s Manual gt Chart Display Configuration Setup EHA Display Number of charts in the selected Group Group Hame Group 1 Adding a Chart to Group I 3 Change the number of charts per group if desired 4 Change the group name if desired 5 Click on a group to see the chart s assigned to the group In the above example there is one group with one chart 6 Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart A screen similar to the following will appear gt Chart Display Configuration Setup EHA Display Chan Categories All Categories if Et Group 1 Available Channels tele PD1_Ant EalPD1_A0t PD1_Ag2 Ba PO1_A03 POT_AtS j PDI ADA Be PD1_A05 PD1_A05 EAPO Aa PD1_A0s ki Selected Channels Remove Category Voltage Unita Y Assigning Channels to Chart I of Group 1 7 Choose channels for the selected chart You can select up to
62. error codes as indicated below E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC due to a command syntax error E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO A command parameter was out of range or missing E004 A Channel Configuration Error indicates that a channel has been inappropriately configured either because the channel is not present or because the specified channel type is not compatible with the card type installed E008 A Calibration Error occurs when the card calibration has failed or has been inappropriately calibrated E016 A Trigger Overrun Error occurs when more than one trigger event occurs for a given trigger state or when a non expectant trigger event occurs E032 An Open T C Error or Range Error occurs when the hardware circuitry detects an open thermocouple or when the software detects the A D input has reached or exceeded its linearization E064 Custom Table Error indicates that a Custom Table has been inappropriately defined or has not been loaded properly This error usually occurs because Custom Table is out of memory or the inappropriate specification of the Set Table Entry Pointer W command E128 A Command Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other commands that have been issued or the current configuration This error usually occurs when a command is issued that cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit For
63. event for a specific channel can be used as a stimulus for a digital output signal on the back panel of the unit by using the A command to assign the channel to digital output This signal can be used to set off an audible alarm or signal another device of the occurrence of the alarm condition To unassign a digital alarm condition use 0 which is the null output number Assigning the null output number to a channel s will disassociate the channel s from any digital output Thirty two digital signals are available on the back panel of the master unit Although analog input channels on the slave units can be used to stimulate alarms no digital output signals are available on the slave units Regardless of the number of slaves connected 32 external alarm signals are available A channel programmed with alarm setpoints will not generate an alarm unless it is over a setpoint when the scan occurs For example if a channel goes above then below an alarm threshold in between scans it will not be detected or posted Alarm detection will generate an SRQ You can then issue an alarm query A which will return a 4 byte image of the 32 alarm outputs EXAMPLE PRINT 1 C1 32 1 100 0 Configure channels 1 32 100 0 1 0x PRINT 1 A1 1X Assign channel 1 alarm to digital output channel 1 PRINT 1 A2 16 2X Assign channels 2 16 alarms to digital output channel 2 PRINT 1 A17 25 3X Assign channels 17 25 alarms to digital output ch
64. for each selected group and the number of overlapping channels in each chart not to exceed 4 As stated in the previous note only ChartView Plus allows the use of multiple groups and overlapping channels You can choose to manually create a configuration or have one created automatically In addition you can use Chart Setup Wizard to make a rough display configuration and then manually fine tune it The automatic setup method offers three choices Simple Moderate and Advanced The Manual Chart Creation option provides you with the same capabilities as the Advanced Automatic Setup selection but allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart as well as vary the number of charts per group Chart Setup Wizard Automatic Options Setup Type Group Setup Chart Setup Channel Setup Simple 1 group only Up to 16 charts 1 channel per chart 1 group only Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Up to 64 groups Up to 16 charts per group Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Moderate and Advanced modes are only available with activation of ChartView Plus NetScan User s Manual ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial 2 7 2 8 Note Once your chart setup is complete you can always go back and edit the setup cep Display For the purpose of our tutorial complete the following steps Note that these steps A are catered to ChartView Plus Comments regarding standard ChartView are presented in brackets
65. from the following conditions 000 Clear event mask 001 Acquisition complete 002 Stop Event 004 Query Error 008 Device Dependent Error 016 Execution Error 032 Command Error 064 Buffer 75 Full 128 Power On N Query the Event mask S O Set Digital Outputs r Set any of the 32 digital outputs separated into four 8 bit banks to a specified setting where bankn n 1 2 3 4 is an argument in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 when converted to binary format represents the desired settings for the 8 bit bank Query current state of digital output Program Trigger Times Pstart Set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition configured stop for start and or stop on absolute time where start and stop are in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes SS is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year Query current start and stop times a Query the present configuration or mode of the command preceding the Set Query Terminator Qresp Set the query terminators with the following parameters resp is hll the response terminator h11 is the channel terminator scan scan is the terminator which follows each scan output and block is block the terminator which follows each trigger block output sep sep determines whether or not a separator character should be used Valid options for sep are 0 Place
66. if it is specified Channel Data is defined as data originating from the High Low Last HLL Registers or the Acquisition Buffer The commands that initiate Channel Data output are the R R U4 U5 and U13 commands However Channel Data may also be output as Engineering Units and Counts As in the case of Data Input Formats all other types of output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is specified However there are only 3 command queries which need to follow the F command format in this fashion They are C L and U8 command queries Note If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format the Engineering Units parameter of the F command is ignored Examples PRINT I BO 0x Output C L U8 as well as R R U4 U5 and U13 in Engineering Units Degrees C PRINTH1 F1 1X Output R R U4 U5 and U13 as binary Output C L and U8 as Engineering Units Degrees F PRINTH1 F3 3X Output C L U8 as well as R R U4 U5 and U13 in Counts Note that Engineering Units parameter is ignored All commands and data sent to the NetScan are in ASCII although the engineering unit may vary Note Only data supplied by the NetScan such as time date stamps for High Low Last registers can be in binary format Both the ehternet and RS 232 interfaces support data retrieval in ASCII and for high speed applications in binary format End of Reading and End of Scan terminators are not used with binary data transfers Engineer
67. insurance and proper packaging to prevent breakage in transit FOR WARRANTY RETURNS please have the FOR NON WARRANTY REPAIRS consult OMEGA following information available BEFORE for current repair charges Have the following contacting OMEGA information available BEFORE contacting OMEGA 1 P O number under which the product was 1 P O number to cover the COST PURCHASED of the repair 2 Model and serial number of the product under 2 Model and serial number of the product and warranty and 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems 3 Repair instructions and or specific problems relative to the product relative to the product OMEGA s policy is to make running changes not model changes whenever an improvement is possible This affords our customers the latest in technology and engineering OMEGA is a registered trademark of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Copyright 1996 OMEGA ENGINEERING INC All rights reserved This document may not be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form in whole or in part without prior written consent of OMEGA ENGINEERING INC Where Do I Find Everything I Need for Process Measurement and Control OMEGA Of Course TEMPERATURE Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor Probes Connectors Panels amp Assemblies Wire Thermocouple RTD amp Thermistor Calibrators amp Ice Point References Recorders Controllers amp Process Monitors
68. is well suited for temperature and voltage measurements requiring channel to channel isolation This isolation is made possible by the use of individual relays on each of the 64 channels The unit provides 500 V isolation for voltage inputs and 200 V isolation for thermocouples The instrument scans at a rate of up to 147 channels per second and includes a single channel burst mode for digitizing waveforms at rates up to 20 kHz Measurements include e isolated temperature from thermocouples e DC volts e AC volts e waveforms NetScan includes ChartViewNET a software program which provides a Windows based graphical user interface approach to obtaining data collection and display PostView a post acquisition data review program and ScanCal a software application that automates instrument calibration Optional software shipped with separate documentation includes the following CIMScan is a HMI SCADA application A single screen can display data from and control outputs of several NetScan devices connected through a network With C MScan users can customized applications accessing thousands of channels from network connected NetScan devices C MScan does not require programming knowledge ScanServer is a driver that permits access to multiple NetScans from popular HMI SCADA applications including those from Wonderware and Intellution ScanServer supports OPC DDE compliant environments such as Microsoft Excel NetScan Us
69. must press F12 each time you start ChartView This expanded menu is typically not used by the operator The Raw Thermocouple Input and Raw Temperature Sensor Input selections primarily exist as an aid in troubleshooting by experienced technicians 4 26 ChartViewSoftware Reference si isi i NetScan User s Manual Setup Channels amp Alarme Ctrl L Acquisition Chrl L Data destination Channels amp Alarms Ctrl L Accesses the Setup Window for configuring channels and alarms From the channels amp alarms dialog box you can select the Acquisition Setup and Data Destination dialog boxes Acquisition Accesses the Acquisition Setup dialog box From the Acquisition Setup box Ctrl C you can select the Channels amp Alarms dialog box as well as the Data Destination dialog box Data Destination Accesses the Setup Window for assigning the Data Destination and provides a 7 means of configuring the Auto Re arm feature for ChartView Plus see page 4 39 From the Data Destination dialog box you can directly access the Acquisition Setup and the Channels amp Alarms dialog boxes Bar Graph Analog and Digital Meters Overview This section pertains to channel data display screens windows or dialog boxes other than the main chart screen ChartView s main window After a brief discussion and illustration of each meter type commonalties to these three types of meters is presented These common areas include Toolbars P
70. on the toolbar s PostView button or select PostView from the pull down menu Each of these methods is illustrated in the following figure Actions in the decision diamond are performed automatically by PostView and require no user action Method 1 Open PostView Directly from Windows Explorer Desktop Icon or Start Run browse Windows Explorer Open PostView Data1 iot Data2 iot Data3 txt PostView s File Open Box Does Display Configuration File Exist 9 PostView uses existing Display Configuration File Data1 io PostView opens Chart Setup Wizard Method 2 Open PostView directly from the Data Acquisition Program Seen File Chart View Acquire Data Window Device Setup chm gt 00 ale PV g Does Exist 9 Data File PostView uses existing Display Configuration File Data io Does Display Configuration ile Exist V any Nas YR ALY Charting Oniaizing charing Dik Buffering in instrument Uploading Open Datal iot OK Data2 iot Data3 txt Open PostView from the data acquisition program by using the PostView button or by sel
71. operating scenarios If you have any difficulty regarding address settings please contact your network administrator a If necessary make changes to the address settings then press the Apply Changes button You may need to refer to the TCP IP information beginning on page 1 8 or contact your network administrator b Press the Next button see following figure 1 6 Configuring and Starting NetScan NetScan User s Manual HetScan Configuration Utility Welcome Step 1 Step2 Step 3l Finished NetScan TCP Internet Address ooo 0o00 0o00 000 NetScan TCPAP Sub net Mask ooo 000 oo0 ooo NetScan TCPAP Gateway Address ooo 000 oo0 ooo Shown above are the current configuration settings of the NetScan network interface Make any necessary changes to these settings and press the Apply Button to make the changes take effect Aoply Ehanges NetScan Configuration Utility Step 3 You will receive a gt gt Communications Error lt lt if the NetScan Configuration Utility fails to communicate with NetScan Likely causes are 1 Wrong COMM Port selected in the utility step1 2 Serial cable connected to wrong connector on NetScan PC or both If you received the error message check system cable connections correct the problem then return to Step 2 and perform the requested actions Finished a Exit the NetScan Configuration Utility b Cycle NetScan s power switch Off and
72. other times represented as hours minutes seconds and tenths which have Allows markers to be turned off and on for all visible graphs When a check appears in front of an item its indicator is on or visible This function is hidden unless a comment has been added to the data header file If such a comment has been entered then Data Commentary will be visible allowing you to display the comment in a message box The comment feature is supported by certain acquisition software and can only be used by PostView versions 3 3 or greater For ChartView users note that commentary can be entered in ChartView s Setup Data Destination dialog box providing the commentary feature is enabled To enable the feature in ChartView start with the View pull down menu and navigate as follows View gt Options Acquisition gt 3 Enable PostView Comment refer to the software chapter if needed 2 The initial PostView help screen provides an overview and listing of the help file contents Provides PostView s version number NetScan User s Manual Understanding Groups Charts and Channels As indicated in the figure on page 3 when no display configuration file is found PostView opens the Chart Setup Wizard to assist you in creating a display file To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you need to understand the relationship of Groups Charts and Channels The Chart Setup Wizard feature is discussed immediately following this
73. program Clicking on the button accesses a Display Configuration Setup box which displays the configured structure of the groups charts and channels From this box you can select the number of charts to be assigned to a specific group With the use of the mouse cursor you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing Display Configuration is discussed in more detail immediately after description of the pull down menu options The Zoom Out button doubles the visible timebase showing more of the waveform For example if 10 seconds of information is visible clicking the Zoom Out button will show 20 seconds The Zoom In button halves the visible timebase showing less of the waveform For example if 10 seconds of information is visible clicking the Zoom In button will show 5 seconds Autoscale Clicking the Auto Scale button adjusts the Y axis labels so that the waveform fills 90 of the chart s range Affects all channels of the selected Y axis Adjust The Y axis Adjust fields show the chart s minimum and maximum 1 for currently selected charts in the engineering units shown Clicking the Auto Scale button automatically adjusts the Y axis Adjust fields 8 ShowGrid Places a grid on the chart s or removes the grid if already present Show Markers Each chart contains a cross hair marker that shows the numerical values of time and magnitude at its present location in the waveform The Markers start out at the far left o
74. provides an example The message is stored in the header file that is created when an acquisition saves data to disk The PostView Comment option should only be used for systems having PostView version 3 3 or later The comment field in the header file is not compatible with the earlier versions of PostView Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Data Destination Folder C SwINDOWSSTEMP Filename Untied Emwee Format Excel Scan Format X Time Date Stamp D Alam Stamp Digital Input Stamp Data Commentary Group 1 Chart 1 Ch 1 Ch 2 and Ch 3 Temperatures are from Building C Generator Room Group 1 Chart 2 Ch 8 Ch 9 and Ch 10 Temperatures are from Building E Generator Room Auto Re Arm Capture one trigger block Auto Re Arm Disabled Example of a Data Commentary Entry for PostView When in PostView version 3 3 or greater the data commentary can be read by selecting Data Commentary from PostView s Option pull down menu The commentary is displayed in a message box NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 19 Acquisition continued Charts System Acquisition W Enable Postview Comment Postview 3 3 or later only Automatic Keyboard This feature works in conjunction with Keyboard Triggering when Auto Re arm is being Trigger used Auto Re arm is discussed on page 4 39 on Auto Re arm If
75. reporting register hierarchy works Notice that the clearing of the higher level registers cleared the bits in the lower level registers that were associated with the root cause of the condition PRINT 1 NO X N16 X PRINT 1 E X INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS PRINT 1 U2XK INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS PRINT 1 U0OX INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS PRINT 1 U1X INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS Error occurs Cause an error Query the ESC to determine the cause of the error Get the response Screen shows E016 This is a calibration error Get the response Screen shows E002 This is a calibration Gain error Get the response Now query the STB Get the response a a Now query the ESR reading ESC should have cleared it Configure ESB in the STB to be set when a Device Dependent Query the CSR to determine the cause of the calibration error Screen shows 000 Device Dependent Error no longer there Screen shows 4 ESB bit no longer set only Ready is set NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Trigger Latency Each trigger source has an associated latency This is the time between the actual trigger and its recognition by the acquisition device The following latency times are only representative of the time between when the trigger is detected and when the trigger has been processed Hardware latency times and ISR servicing of other tasks at the time of the trigger event but
76. s When using this feature the existing calibration settings will not change Calibration Without ScanCal Password To perform calibration the calibration mode must be enabled The Enter Calibration Mode K command enables calibration where keyword is the five digit keyword or password currently configured for the unit Your scanning unit is shipped with a default password of 12345 This password can be modified by the Change Calibration Keyword K command once Calibration Mode has been entered Calibration mode is ended by executing the End Calibration Mode E command Attempts to execute calibration commands without entry into calibration mode will result in a calibration status error If the password is lost or forgotten a new password can be entered after enabling the calibration mode This mode is enabled by indenting the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton After pushing in the button execute the K command to change the existing password For more information refer to the Hardware Protected RAM section on page 6 2 Disable writing to RAM after successfully changing the password by setting the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton to the disable non indent position Note to ChartScan users Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position N
77. scans Pre trigger Scans Scans Composing a Single Acquisition Trigger Block These components constitute a single Trigger Block in the internal memory Every Trigger Block has one and only one Trigger point This figure describes a Trigger Block C 10 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Pre Trigger State i a The Pre Trigger state is defined as the period after NetScan has ia been configured to collect an acquisition via the Trigger a a ee UR Configuration T command and before the actual Trigger event occurs While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will Trigger flash As in any other acquisition state the alarms and their Trigger With Synchronization Flag Off associated outputs will be updated at the fastest rate possible e ate under the current channel configuration Pretrigger Scan soo a It is during this state in which NetScan may be configured to A e L e collect Pre Trigger data This may be accomplished by PE hoa SE z ae specifying a non zero value for the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command The Pre Trigger count value E coupled with the current channel configuration however cannot Event exceed the total amount of available memory Trigger Wih s paehromizanan TIGR Un If the Pre Trigger count is set to a non zero value NetScan will begin sampling Pre Trigger data at the rate specified by the current normal scan interval via the Set Scan Interval I comma
78. sections Trigger Latency and Trigger Overrun later in this appendix st Scan Pre trigger Scans Po 78th Scan DN Trigger Post trigger Block 1 Scans a 232th Scan iii 1233th Scan 234th Scan ist Sean 3rd Scan Pre trigger 4th Scan Scans 98th Scan 98th Scan AL Read Pointer IN Trigger l Block 2 Post trigger Scans 678th Scan S i Scans 824th Scan a Post stop Multiple Trigger Blocks NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Acquisition Buffer Interrogation Note In the following sections current trigger block always refers to the trigger block that is currently being read The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the Buffer Status String U6 command As mentioned earlier the U6 command is a user query command which will return information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The acquisition buffer holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more trigger events This data is held in trigger blocks within the buffer Each trigger block defines one acquisition that has taken place An acquisition consists of the following e pre trigger scans optional e post trigger scans e post stop scans optional The trigger blocks may be variable in length The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which the current trigger
79. single channel mode burst mode Note If Digital Input Stamping 1 is also enabled it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp A Without Alarm Stamping default PRINT 1 A 0X Disable alarm stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve it PRINT AS 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 NetScan User s Manual C 15 Configuration Aspects for Programmers With Alarm Stamping PRINT 1 A 1X PRINT 1 R1X LINE INPUT 1 A PRINT AS Appendix C Enable alarm stamping Configure and start an acquisition Request the next scan in the buffer Retrieve it 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 005 128 032 066 Alarm Codes 1 Convert from decimal number to 8 place binary 005 128 00000101b 10000000b 032 00100000b 066 01000010b 2 Align binary digits with alarms 1 through 32 as follows 00000101 10000000 00100000 01000010 87654321 E vi 32 31 26 25 Alarm Numbers 2 32 alarms total 3 1 corresponding alarm ON 0 corresponding alarm OFF How to Decode Alarms Digital Input Stamping 1 Digital Input Stamping 1 allows you to see whether a digital input was active or inactive at the time of the scan This is accomplished by a digital input ON 1 or OFF 0 code appended to the scan in real time Digital Input
80. that row Timestamp Format This feature can only be used if Jimestamps have been enabled in the Setup Destination dialog box If this is the case you can select a pre configured format for the timestamps sent to the Excel spreadsheet Available formats are indicated in the previous screen capture This feature only affects the timestamp format in the Excel spreadsheet It has no effect on timestamps saved to disk Timeout Region This field allows you to enter a DDE link timeout value from 5 to 3276 seconds The value is how long the data import to Excel can be suspended while you perform a second Excel activity such as displaying graphs A screen message informs you when the DDE link is timed out terminating the DDE link to Excel Link to Excel Creates DDE link to Excel spreadsheet Excel must already be running and Excel Format must be selected in the Setup Data Destination dialog box Upload Data Enables ChartView to retrieve scans from device memory as data becomes available The acquisition is During active Acquisition automatic control Stop Upload Stops ChartView s transfer of data from the instrument to disk Ctrl J manual control NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 21 4 22 Upload Available Scans Ctrl U manual control Upload Scans Until Done Window Enables ChartView to access device memory for all scans currently available This function only uploads scans that are curre
81. the command must be followed by the Execute X command Any number of Execute commands may be inserted into the same command string EXAMPLE PRINT 1 C Clear the current channel configuration PRINT 1 C1 16 1 C17 2 C18 32 3 Send channel configuration PRINT 1 U4 Get HLL for the new channel configuration ERROR light turns ON PRINT 1 X Instruct the unit to execute its command input buffer Now the unit has its new channel configuration PRINT 1 E X Find out what caused the error INPUT 1 A Retrieve Error response PRINT AS Screen shows E128 Conflict Error due to fact that no channels were configured C is a deferred command when the U4 was executed U4 is an immediate command A 50 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Y Set Counts or Select Blocks Acquisition Deferred SYNTAX When in Normal mode of data acquisition set acquisition counts where pre stop is the pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and stop is the post stop count When in High speed single channel mode burst mode set count where count is the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Query current acquisition count selections DESCRIPTION Normal Mode When in Normal mode for data acquisition the Set Counts Y command can be used to select a pre trigger post trigger and post stop count to define the size of the acquisition The pre trigger count cannot excee
82. the option is disabled acquisition data is saved to disk and the device automatically re arms ChartView displays the Trigger dialog box and waits for the trigger button to be pressed by the user before beginning the next acquisition If the option is enabled 3 the trigger dialog box is not displayed and the trigger is automatically sent to the acquisition device The automatic trigger may be delayed by up to 2 seconds after the previous acquisition has finished Acquire Arm Acquisition Ctrl T bikam Etir Acquisition Status Start All Indicators Stop All Indicators Arm Acquisition Arms the data acquisition device in preparation of receiving a trigger Ctrl T Disarm Disarms the data acquisition device and discontinues the acquisition of data Ctrl Y Acquisition Status Displays the condition of a data acquisition Start All Indicators Starts all selected indicators for the spreadsheet Reading column Charts and Meters Stop All Indicators Stops all selected indicators for spreadsheet Reading column Charts and Meters DDE Configuration for Excel Link To Excel W Upload Data During Acquisition stop Upload etn Upload Aa alanle Seane Etri Upcad scans Onti Dane DDE Configuration for Excel Configures the DDE Dynamic Data Exchange operation of ChartView This pull down menu allows you to dynamically load collected ChartView data into an open Excel spreadsheet The three field regions ar
83. the trigger scan Channel Value Use specified value of a given channel Alarm Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan Absolute Time Use a time of day to start the trigger scan Note If Absolute Time is selected the use of Auto Re arm is disabled Stop Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count as specified below Keyboard isn t applicable If a MultiScan ChartScan or NetScan is connected and High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode is selected then Count from trigger is the only Stop available for the event configuration Count Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set Acquisition Parameters Scan Counts Specify the number of scans in an acquisition Pre trigger Post Stop Average weight Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode The value for the average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in Normal Mode Values of 1 2 4 and 8 are for high speed multiple channel applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue Values of 16 32 64 128 and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection Scan Intervals Time between scans frequency of scans Pre trigger and Post Stop Post trigger Use one Interval High Speed Setup Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high speed single channel mode Note These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress 4 38
84. thermocouples e In software software detection routines exist to sense if the input a d maximizes and to detect if an input exceeds the linearization limits If an open thermocouple range error is detected the Error Status Register will be set denoting that this particular error condition exists The offending channel s can be determined by reading their values If a channel is in error its value will be 3276 70 if temperature channel assuming units of C 005 7670000 if Volts channel Note Open thermocouple range error checking is only performed on channels previously activated by the c Command D 18 NetScan User s Manual Appendix E NetScan Program Examples Note As this manual goes to press program examples do not exist However program examples should be available on the release disk in the EXAMPLES subdirectory of the CHARTVIEW directory NetScan User s Manual E 1 NetScan Program Examples Appendix E E 2 NetScan User s Manual Appendix F ASCII Code Summary Decimal Values 00 to 63 ACG UCG amp LAG Box Items Hexadecimal Value 41 Decimal Value A in center ASCII Character A ws Se A h PN A ws O1 w NetScan Users Manual Ba ASCII Code Summary Appendix F Decimal Values 64 to 127 TAG amp SCG Box Items Hexadecimal Value 41 Decimal Value in center ASCII Character F200 NetSean User s Manual ASCII Code Summary Appendix F ASCII C
85. unit to the controller If absolute time stamping is enabled the format is HH MM SS MIL MM DD YY where MIL milliseconds If relative time stamping is enabled the format is HH MM SS MIL DDDDDDD where MIL milliseconds and DDDDDDD days In the relative mode the time stamps are relative to the trigger scan which is time stamped 00 00 00 000 0000000 This implies that the pre trigger scans are negative and post trigger scans are positive Refer to the Time Stamping section of Appendix C for details Note Relative time stamping will not be valid if you attempt to use it in conjunction with continuous gap free acquisitions with two timebases In addition time stamping is not valid in burst mode Note If the output format is binary instead of ASCII the time stamp is returned as ten eight bit bytes in 2h 2 hexidecimal digit format Examples for absolute and relative time stamp formats are provided below Note that the 2h digit format can not be printed EXAMPLE PRINT 1 T1X Enable absolute time stamping PRINT 1 T2X Enable relative time stamping PRINT 1 TOX Disable time stamping Format Examples of Absolute and Relative Time Stamping Absolute Time Stamping Relative Time Stamping ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for ASCII and 2h Digit Examples for 3 p m 2 min amp 5 secs after hour July 9 1997 14 hours 30 minutes 10 days ASCII format 15 02 05 000 07 09 97 ASCII format 14 30 00 000 00000
86. used to activate the logging process or to disable an Ctrl A active log A check mark v preceding Log Enable indicates that the log is active No check mark present indicates the alarm log has not been enabled Instrument Error Brings up the Device Error Status dialog box This box lists existing error types including invalid Status command and channel configuration errors Instrument Brings up the Device System Time dialog box You can adjust the time and date settings from this Realtime Clock System Inventory Alarm Status Ea System Configuration TCMValts TE olts TCVolts TCAYolts TCeVolts TCvolts 1 16 ft fo Ca fo Ca fol Ea fo Ca Ya Ca 2 fo fo a fo ta fo fo E E ata fol fa fo E foka fo fa 17 dz TCA olte Empty Device Error Status E Menine Sieks Uha 4 Invalid Command Hours Min Sec Tenths Channel configuration error BE 2 HE BE Trigger overrun error HE al ME og Custom table error Month Day Year Set Time Date Device Status Dialog Boxes Interface d Status Configuration Faw Thermocouple Input Raw Temperature Sensor Input You can expand the Device pull down menu by pressing the F12 function key on your computer keyboard prior to pulling down the menu After pressing F12 the pull down menu will show a listing entitled Configuration The expanded menu setting is not saved in the configuration file when exiting ChartView If the expanded menu is desired you
87. was calibrated in the form 12 54 00 9 01 28 97 U13 Returns the last scan read U14 Returns card ID s Returns the lOtech product information in the form lOtech NetScan 0 v r where v is the version and r is the revision U16 Returns measurement parameters Returns the RMS value of the last burst mode operation Returns the contents of the system register o0 KA co H H x UI Status Event Reporting and Mask Registers The NetScan has several internal eight bit registers where each bit represents a certain condition event or error The contents and operation of each of these registers is described in subsequent sections You can access the registers via a command issued from the controller Status and Event Reporting Registers The following four registers cover a wide range of internal error and event conditions and each covers a particular aspect of event reporting responsibility Calibration Status Register CSR Indicates any error conditions during calibration Error Source Register ESC Indicates any general error conditions with the unit Event Status Register ESR Indicates special events that have occurred in the unit Status Byte Register STB Indicates critical operation events Mask Registers You can use the following two mask registers to configure the status and event reporting registers The mask registers are Event Status Enable ESE A mask for the Event Status Register ESR
88. which range from 0 to 255 The numbers are typically represented in a dotted decimal format for example 192 88 247 11 IP Address The IP Internet Protocol is a device address that is unique to one specific device located on the network A device s IP address can not be shared by any other device on the network The only restrictions on the IP address are 1 the first number must be between 127 and 255 2 the last number must be between 1 and 254 Sub net Mask The Sub net Mask determines how many addresses are on the network Note that Class C networks consist of up to 256 addresses and are quite common For a Class C Network the Sub net Mask would be 255 255 255 0 All computers on the network must have the same subnet mask Gateway Address A gateway address is needed to a access a device gateway or router that can route traffic from one network to another The gateway address is the actual address of the gateway router device 1 8 Configuring and Starting NetScan NetScan User s Manual Configuration There are four basic network scenarios that pertain to NetScan ethernet operation Note that proper TCP IP configuration is extremely important and you must obtain TCP IP addressing parameters before configuring the protocol The rules for configuration differ for each scenario as follows 1 Point to Point Setup PC System No Network NetScan Point to Point Setup In the Point to Point scenario NetScan is conn
89. with 5 trigger blocks each having different amounts of scan data Sample Acquisition Buffer Configuration Trigger Block Organization C 18 Each Trigger Block in the buffer has an associated trigger block descriptor used by internal processes for Acquisition Buffer maintenance Since the trigger block descriptor does take up memory it will have an indirect affect on some user defined processes For instance the 75 limit condition and the buffer overrun condition will occur on a fewer number of scans as the number of trigger blocks increases A trigger block becomes defined when the configured trigger start event occurs Once the start event occurs the data within the trigger block including any pre trigger data is available to be read even though the trigger block may not yet be complete Scan data is read and written to the trigger block in a FIFO fashion As the controller requests buffered scan data NetScan supplies the oldest available scan Once the scan is supplied it is no longer available There is no mechanism which allows jumping around in the buffer or going back to a scan that had already been read by the controller Reading the oldest scan automatically advances the read pointer in the current trigger block so that the next scan if acquired is immediately available Since scans are written into the trigger block sequentially the trigger scan may appear at any location within the trigger block NetScan will automatic
90. 0 OO 00 53 OOO 37 0 OO 02 16 0 OO 00 001 0 imager Paint t O Stop eat 00 01 4010 Pre Trgger Post Trgger Post Stop i Timebase Timebase Timebase Example of a PostView Timebase Note For many data acquisition programs trigger point t 0 may not be the first point in the data file NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 15 5 16 PostView It is possible for the data acquisition program to create files containing multiple timebases pre trigger post trigger and post stop data PostView accommodates all these features as shown in the previous example taken from a ChartScan 1400 unit with the ChartView data acquisition program e If pre trigger scans are available they will be shown prior to the trigger point and labeled with negative time numbers e If post stop data is available scans collected after the Stop Event they are displayed after the Stop Event marker e Ifa dual timebase was used when collecting the data PostView will show a discontinuity in the time axis when the timebase changes When a dual timebase is used the post trigger scans are collected at one frequency while the pre trigger and post stop scans are collected at another Note Some timebase aspects may differ depending on the actual data acquisition program used Refer to PostView s Help File for timebase information relating to specific data acquisition programs NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 Introduction 6 1 Manual Cal
91. 00000000000000000000000000000 1 21 11 PM 10 29 98 01000000000000000000000000000000 1 21 13 PM 10 29 98 11000000000000000000000000000000 1 21 14 PM 10 29 98 00000000000000000000000000000000 If you choose to log Alarm ID s and multiple Alarm state changes are detected during a single poll multiple lines of text will be saved in the log file one for each alarm that had a state change By examining the optional Time and Date information you can identify which lines in the Alarm log are associated with Alarms that were detected during a specific polling event If you have Alarm ID s enabled you can also choose to log Channel information The channel information contains the channel label and the current reading associated with the channel The following example shows what the alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected Alarm Log File Folder E SPROJECT S4CHAR TWA Fil ALARMS LOG ae Browse OF Alarm Log Options M Time IY Alarm ID Show Sllvelenne Show Single Alen Delimiter Character W Alarm Channels Tab M Date NetScan User s Manual 1 39 46 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 0O1 CH1 68 72 1 1 39 46 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 02 CH3 68 54 1 1 40 11 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 0O1 CH1 73 22 0 1 40 12 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 01 CH1 86 36 1 1 40 27 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 01 CH1 71 42 0 1 41 10 PM 10 29 98 Alarm 01 CH1 69 98 CH2 71 24 0 ChartView Software Reference 4 25 Log Enable Once an alarm log file exists log enable can be
92. 010 2h Timelncrement _ _ _ OE Hour S 1E Minute S 00 Second S Milliseconds for ASCII Milliseconds for ASCII low gt high low gt high 00000010 0A Day 00 low gt high 00 OE 1E 00 Microseconds for 2h digit 00 Microseconds for 2h digit 00 00 NetScan User s Manual A 15 API Command Reference Appendix A A Assign Alarm Output TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX Set alarm condition where chans is the channel s to assign to the digital output chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan output is the digital output number with which to associate the channel s where 0 lt output lt 32 Query channels assigned to digital output DESCRIPTION The Assign Alarm Output A command may be used to assign a particular channel or range of channels alarm condition s to a particular digital output This command allows internal alarm conditions to be sensed by external devices via the 32 TTL level digital outputs located on the back panel of the unit To use alarms the channels in question must be part of the channel scan Once the channels are configured by using the C command and made part of the scan the alarms are active No trigger or timebase assignment is required Alarming is totally independent of buffered operations If it is desired an alarm
93. 03 24 97 0850 20512 35 09 300 03 24 97 0950 30 LINE INPUT 1 AS Get HLL for channel 2 PRINT AS Screen shows 0450 20S02 00 29 500 03 24 97 0057 60510 35 00 400 03 24 97 0250 60 LINE INPUT 1 AS Get HLL for channel 10 PRINT AS Screen shows 0045 50S11 03 51 7 03 24 97 0110 10S12 55 09 1 03 24 97 0050 80 LINE INPUT 1 AS Get HLL for channel 15 PRINT AS Screen shows 0150 70803 39 01 200 03 24 97 0085 20905 25 17 300 03 24 97 40010 90 In example 1 notice that only those channels configured 1 2 10 and 15 where returned in the response Example 2 This example shows how to reset the High and Low values along with their associated Time Date Stamps It also shows the effect of specifying no HLL response terminator PRINT 1 F0 0 Q1 0 0 0 0x Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 C1 4 1X After an indiscriminate amount of time Configure and start the acquisition PRINT L U5X Query and reset the current HLL settings LINE INPUT 1 AS Get the response PRINT AS Screen shows 1450 20812 23 21 700 03 24 97 0850 20812 35 09 300 03 24 97 0950 30 0450 20802 00 29 500 03 24 97 0057 60810 35 00 400 03 24 97 0250 60 0045 50811 03 51 700 03 24 97 0110 10812 55 09 100 03 24 97 0050 80 0150 70803 39 01 200 03 24 97 0085 20805 25 17 300 03 24 97 0010 90 Notice that only one INPUT returned the ALL HLL data PRINT 1 S X Now Get the current time LIN
94. 1 0 1 1 1X Set the reading separator flag ON PRINT 1 FO 0X Data format is engineering units degrees C PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure channels 1 4 as T C type J PRINT 1 1I00 00 01 0 0 00 00 1 Configure scan interval PRINT 1 Y100 1000 50xX Configure acquisition counts PRINT 1 NO N2 X Configure Event Status Register Bit ESB to be set when pre trigger count is satisfied PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Configure acquisition start trigger is Trigger On command stop trigger is Counts S 0 Wait for the pre trigger count to become satisfied WHILE S AND 32 PRINT 1 U1X INPUT 1 AS S VAL AS WEND PRINT 1 NO N1 x Configure ESB to be set when acquisition is complete S 0 Wait for the acquisition to become complete WHILE S AND 32 PRINT 1 U1X INPUT 1 AS S VAL AS WEND PRINT 1 U6X Get Buffer Status String LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve the response PRINT A Screen shows 0000001 0001151 0000100 10 02 02 0 04 24 93 00001000 10 23 30 0 04 24 93 00001050 01 Indicates that 100 pre trigger scans were acquired 1000 post trigger scans were acquired and 50 post stop scans were acquired NetScan User s Manual A 51 API Command Reference Appendix A Notes A 52 NetScan User s Manual Appendix B Ethernet API Reference Overview NetScan software provides an ethernet API that allows users to write programs Support consists of two files NPCI_WIN DLL for 16 bit windo
95. 1 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 Notice that after reading the scan there are now 20 215 scans in the buffer and the current read pointer is now at scan 99 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers The R2 command will read the oldest available trigger block in the Acquisition Buffer For instance continuing with the previous example PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT AS Screen shows 0000006 0020215 00000099 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 01 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there are 20215 total scans in the buffer Furthermore it shows that the current read pointer is at scan 99 in the Ist trigger block and that there are 350 scans in this trigger block To retrieve that trigger block perform the following PRINT 1 R2X Request the oldest trigger block LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 4 channels x 350 scans 1400 readings 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT AS Screen shows 0000005 0019865 00000100 02 15 34 100 03 24 97 00000100 04 51 10 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 Notice that there are now only 5 trigger blocks in the buffer and that there are only
96. 19 865 scans in the buffer Also note that the current read pointer is at the beginning of what was the next trigger block That trigger block is now the current trigger block The R3 command will read all available data within the Acquisition Buffer For instance continuing with the previous example PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 0000005 0019865 00000100 02 15 34 100 03 24 97 00000100 04 51 10 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 5 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there are 19 865 total scans in the buffer It also shows the current read pointer at the 100 scan in the Ist trigger block and that their are 351 scans in this trigger block 101 250 i e 101 scans from 100 to 0 plus the 250 scans from to 250 To retrieve all the scan data within the buffer PRINT 1 R3X Request all scan data in the buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 4 channels x 19865 scans 79460 readings 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT AS Screen shows 0000000 0000000 9999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Notice that the Buffer Status String is null indicating that the Acquisition Buffer is completely
97. 21 is turned On or Off from the View pull down menu Time Stamp can be absolute real time or relative Absolute time is based on your computer clock whereas relative time starts at 00 00 00 hours minutes seconds and then continues timing in increments relative to the Chart Speed 23 The Absolute or Relative time stamp style is selected from the Chart pull down file Status Message Box The Status Message Box 22 informs you of the status of the data acquisition device Several sample messages appear below Sample Status Messages Attaching to device Trigger device Setting acquisition parameters Setting channel configuration Acquisition active Updating active Setting the acquisition parameters Acquisition active No updating Charting Waiting for trigger Chart Speed Chart Speed 23 consists of a time per division value that can be changed using the faster rabbit button or slower turtle button Fourteen possible chart speeds are as follows 0 1 sec div 1 sec div 10 sec div 2 min div 30 min div 0 2 sec div 2 sec div 30 sec div 5 min div 1 hr div 0 5 sec div 5 sec div 1 min div 10 min div Status LEDs ChartView s Main Window contains five virtual LEDs item 24 for conveying the state of the system Each of the five indicators is labeled on the main window These indicators are Initializing Indicates ChartView is configuring the data acquisition instrument Charting
98. 3 Readings The reading column displays the scanning device input readings The column is activated when you select the Enable SpreadSheet Reading button The column s values are real time channel values from the instrument and cannot be altered by the user This column will update the readings as fast as the computer will allow Note Other areas of the SpreadSheet cannot be altered while the channel Readings column is enabled 4 Type A block of cells in this column can be selected for convenience of single type selection Double clicking a cell will select the next available type 5 Label The Label column identifies the input channel by descriptive name The label is used when selecting a channel in the trigger and chart selection lists The label column automatically uses the channel number as a default You can change the label to any alpha numeric designation not exceeding eight characters Each label used must be unique specific to its designated channel 6 Units Cells in the Units column are dependent on the Type selected and automatically change when the type is changed for example temperature units will be replaced by volts units when changing from a thermocouple type to a volts type If the channel ts configured for Temperature the units automatically change to C default at this point you have the option of selecting a different engineering temperature unit F K and R Note that the mX b equation
99. 3 23 97 00000767 12 54 12 900 03 24 97 00001156 01 Notice that the current read pointer has now advanced to pre trigger location 000075 and that the total scan count has been decremented to 001233 To retrieve data after a trigger event has occurred the NetScan provides multiple query functions The R command can be used to read the last scan in the data buffer R1 the last block in the data buffer R2 or all the data available R3 The U6 command will query the current trigger block for a variety of information such as the trigger block number current scan in block the scan number that trigger occurred etc See the U command description in the Command Reference section for details Scan 76 Scan 76 wee Scan 75 Read Pointer Pre trigger Scan 74 Pre trigger can can Scans S 73 Scans Trigger The Read Pointer Scan ieee Scan 000 No longer Scan 000 each scan is 4stScan accessable 1st Scan read Post trigger 379th Scan Post trigger Scans per sits Read Pointer 768th Scan 768th Scan Pete aa tL a Post stop Post stop a Scans Scans O 1157th Scan The Read Pointer is at Due to Reads Read the first scan in the Pointer has advanced trigger block into Post Trigger area a O1 N 5 ep O pab gt Trigger Block Read Operations NetScan User s Manual C 19 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Multiple Trigger Blocks
100. 4 LV S Three Types of Low Voltage Signal Conditioning Cards for use with ChartScan 1400 Number of Inputs 16 differential programmable by channel for input range Input Types 10V 5V 1V and 100mV Input Connectors Removable screw terminal blocks BNC or Safety Jacks Voltage Range Accuracy and Resolution e 100 mV 0 02 3 05 uV bit 1 V 0 02 30 5 uV bit e 5V 0 02 153 uV bit 10 V 0 02 306 uV bit Digital Filtering Used for AC line cycle noise rejection Selectable off 1 256 samples in a binary count Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 x rated accuracy C Input Impedance 1MQ typical Input Bias Current 20 nA maximum Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Common Mode Voltage 200 VDC or 200 VAC peak Maximum Allowable Input 25V rms Channel to Power Ground Isolation 200 V peak Channel to Channel Isolation 200V peak 7 14 NetScan User s Manual CSN14 HV S High Voltage Card with Safety Jack Connectors The CSN14 HV S card contains 16 differential input channels and is for use with safety jack type connectors Each CSN14 HV S card is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of the following three programmable ranges 2 5 volt 25 volt and 250 volt
101. 4 overlapping channels per chart There are four methods of adding channels These are as follows e Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left hand mouse button then click the Add button Repeat for each channel to be added e Double click on the channel in the available channels list to add in the selected channels list to remove e Hold down the keyboard s Shift Key and use the left hand mouse button to select a block of consecutive available channels up to 4 then click the Add button Example CH3 CH4 CH5 and CH6 e Hold down the keyboard s Ctrl button and use the left hand mouse button to select up to 4 available channels these can be non consecutive then click the Add button Example CH1 CH3 CH5 and CH7 as in the previous figure NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 13 5 14 PostView Note You can remove channels by highlighting a channel s in the Select Channels box and then clicking on the Remove button In the previous figure CH7 in the select box is highlighted Clicking the Remove button would delete that channel from Chart Note When a chart contains overlapping channels which share values such that their traces reside on top of each other the more recent channel will obscure the earlier channel Note that the lower a channel is on the display list the more recent it is in regard to the display 8 Inthe display area on the left hand side of the screen click on a channel to chec
102. 50 eee ees Trigger Block 3 Block 4 Trigger Block 5 Trigger Block 6 Trigger Block PANN Pre trigger Scans Post trigger Scans Post stop Scans Time Date Time Acquisition Buffer Interrogation Field Response 1 0000007 2 0020567 3 00000100 4 12 01 43 100 5 03 01 97 00000100 6 12 25 01 300 Trigger 7 03 01 97 PRRI 00000250 01 Date Implication Seven trigger blocks are available 20 567 scans are available The current read pointer is at scan number 100 negative 100 The trigger time stamp is defined as indicated The stop event pointer is defined as scan number 100 The stop event time is defined as indicated The end scan pointer is defined as scan number 250 The current trigger block has been completely acquired The trigger block has reached a normal termination In this example the trigger for the current trigger block has occurred and the Current Read Pointer is located at the first available pre trigger scan 00000100 An additional 50 post trigger scans are available NetScan User s Manual C 23 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Reading the Acquisition Buffer C 24 The three previous sections briefly discussed how the acquisition buffer may be accessed and read In this section the methods by which the acquisition buffer is read will be discussed in more detail As mentioned earlier the Acquisition Buffer is organized as
103. 8 50 DB50 Digital I O Mating Connector CA 1 Power Cable CA 192 5 10 Base T straight through ethernet cable 5 ft CA 192 Adapter 10 Base T cross over adapter FU 1 5 1 2A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 105 125V power line or FU 1 25 1 4A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 210 250V power line NetScan User s Manual 11 16 98 Configuring and Starting NetScan 1 1 Check and Install Hardware Depending on your order your NetScan unit may not require all the steps under this heading If a step does not apply to your unit simply go on to the next one Power Switch LED Indicators y LLLLALA ALARM TRIGGER SCAN SEND RECEIVE ERROR POWER Ethernet Interface i A PELE NETA ETHERNET LINK O ONEA A ETHERNET gt i j DIP Switch RS 232 422 TRIGGER TTL IN CHASSIS GROUND OUTPUT ALARMS AND DIGITAL 1 0 a O CALIBRATION ENABLE RS 232 422 Power Fuse Chassis Alarms amp Digital I O RS 232 422 Connector Holder Ground Trigger In TTL Output DB50 Connector DB9 Connector Calibration Enable Disable NetScan Rear Panel Verify Voltage Setting Based on your order your NetScan system was set at the voltage indicated on the sticker located on the rear of the unit near the power switch Verify that the voltage value indicated on the sticker matches the voltage of your intended AC power supply If you need to change the voltage selection for any reason refer to Chapter 7 s section e
104. 8 PostView 5 3 Note Chart Setup Wizard can be started from the File pull down menu Chart Setup Wizard s use in PostView is discussed on page 7 Toolbar The following table explains PostView toolbar items while the next page begins a description of PostView Menu items Menu and toolbar items are shown in the figure below File GoTo Options Help PostView Toolbar Items I aa Group Select This feature indicates the chart group which is being charted Clicking on the down arrow t reveals other chart groups configured by the user To select a different chart group simply pull down the group list and select the desired group The group list can be obtained by any of the following control options a clicking the down arrow 1 b using Ctrl G on the keyboard c using the keyboard up or down arrow key d using the page up or page down key If using a control option other than a you may need to select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard s Tab key until the group select box is selected When this happens the name of the currently selected appears in white on a dark background 12 Open Accesses the Open Data File window U eeeeeee 3 Print Sends PostView chart s to an assigned printer 4 The Display Configuration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box Configuration This box will also be displayed if manual setup is selected during use of the Wizard Chart Setup
105. BNC TTL Scan output is used for synchronizing equipment with NetScan NetScan can be programmed to trigger on a rising or falling TTL level Any TTL level signal gt 2 2V Hi lt 0 8V Lo may be used as a trigger pulse A trigger pulse may also be used to generate a Service Request Note that the TTL Out is a LS TTL compatible output 0 4 mA sourcing 8 mA sinking When a scan is logged into the acquisition buffer after the actual scan the TTL output signal is pulsed for 100 ms Refer to the following trigger timing diagram Scans Start of Channel Scan Pre Trigger Scans TTL Output as 100 ms See Enlargement A TTL Output l l x to 100 ms Post Stop Scans Scan Duration 20 ms to 2 secs Typical Trigger Timing Diagram Signal Conditioning Cards NetScan and its expansion chassis can each house a quantity of 4 signal conditioning cards 8 total for a possible 128 channels The signal conditioning cards can be varied using any combination of the following 5 types Hardware CSN 14 TC P CSN 14 LV T CSN 14 LV B CSN 14 LV S CSN 14 HV S Thermocouple and low volts card for units with subminiature plugs Low volts card with removable screw terminals Low volts card with BNCs Low volts card with safety jacks High volts card with safety jacks Each scanning module fits into the metal shielded chassis The chassis insulates the cards from noise and maintains a constant internal temperature CSN14 T
106. Buffer Status String U6 command As mentioned earlier the U6 command is a user query command which will return information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The acquisition buffer holds scan data that has been initiated by one or more trigger events This data is held in trigger blocks within the buffer Each trigger block defines one acquisition that has taken place The trigger blocks may be variable in length The Buffer Status String command provides the interface in which the current acquisition buffer configuration may be queried The Buffer Status String U6 command returns the following fields e Blocks Available This field represents the total number of blocks currently contained within the buffer The total represents the total number of blocks that have been triggered A block need not be complete to be included in this total it only needs to be triggered This field also represents the number of trigger blocks that the read block is behind the current write block If there are no blocks available then Blocks Available will be 0000000 e Scans Available This field represents the total number of scans available at the time the U6 command was issued It should be noted that pre trigger data is not available for use until the defined trigger event has taken place This total represents the total number of scans available across all blocks in the acquisition buffer If there are no scans available in the buffer then Scan
107. C P Thermocouple and Low Volts Card with Subminiature Plugs The CSN14 TC P card contains 16 differential input channels each of which may be configured as any thermocouple type or as a milli volt input Temperature values may be returned in units of C F K R or mV This signal conditioning card contains subminiature plug type connectors There are no user configuration switches or jumpers on the CSN14 TC P card ai 4 H m O 2i a a HelPyaellel fellebolelle fe mn Out CSN14 TC P Card with Subminiature Plugs Number of Channels 16 differential programmable by
108. ChartView You can use ChartView to e chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk e acquire data with no charting or meter use e use charting and or meters while acquiring data to disk Chart channels and or monitor with meters with no acquisition of data to disk Acquisition State Waiting for Trigger Prior to charting channels on ChartView s Main Window you need to configure a display in regard to groups charts and channels This aspect of configuration is performed through Chart Setup Wizard discussed in the following text or through a Chart Setup window accessed through the Channel Configuration button on ChartView s Main Window In addition to charting channels you can monitor selected channels via digital analog and or bar graph meters Meter discussion begins on page 4 27 of this manual A detailed discussion of configuring Meters begins on page 4 32 Note Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time Acquire data with no charting or meter use Possible Acquisition Scenarios Acquiring and Uploading Acquisition Buffering Acquisition in Instrument and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Prior to acquiring data for saving to disk you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition window accessed through the Setup pull down menu of ChartView s Main Window or through use of the related icon button You can enable the desired channels and assign high and low alarm val
109. Command Reference Appendix A A 40 QC Query Card Data SYNTAX Read back card ID and calibration information from the card previously selected by the Select Card C command DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The information returned is as follows Card Number Gains and offsets for PGA values 0 7 Serial Number Offsets and temperature sensors Card ID type 16 TC Volts card Time and date last calibrated type 17 High Volts card C 001SN 0000000ID 016 Card ID type Card Serial Number Card Number G 1 00000 1 00000 PGA 0 Gain for positive input PGA 0 Gain for negative input PGA 0 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 BGA 1 Gain for positive input PGA 1 Gain for negative input PGA 1 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 BGA 2 Gain for positive input PGA 2 Gain for negative input PGA 2 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 PGA 3 Gain for positive input PGA 3 Gain for negative input PGA 3 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 PGA 4 Gain for positive input PGA 4 Gain for negative input PGA 4 Offset 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used 00000 1 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used 00000 G 1 00000 1 00000 Not Used Not Used Not Used CJ 00000 00000 00000 00000 10 07 23 6 12
110. Display 5 12 PostView Timebase 5 15 NetScan User s Manual 6 Calibration Expansion Chassis CSN Exp Option ee ec 7 17 MIORUCUGD eT g Connecting the Expansion Chassis 7 17 Calibration Setup 6 1 Automatic Channel Assignment 7 19 Non Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants ee 6 2 Hardware Protected RAM 6 2 ScanCal Software Application 6 3 ScanCal s Main Window 6 3 Using ScanCal 6 4 Interface Parameters System Inventory Appendices Calibration A dix A API C d Calibration Without ScanCal 6 5 Jaca clive Password 6 5 Appendix B Ethernet API Calibration Mode Indicator 6 5 Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Command Active Indicators 6 5 Programmers Manual Calibration of Main Unit 6 6 Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Offset Calibration of Main Unit 6 6 Gain Calibration of Main Unit 6 8 CHENES Manual Calibration of Appen E NetScan Program Examples Signal Conditioning Cards 6 10 Appendix F ASCII Code Summary Offset Calibration of Cards 6 10 Appendix G NetScan Error Messages Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards 6 12 Gain Calibration of High Volts Card 6 15 Cold Junction Calibration 6 17 Appendix H Abbreviations 7 Hardware Setup Overview 7 1 Front Panel 7 1 Rear Panel 7 2 Power Aspects 7 3 Changing the Voltage Setting
111. E INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS Screen shows S 13 20 00 1 03 24 97 PRINT 1 U4X Now again query the HLL settings LINE INPUT 1 AS Get the response PRINT AS Screen shows 0980 20S13 20 01 700 03 24 974 0959 20513 20 09 300 03 24 97 0975 80 0260 70S13 20 29 500 03 24 97 0245 60513 20 00 400 03 24 97 0257 60 0047 50S513 20 51 700 03 24 97 0051 10S13 20 09 100 03 24 97 0049 80 0047 50S513 20 51 700 03 24 97 0051 10S13 20 09 100 03 24 97 0049 80 0015 70S13 20 01 200 03 24 97 0008 20513 20 17 300 03 24 97 0010 40 In example 2 notice that issuing the U5 command caused the High and Low values and their associated Time Date Stamps to be reset NetScan User s Manual D 3 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Example 3 Example shows how to read only the Last readings PRINT 1 F0 0 Q1 1 0 0 0X Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI Configure four channel no setpoints PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 U1L3K Just get the Last channel readings INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 1 PRINT AS Screen shows 0950 30 INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 2 PRINT AS Screen shows 0250 60 INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 3 PRINT AS Screen shows 0050 80 INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 4 PRINT AS Screen shows 0010 90 Notice that since a HLL response terminator was
112. EB Y Center 5i EB Y Min o EB Units Division 17 59 EB Select method of adjusting channel setup Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 Remember you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor 4 14 ChartViewSoftware Reference siitsi isO NetScan User s Manual Channel Configuration The Channel Configuration button brings up the Setup Window with one of three tabbed dialog boxes displayed Acquisition Setup page 4 33 Channel amp Alarm Setup page 4 33 or Data Destination page 4 39 The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file The Channels amp Alarms dialog box is used to configure channels and alarms the Data Destination dialog box is used to assign a filename and folder location for data select an Excel or binary format TXT or LOT respectively and to select optional Time Date and or Alarm Stamps to be included in the data if desired You can tab back and forth from each one of these dialog boxes to the other PostView post acq data viewer The
113. ETE Alam Channels amp Alarms Ctrl L Acquisition Chl C Data destination Q 15 Click on the Channels amp Alarms selection The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box appears similar to that shown in the following figure x Chart iew Sel File Gro Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination EN 30H mor SIOFF Alarm ae T J 3276 60 3276 60 0 00 E On 0051 50 J CH2 T 3276 60 3276 60 On 005290 J CH3 L 3276 60 3276 60 Tien 4 0n 005210 J CH4 sie 3776 60 3276 60 gnnl Q 16 Enable the desired channels You can enable channels by double clicking on the applicable channel s On column obtaining On indicating enabled or Off indicating disabled You can also use a pull down list which appears for enable disable See Chapter 4 if more detail is needed Channels set up for your display will be automatically enabled You can enable additional channels for data acquisition These additional channels will not appear on ChartView s Main Window but data from them will still be acquired Q 17 Click on the Enable SpreadSheet Reading button see previous figure This activates the display scanned data in the reading column Since we are in the Simulated Instrument mode the Reading column of the Analog Input SpreadSheet will now display simulated data Selecting the Enable SpreadSheet
114. Ei a Mode Normal X Use One Interval C High speed single channel Acquisition Dialog Box Normal Mode Q 19 Click Okay to exit the Acquisition dialog box Note that we are using the Acquisition default settings and the Data Destination default settings in this tutorial as shown in the above figure Note The following table provides a brief description of various acquisition setup parameters 2 10 ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual Acquisition Setup Parameter Options Event Configuration Trigger Set a trigger scan in the Acquisition by using one of the following Keyboard Use Console Trigger dialog box to start trigger scan Note If the Keyboard Trigger is selected the use of Pre trigger is disabled External TTL Use an external signal to start the trigger scan Channel Value Use specified value of a given channel Alarm Use an Alarm value to start the trigger scan Absolute Time Use a time of day to start the trigger scan Note If Absolute Time is selected the use of Auto Re arm is disabled Stop Set a stop scan in the Acquisition by using one of the above selections or Count as specified below Keyboard isn t applicable If a MultiScan 1200 or NetScan is connected and High Speed Single Channel Burst Mode is selected then Count from trigger is the only Stop available for the event configuration Count Specify a number of scans to be read before a stop scan is set Acq
115. F 89 0 F 1 5 F Spreadsheet and charted Channel 2 s charted value 1 5 F value for Channel 2 Note The reference channel feature is only available with ChartView Plus NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 35 Note When using a channel as a reference channel remember that lower numbered channels are calculated ahead of higher numbered channels e g CH1 is calculated ahead of CH2 This makes a difference when subtracting a reference channel in regard to the time aspect of the reference value If the channel ts configured for Volts the units automatically change to V at this point you have the option of selecting the millivolt unit mV The user can also change each channel to apply a linear equation mX b to the data When the mX b option is selected the Configure Engineering Units dialog box is displayed You are prompted to define m and b and the engineering units label as well as which standard units the mX b equation should be applied to The engineering units chosen will be displayed in the Units column and the mX b equation will be applied to the reading from the device before the reading is displayed or written to disk The mX b option is convenient for obtaining a value that has a linear relation to a channel reading X is the scanned voltage value read back from the acquisition device m is but not limited to a proportionality constant or gain factor but not zero b is the of
116. FAX 33 130 699 120 Toll Free in France 0800 4 06342 e mail france omega com Daimlerstrasse 26 D 75392 Deckenpfronn Germany Tel 49 07056 3017 FAX 49 07056 8540 Toll Free in Germany 0130 11 21 66 e mail germany omega com 25 Swannington Road P O Box 7 Omega Drive Broughton Astley Leicestershire Irlam Manchester LE9 6TU England M44 5EX England Tel 44 1455 285520 Tel 44 161 777 6611 FAX 44 1455 283912 FAX 44 161 777 6622 Toll Free in England 0800 488 488 e mail uk omega com It is the policy of OMEGA to comply with all worldwide safety and EMC EMI regulations that apply OMEGA is constantly pursuing certification of its products to the European New Approach Directives OMEGA will add the CE mark to every appropriate device upon certification The information contained in this document is believed to be correct but OMEGA Engineering Inc accepts no liability for any errors it contains and reserves the right to alter specifications without notice WARNING These products are not designed for use in and should not be used for patient connected applications How To Use This Manual Chapter 1 Configuring and Starting NetScan provides information to get your NetScan system up and running on the ethernet Includes software installation instructions Chapter 2 ChartViewNET Quick Start and Tutorial includes basic concepts regarding the ChartViewNET software program and a ChartView tutorial to quickl
117. L Registers will only be updated for configured channels Furthermore you can only access HLL Registers for configured channels You can not access HLL Registers of non configured channels You can clear the High and Low readings for each actively configured channel in any of the following ways e Power cycle the NetScan e Create a new channel configuration e Explicitly clear the readings by command This is discussed in the next section Note When the High and Low values are cleared their associated Time Date Stamps are cleared as well After being cleared the new High and Low values along with their associated Time Date Stamp will be initialized on the next updating of the HLL Registers Accessing HLL Registers D 2 You can access the HLL Registers by issuing commands from the controller You can use the commands to access any or all the HLL contents of configured channels as well as clear the High and Low readings and associated Time Date Stamps Briefly the commands are as follows U4 Read HLL Registers for all configured channels US Read HLL Registers for all configured channels and reset the High and Low values U13 Read Last only for all configured channels R Read Last only for channel s specified Note The HLL registers contain the highest and lowest values of the channel since it was last cleared and the last value read for each channel in the channel scan Two queries are available to read the HLL registers U4 a
118. Likewise if post trigger scans are being read the Current Read Pointer will be greater than 0 If the current scan to be read is the trigger scan the Current Read Pointer will be 00000000 If the Current Read Pointer is undefined its value will be 0999999 4 Trigger Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the trigger event occurred for the current trigger block This field takes on the same format as other time date trigger stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the trigger event has not occurred this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 5 Stop Event Pointer This field represents the location in the current trigger block that the stop event occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 6 Stop Event Time and Date Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the stop event occurred for the current trigger block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 NetScan User s Manual C 21 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Append
119. NetScan Channel Types NetScan a 30 igh COo ae High Voltage Card The following list outlines the channel type definitions Null Type The null channel type is type 0 Assigning a channel to the null type will remove the channel from the scan group Thermocouple Card Types See the following tables for details Volts Card Types See the following tables for details High Voltage Card Types See the following tables for details Reserved Types Reserved types are types that are reserved to the internal processes of the unit Among these types 90 and 91 are reserved for chassis calibration Refer to Chapter 6 for calibration details A 18 NetScan Users Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Note Specifying a reserved type will cause an error Note Since the Configure Channels C command is a deferred command the channel s will not actually be configured until the Execute X command is processed Also since the configuring of channels takes a good deal of processor time it is recommended that as many Configure Channels C commands should be placed on one command line as possible This will avoid unnecessary processing time overhead when configuring many channels Thermocouple Card Types For Troubleshooting purposes only not for normal operation These special types are valid only in degrees Celsius Thermocouple Normal Same as Temp Temp Type Operation normal sensor sensor operation Without tempe
120. NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers As mentioned above more than one channel can be assigned to any given output bit For example if the following statement were appended to the above example then either channel 2 or channel 3 will set digital output 2 High Set Point Hysteresis Value Low Set Point Enter Leave Enter Leave Alam Alarm Alarm Alarm State State State State Alarms and Setpoints PRINT 1 A3 2X Assign alarm channel 3 to digital output 2 To disable a channel from an alarm assign the channel to the null or O output PRINT 1 A3 0X Disable channel 3 from digital output 2 Set Point Hysteresis To avoid threshold transition problems a hysteresis value can also be programmed After the alarm set point is exceeded the signal must drop below the high set point or above the low set point by the hysteresis value before the alarm is reset For example assume a channel has alarm set points of 100 and 100 and a hysteresis of 10 In this case the NetScan would remain in an alarm condition until the set point fell below 90 or rose above 90 depending on which of the two set points triggered the alarm Unwanted Transitions High Set AAN Point NetScan User s Manual C 27 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Digital I O Operation As shown in the DB50 pinout in the Installation and Configuration section the NetScan has digital I O pins for ei
121. ON Deferred SYNTAX FHfreq Select burst mode sampling frequency where freq is a real number and where 38 5 lt freq lt 20000 0 Hertz default DESCRIPTION The Set Burst Mode Frequency F command is used to select the channel sampling frequency when in the High speed single channel mode burst mode See Measuring Modes section of Appendix D for more information For AC measurements where the RMS value is to be returned via the U16 command it is the user s responsibility to program a frequency which will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle in order to compute the RMS accurately In general for AC measurements the frequency should equal 2n 60 Hz where n is a positive integer EXAMPLE PRINT 1 F 15000 0xX Select 15 KHz sampling frequency PRINT 1 F 100 5xX Select 100 5 Hz sampling frequency NetScan User s Manual A 25 API Command Reference Appendix A G Calibrate Channel Gain TYPE Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Gchan Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chan is type the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 type is the channel type DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Channel Gain G command is used to calib
122. R SERIAL A oan Ml DIP Switch eee TTL Note 2 OO Calibration Enable Disable RS 232 422 Pushbutton Note 1 DB9 Connector NetScan Rear Panel Important To enable calibration locate the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton ChartScan User s see notes and 2 below Push the button so it is in the indent position This enables writing to RAM Note 1 ChartScan users only Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For units with no calibration pushbutton a DIP Switch is used instead of the pushbutton as described in note 2 ChartScan units that do have the pushbutton will have it located on the rear panel as in the above NetScan figure Note 2 ChartScan users only for units with no Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton f you are using an early production ChartScan unit with no calibration pushbutton then you will enable the calibration mode by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position 6 2 Calibration NetScan User s Manual CAUTION Unless you are setting main unit calibration constants or changing the password the calibration mode should be disabled ScanCal Software Application ScanCal s Main Window The calibration mode applies to main unit calibration and not to the calibration of signal conditioning cards Select the ScanCal option from the ChartView Program Group ScanCal
123. R PRINT R Screen shows 0103 20 channel 16 is 103 2 C PRINT 1 R 1 4X Get the Last readings for channels 1 4 LINE INPUT 1 R PRINT RS Screen shows 0003 70 channel 1 is 3 7 C 0005 60 channel 2 is 5 6 C 0010 20 channel 3 is 10 2 C 0024 40 channel 4 is 24 4 C S Set Real Time Clock TYPE System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Stime Set the unit s internal real time clock where time is in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes SS is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year Query Stime as defined above DESCRIPTION The Set Real Time Clock S command is used to set the unit s internal real time clock The time argument follows the same format as the standard time date stamp input format as specified in the Data Format section of Appendix D The Set Real Time Clock command is used to set the battery backed internal real time clock of the unit In order for the time date stamped data to be accurate the internal real time clock must be set to an accurate time date Once set however the battery backed real time clock will remember the current time even when powered off EXAMPLE PRINT 1 S14 00 00 0 4 30 93X Current date and time A 42 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference T Set Trigger Configuration SYNTAX Configure an acquisition of scan data with the fol
124. S Configuration Aspects for Programmers These scans are not recorded in the buffer Appendix C With a count of 100 only 100 scans before the trigger are stored in the scan buffer lt 150 Scans wane lt 100 Scans 60 lt Gals gt 4 lt 200 Scans gt n cb o Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Time Pre Trigger Post Trigger Post Stop Trigger Event Stop Event Trigger Event plop event Pre Trigger Set to 100 All scans between the last Stop Event and the next Trigger Event are stored in the scan buffer regardless of the number of scans 150 Scans 60 lt 200 Scans gt lt 200 Scans gt Scans 7 k oO a a Time Timebase 2 Timebase 1 Timebase 2 base 1 Time Trigger Event Stop Event Trigger Event Stop Event Pre Trigger Set to 1 To enable this functionality you must perform the following steps 1 Set the first parameter of the Counts Y command to 1 If more than one transition cycle is desired enable the Auto Rearm flag of the Trigger Configuration command If this is done each transition cycle will be stored in its own Trigger Block within the buffer 2 Set the timebase intervals for each event using the Timebase Interval I command 3 Specify the two trigger events via the Trigger Configuration T command The following graph shows how the above application would be organized within the buffer U
125. SN14 TC P Thermocouple T C and J K T E R S B and N or for Subminiature Plug Voltage 100 mV 1 V 5 V and 10 V The modularity of NetScan eliminates the need for synchronizing separate and possibly incompatible analog to digital A D measuring instruments or boards which is an important consideration because many temperature measurement systems require a combination of thermocouples and analog inputs NetScan is capable of sensing the signal conditioning module types that are plugged into each of its four signal conditioning module slots as well as the four module slots of the expansion chassis If you attempt to configure a channel number that is of the wrong type or does not exist a channel configuration error will be logged in the Error Source Register Associated with each channel is the channel number and type and optionally the high and low alarm setpoints and the setpoint hysteresis The minimum channel configuration required is a channel type assigned for a single channel or a range of channels The following text describes how to configure the possible channel types for each signal conditioning card accepted by NetScan and the expansion chassis Alarms are covered later in this appendix NetScan User s Manual C 7 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C CSN14 TC P Configuring Thermocouple Channels Begin configuring input channels by first specifying the channel type When the CSN14 TC P sig
126. Service Request Enable SRE A mask for the Status Byte Register STB The status registers CSR ESC and ESR are Read Clear Only registers they may only be read and cleared by the controller The read operations on these registers is a destructive read since it clears the register as it is read These registers can only be written to by internal NetScan operations The STB status register is a Read Only register it can only be read by controller The STB register can only be cleared or written to by the internal processes of the NetScan The mask registers ESE and SRE are Read Write Clear registers they can be written and cleared as well as read by the controller NetScan Users Manual a De Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Register Chart Status and Event Reporting Registers Command Type Register __ Access Read Write CSR Read Clear N A Error Source Eon ee S Event Status ieee E M Status Byte Register Chart Mask Registers Command Type Register Access_ Read Write Clear Event Status Clear See Enable Note Service Request Clear See Enable Note Note The mmm defines the contents of the register to be written Theory of Operation The following figure shows the general operation and relationship between the status reporting and mask registers Each register is part of a hierarchy of registers where operations on higher registers will affect the contents of lower registers in t
127. Stamping can be enabled with the I 1 command and disabled with the 1 0 command Note that C 16 there are 8 digital inputs Note Digital Input Stamping is not valid in high speed single channel mode burst mode Examples of I command follow Without Digital Input Stamping default PRINT 1 I 0X PRINT 1 R1X LINE INPUT 1 A PRINT AS Disable digital input stamping Configure and start an acquisition Request the next scan in the buffer Retrieve it 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers With Digital Input Stamping PRINT 1 I 1X Enable digital input stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve it PRINT A 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 036 000 The last six digits are the digital input stamping however the last three digits are not used and will always appear as 000 The following explains how to interpret the stamping codes Digital Input Codes 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 Hei ele L J 1 Convert from decimal number to 8 place binary 036 000 00100100 00000000 2 Align binary digits with digital inputs 1 through 8 as follows 00100100 00000000 Digital Inputs 87654321 l hd Not Used ON ON 3 Determine the status of the digital inputs as follows 1 corre
128. This allows for a clean slate approach to creating a chart display as opposed to an editing approach Channel and alarm configurations do not change with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled Normal Edit To explain editing a configuration we make use of an example where changes are desired for Chart 1 In the following figure Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the mouse cursor The Display Configuration Setup box then changed allowing you to see specific channel types such as volts only or to Show all Types as in the example From this setup box you can add or delete charts and channels You can hold down the Shift key and use the cursor to select several consecutive channels for addition or deletion hold down the Ctr key and use the cursor to select several non consecutive channels for addition or deletion double click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels double click on a selected channel to remove it from the selected channels list NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 9 Display Configuration Setup E Ok Display Number of charts in 3 the selected Group Group Name Group sis Display Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration Note When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels listed lower in the di
129. Trigger Configuration T command has a synchronization parameter sync that allows you to specify if the Trigger point is to be synchronized to the Pre Trigger normal scan interval If sync is set the Trigger point will occur on the next tick of the Pre Trigger normal scan interval Otherwise the Trigger point will occur at the point at which it is detected For example assume a sync setting with a Pre Trigger of 10 scans and a sample rate of 1 scan per minute If a Trigger event takes place 20 seconds after a scan a recorded Trigger point will happen on the next scan 40 seconds later Continuous Gap Free Acquisition with Two Timebases NetScan can be configured to have different timebases for its Pre Trigger and Post Trigger states The system can be configured such that when the Trigger condition is met NetScan will switch from the Pre Trigger to the Post Trigger state changing its timebase This feature along with automatic re arm can be used to collect continuous gap free data at two different timebases To ensure that the collected data is gap free the Pre Trigger count must be set to 1 via the Set Count y command If a value of O or higher is used as the Pre Trigger count only the number of Pre Trigger scans is placed in the buffer after the Trigger condition is satisfied The following graphs show an acquisition with the Pre Trigger set to 100 and then an acquisition with the Pre Trigger set to 1 NetScan Users Manual
130. Trigger is recognized and the acquisition terminated a new acquisition with the same configuration will be enabled automatically In other words after the termination of the previous acquisition the unit will immediately begin another acquisition of the same configuration Otherwise if the parameter is not set new acquisitions will remain disabled after the initial acquisition has terminated sync determines if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre Trigger Scan Interval I command value If the Pre Trigger Count Y command is defined this parameter will be examined to determine if the Start Trigger should be synchronized with the internal Pre Trigger Timebase Interval If so then the Start Trigger regardless of what point in time it occurred will be synchronized with the next occurrence of the Pre Trigger Scan Interval tick In other words if the real Start Trigger occurs between Pre Trigger Scan Interval ticks then the acquisition will not begin until the next tick of the Pre Trigger Scan Interval Otherwise the acquisition will begin as soon as the Start Trigger is encountered EXAMPLE PRINT 1 I12 00 00 0 Collect scans once every 12 hours then when Start 00 01 00 0X Trigger occurs collect them once every minute PRINT 1 Y100 10000 0X Set pre trigger count to 100 post trigger count to 10000 and define no post stop count PRINT 1 T1 7 0 1X Start Trigger On c
131. V T cards see note Banana Plug Type Short for CSN14 LV S cards see note Type U Subminiature Plug Short for CSN14 TC P cards see note Note The four types of shorting connectors are illustrated later in this section With exception of the type of shorting connector the offset calibration procedure is identical for each of the following cards CSN14 TC P CSN14 LV S CSN14 LV B CSN14 LV T CSN14 HV S CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge 1 Ensure the main unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it 2 Remove the calibration card used to calibrate the main chassis from slot 1 3 Install the signal conditioning card which will be used during data acquisition into slot 1 CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the ChartScan or NetScan and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be install
132. View Digital Meters e ChartView Bar Graph Meters The meter type data displays along with the charts can be on your computer screen at the same time They can be re sized and repositioned as desired Analog Digital and Bar Graph meters are detailed in Chapter 4 ChartViewNET Tutorial This tutorial is intended to help you gain a good understanding of ChartView The tutorial is based on an initial startup with no configuration file present ChartView allows you to operate in one of four different Device Interface modes IEEE 488 RS 232 422 Network ethernet or Simulated Instrument depending on your system s scanning device This tutorial makes use of the Simulated Instrument mode This mode provides a means of running ChartView and inspecting its features without hardware concern Note that you can change the interface mode at anytime during a configuration setup The arrow symbol Q followed by a number is used throughout the tutorial to indicate an action you are to complete Text without the arrow is for information content and does not require you to take any action 1 Select Interface Device Q 1 From Windows start ChartView by double clicking on the ChartYiew Startup ChartView icon The ChartView Startup dialog box appears Ho interface selected Q 2 Choose the Select Device button The Select Interface Dialog Box appears as indicated in the following figure Note The Load File button is for loading a
133. ViewNET to e chart and monitor specific channels with no acquisition of data to disk e acquire data with no charting or meter use e use charting and or meters while acquiring data to disk 1 Chart channels and or monitor with meters with no acquisition of data to disk Prior to charting channels on ChartView s Main Window you need to configure a display in regard to groups charts and channels This aspect of configuration is performed through Chart Setup Wizard discussed in the following text or through a Display Setup dialog box which is accessed through the Display Configuration Setup button toolbar item 7 on ChartView s Main Window In addition to charting channels you can monitor selected channels via digital analog and or bar graph meters Meters are discussed in Chapter 4 Note For ChartView Plus users up to four channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected 2 Acquire Data with no charting or meter use Prior to acquiring data for saving to disk you need to configure the acquisition using the Acquisition dialog box accessed through the Setup pull down menu of ChartView s Main Window or through use of the related icon button You can enable the desired channels assign high and low alarm values from the channel configuration dialog box 3 Chart channels and or use meters while acquiring data to disk Prior to using ChartView for charting and or meter us
134. XeCULe GOMMAN naa a a a a a a A 2 FIXOGI FORM AUS acie R a a inc teeta a e a A 3 CONIO ENO S eea a a a ule A 3 COMIMalnG Interpretator siiri aa aaa a A aa a SA RAA A 3 Immediate amp Deferred COMMANAS ccecceeccecceceeceeeececeueeeeeeceeneecaeeeeeeneesaueseesaeeneeeneeseenees A 3 Deferred Commands Order of EX Cution arseen e a Eae aa a A 3 COMMING Summary aisiais aa iaaa a aaa i a a a aa aE A 5 Command Referen e iane othe wad aaae eaea aana a e a aaa a aaa EA aaa Eana A 10 Command Description Format irese ebere ea a aiia e aaia aa e A 10 TE C OMMANG Ss s eer vecetti cit eee ce e a a a E eae A 10 a ara A T A20 ra A20 NetScan Users Manual 11 10 98 A 1 API Command Reference Appendix A Command Syntax Commands are identified by the following syntax formats e 6A single letter A through zZ e 6A single letter A through zZ followed by a pound sign e Anat sign e Anasterisk followed by a single letter A through Z In addition the commands are governed by the following syntax rules Case Sensitivity Commands may be entered in upper or lower case For example A1 1X is interpreted the same as a1 1X Spaces White space which consists of all ASCII values of 32 and below and includes the space tab new line and carriage return characters is generally allowed anywhere between commands and command arguments However white space is not allowed in the middle of command options For example 1 2 3
135. a FIFO First In First Out As such all data read from the Acquisition Buffer will be the oldest available data Furthermore once the data has been read from the buffer it is no longer available Upon completion of a read operation the data associated with the read operation will be deleted The Read Acquisition Buffer R command is the command by which Acquisition Buffer data is read You can use this command to read anywhere from one scan to all the scan data currently residing in the buffer This command has the following valid forms R1 Read the oldest scan available R2 Read the oldest trigger block available R3 Read all available scan data When an R command is issued the NetScan unit checks to see if the request can be fulfilled If s the requested scan data is moved from the Acquisition Buffer to the Output Queue where it waits until the controller initiates transfer Note The request may will not be fulfilled if either 1 no channels are configured or 2 the amount of scan data requested is not available If either of these is true a Conflict Error will be posted The R1 and R3 commands require that at least one scan be available and the R2 command requires that at least one complete trigger block be available The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte STB Register can be used to determine whether or not the Acquisition Buffer is empty This bit is set when at least one scan is available in the buffer The Buffer Status Stri
136. a subset of the configured channels PRINT 1 F0 0 sO 1 05405 0X Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure four channel no setpoints Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 R 2 3X Just get the Last reading for channels 2 and 3 INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 2 PRINT AS Screen shows 0250 60 INPUT 1 AS Get Last reading for channel 3 PRINT AS Screen shows 0049 50 Data Format F Readings from the NetScan are output in the format configured by the user The Data Format F command determines the engineering unit and whether an ASCII format binary format or a raw data count is to be used Options for the engineering units and data formats are shown in the following table Engineering Unit c Celsius default Fahrenheit i Rankine Binary High Byte Low Byte Kelvin Counts ASCII Volts a ee ee Note Ifa data format of 1 or 2 binary or 3 counts is specified as the data format the Engineering Units of the F command is ignored Data Input Formats The Data Format F command determines the format of only some of the data input from the controller Input data comes in the form of command parameters from the controller All commands and data sent to the NetScan are in ASCII although the engineering unit may vary The command parameters over which the F command determines their format are the high low setpoints an
137. ads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0 0 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to the connector s ground pins CAUTION Do not exceed the 0 0 to 5 3 volts levels described above Exceeding these levels may damage the NetScan unit in a way not covered by the warranty Note A CSN Relay is available for high current alarm output applications If used this card must be installed in the bottom slot of the NetScan s main chassis Installation instructions for CSN Relay are on page 1 3 of this manual Refer to chapter 7 for detailed information regarding the CSN Relay card 1 10 Configuring and Starting NetScan NetScan User s Manual The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs inputs and grounds associated with the DB50 connector Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32 respectively Outputs 1 through 16 can be used with the relay card option Chapter 7 contains additional information C O O O O 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 DO lii lt aerei tee 8 50 49 48 47 46 45144 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 u A Inputs Grounds Outputs Signal No Signal No Signal o ae COo le ne eS O 5 35 coe i 8 6 9 2 12 13 14 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 Ce 6 NetScan Users Manual Configuring
138. al Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Volts The default NetScan system units and resolution are dependent on the low or high volts range TA 100mV 3 12 uV bit 78 75 uV bit 31 21 uV bit 787 46 uV bit 156 06 uV bit 250 V 7 87 mV bit 312 12 uV bit The default binary format returns 2 bytes of 2 s complement binary data with the user selecting low high byte or high low byte For Volts channels all ASCII readings will be of the form XXX XXXXXXX where x is an ASCII digit Time Date Stamp Time Date values have the following ASCII format hh mn ss t mm dd yy hh mn ss t mm dd yy Value hh 00 lt hh lt 23 hh mn ss t mm dd yy m 01e mme 12 mn 00 lt mn lt 59 ss 00 lt ss lt 59 t 00 lt t lt 9 tenth of seconds mm 01 lt mms 12 dd valid by month yy 00 lt yy lt 99 Time Date stamp output values occur within HLL and acquisition buffer output queries Time Date stamp output values have the same ASCII format as Time Date with exception of the fourth value For Time Date stamp the value is mss milli seconds where 000 lt mss lt 999 An example 01 25 20 600 2 28 97 20 6 seconds after 1 25 AM on Feb oh Nas 1997 Scan Interval Scan Interval formats have the following ASCII format hh mm ss t An example 01 02 03 5 Scan interval of 1 hour 2 minutes and 3 5 seconds NetScan User s Manual D 7 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Bi
139. ally convert these physical scan locations to logical scan locations where the trigger scan is always oriented at location 0 The placement of the trigger scan at the origin facilitates the quick interpretation of the read pointer and gives a frame of reference for other locations within the trigger block All trigger block pointers are relative to the trigger scan From this point on text discussions will assume references to logical trigger blocks only The U6 command may be used to query the current read trigger block For example the U6 response for the previous figure assuming it was the only trigger block would be as follows PRINT 1 U6X Get status of current read trigger block LINE INPUT 1 A Get the response PRINT AS Screen shows 0000001 0001234 0000076 12 34 54 200 03 23 97 00000767 12 54 12 900 03 24 97 00001156 01 NetScan User s Manual Trigger 10000 Scans o Scans Block 3 16000 Scans Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers This response indicates that the first available scan is 0000076 which is a pre trigger scan This scan can be retrieved as follows PRINT 1 R1X Get the 0000076 scan LINE INPUT 1 A Get the scan PRINT A Screen shows 4 channels configured 1234 50 0234 20 0984 00 0323 30 PRINT 1 U6X Now get status of current read trigger block LINE INPUT 1 A Get the response PRINT AS Screen shows 000001 001233 0000075 12 34 54 200 0
140. alog Box vd or Tab to Spacebar Chart Min Scale Value Grid Limit Line Scroll Slower YA or Ctrl X 7 Bor Pointer over chart Divide 2 and right click Current group will be selected Display Configuration Thru Pull Down Menus only Status Message Box N A Time Division Chart Speed Ctrl Z Faster Channel Configuration Time Stamp hr min sec PostView post acq data viewer ME or Windows Pull down menu Arm Acquisition or Ctrl T Line the Horizontal increment per Ctrl X Slower Units Division 23 grid box Vertical increment per one grid box Di a or Ctrl Y Status LEDs Print Charts 8 or Ctrl P Chart Display N A For Windows3 1 see note on page 4 7 0 10 11 12 13 Chart Max Scale Value Grid Limit Line NetScan User s Manual From Chart Pull down menu or Chart Setup Dialog Box Double click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or zoom back out Right click to bring up Chart Setup Dialog Box with the current group and target chart selected ChartView Software Reference 4 5 Channel Information Region Channels can return values in units of C F K R mV V or user defined units if the mX b option is used With exception of mX b S user defined units units depend on the configuration and type of signal u EL cH conditioning card used Signal conditioning cards are detailed in the enp user s manual f
141. ameters and there are only two commands which take readings as parameters the Configure Channels C and the Set Trigger Level L commands These are the only command parameters over which the F command has control With both the C and L command the F command may determine the format of the hysteresis parameter The F command may also determine the high and low setpoint format in the C command The reading parameters for the C and L commands cannot be issued in binary format If binary format is specified by the F command these parameters will be interpreted as Engineering Units These parameters will always be interpreted as Engineering Units as currently defined by the Engineering Units argument of the F command except when the Counts format is specified When the Counts format is specified these parameters are interpreted as Counts For additional information on the different format types see the Data Format section in Appendix D If readings are interpreted as Counts or Binary format then the engineering unit parameter of the F command is ignored continued NetScan User s Manual A 23 API Command Reference Appendix A Data Output Formats Data Type Engineering Units Binary Counts High Byte Low Byte Low Byte High Byte i L Absolute MM DD YY MM DD YY DDDDDDDD DDDDDDDD Timebase hh mm ss t Interpreted as engineering units Interpreted as engineering units Legend x ASCII digit H high order byte x ASCII d
142. an s connector PH401 PH401 is located above the uppermost signal conditioning connector on the top edge of the analog back plane board See the following figure Connecting the Backplane Cards Expansion Backplane Card Partial Located In Expansion Chassis 2 20 EEEE O a O 1 39 PH501 2 40 O PPE of Jef Jol Jol ff Jl Jl eelere eee Connects to PH401 and PH501 4000000000000 3900000000000 C352 C353 o OO oe 36 o0 o0 ao foie oo Analog Backplane Card Partial Located In NetScan Main Chassis Connecting the Backplane Cards Note Ribbon cable CA 154 is keyed for proper installation 5 Using the same front back orientation position the expansion chassis on top of the NetScan unit then insert the remaining end of cable CA 154 into expansion chassis connector PH501 on rear of PC board 6 Secure the expansion chassis to the NetScan unit with two machine screws B for each of the four mounting blocks installed in step 3 7 Install the cover plate removed in step 2 onto the expansion chassis and secure with two screws 7 18 NetScan User s Manual Automatic Channel Assignment Unless the CSN Relay card is used Channels 1 through 64 are automatically assigned to NetScan while extended channels 65 through 128 are assigned to the expansion chassis Even if a card slot is left e
143. an NetScan User s Manual If you observe a configuration error perform an error status query see E in Appendix A If you observe any other type of error condition make note of the error and contact your service representative Error Condition Frorcondiion aa regen sc ERROR POWER General Hardware Failure on Mm ON Fem ON TROM invalid for U22 COMM2 ED a Flash ON ROM Checksum Error for ON Flash ON U21 Comm1 ROM Checksum Error for ON Flash ON U22 COMM2 Non Volatile RAM Error OoN Pash ON DynamicRAMError ON oN f Fase ON Configuration Error ONO If no problems are found NetScan will begin its power up initialization This self test is performed each time the unit is powered up regardless of whether power on was caused by the power switch or the Power On Reset R command During initialization NetScan self test performs the following steps e Checks for errors at power up e Checks the flag in the NV RAM to determine if it should power up with factory default settings or a user defined configuration Loads appropriate registers with corresponding values in NV RAM Checks a flag to see if alarms should be enabled at power up and if so enables them Loads channel configuration registers Loads program sequencer with appropriate channel configurations Resets computations processor to begin acquiring scans The self test takes approximately 5 seconds to complete after which NetScan is ready for no
144. and Starting NetScan 1 11 Notes 1 12 Configuring and Starting NetScan NetScan User s Manual ChartViewNET Quick Start and Tutorial 2 Overview 2 1 ChartViewNET Basic Concepts 2 1 Configuration Files 2 1 Understanding Groups Charts amp Channels 2 2 Three Ways of Using ChartViewNET 2 3 ChartViewNET Quick Start 2 3 ChartViewNET Tutorial 2 6 Overview This chapter provides the steps to connect power up and run NetScan using the TCP IP protocol Although there are many ways to configure NetScan this Startup is intended for a simple setup In addition to the following steps this chapter includes a section on basic concepts and a ChartViewNET tutorial These are provided to help you gain a better understanding of the ChartView program Note that Chapter 7 Hardware Setup contains detailed information pertaining to hardware issues and includes RS 232 and RS 422 information ChartViewNET Basic Concepts An understanding of several basic concepts will help you master ChartViewNET more quickly and should be understood before proceeding with the tutorial ChartViewNET refers to a ChartView program that has the network feature of the program activated much like ChartView Plus refers to a ChartView program that has the enhanced chart feature of the program activated The NET and Plus features are each activated by separate registration ID codes thus it is possible to have Ch
145. annel 3 PRINT 1 A26 32 32X Assign channels 26 32 alarms to digital output channel 32 A 16 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference A Alarm Stamping TYPE System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX A tstate Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable alarm stamping default and 1 Enable alarm stamping DESCRIPTION The Alarm Stamping A command when enabled will append the alarm state to the end of each scan as it occurs The alarm status consists of 32 bits A31 through AOO each with a 1 signifying alarm on or a 0 signifying alarm off In Binary Low High mode 4 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 1 A07 A00 Byte 2 A15 A08 Byte 3 A23 A16 Byte 4 A31 A24 In Binary High Low mode 4 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 1 A15 A08 Byte 2 A07 A00 Byte 3 A31 A34 Byte 4 A23 A16 In ASCII mode 12 bytes will be appended as follows DwwwDxxxDyyyDzzz where D User Terminator www Decimal equivalent of A07 A00 xxx Decimal equivalent of A15 A08 yyy Decimal equivalent of A23 A16 zzz Decimal equivalent of A31 A24 Note This feature is not available in NetScan s high speed single channel mode burst mode since alarms are not monitored Note If Digital Input Stamp I is also enabled it will be appended after the Alarm Stamp A EXAMPLE PRINT 1 A 1X Enable alarm stamping PRINT 1 A 0X
146. annel has been crossed either high level or low level as the user defined with the L command character Start and or Stop Event When is selected as the trigger source the command trigger generates a trigger when the Trigger Source is set for a command trigger T1 Alarm on or off Start and or Stop Event When alarm is selected as a trigger source the acquisition will start or stop when any channel goes into or out of an alarm condition Absolute time Start and or Stop Event When absolute time is specified data collection starts when the real time clock time of day equals the programmed time Count post trigger Start and or Stop Even When count is selected as the Stop Event scans are collected until the specified number of post trigger scans specified by the Y command have been collected at which time the post trigger Acquisition will stop and the post stop Acquisition will begin if configured NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Time Stamping T As mentioned in the previous sections the contents of each scan contains one reading for each defined channel Optionally time stamping of each scan can be enabled with the T command T1 enables absolute time stamping T2 enables relative time stamping while To disables time stamping Refer to the T command description for further details An example of the T command is as follows Without time stamping de
147. anual ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial 2 3 lel Es 2 Chart iew Simulated Instrument File Chart View Acquire Data Window Device Setup Fe pmo e mr Initializing Q Charting D Disk E Buffering in Instrument G Uploading ChartView Main Window ChartView Main Window Control Options Mouse Arrow Keypads B PageUp PageDown Keypads 1 Group Select Ctrl G or 2 or Channel Selection 4B or D 2 Start Charts amp Bor F5 15 Multiply x2 or Tab to and hit Indicators Spacebar Pause Charts YA or F7 16 Present Value of Selected Channel N A 4 Stop Charts or F6 7 Center Value at Chart Mid Line MB or I or type in Scroll Faster Bor Ctrl Z Units Division 8 or or type in Scroll Slower Me or Ctrl X Vertical increment per one grid box Chart Min Scale Value Grid Limit From Chart Pull down Line menu or Chart Setup Dialog Box Divide 2 or Tab to and hit Spacebar O and right click Current group will be selected Display Configuration Bor Pointer over chart Channel Configuration 1 Time Scroll hr min sec Thru Pull Down Menus only Status Message Box N A N N PostView post acq Bor Windows Pull data viewer down menu Time Division Chart Speed Ctrl Z Faster the Horizontal increment per grid Ctrl X Slower 10 Arm Acquisition or Ctrl T box Disarm o
148. ar indicating the unit is in calibration mode and no errors have occurred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follow Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 10 Repeat steps for each additional calibration channel using the H command channel number and X 11 When offset calibration is complete for all cards remove the shorting connectors 12 Reinstall original card connectors as applicable You are now ready to perform gain calibration for the signal conditioning cards as described in one or both of the following two gain calibration sections The first gain section is for low volts cards including the CSN14 TC P card while the second gain section applies to the high volts card CSN14 HV S Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card BNC Harness for CSN14 LV B cards see note Terminal Type Harness for CSN14 LV T cards see note Banana Plug Type Harness CSN14 LV S cards see note Type U Subminiature Plug Harness for CSN14 TC P cards see note Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter see required specifications on page 6 2 Note The four types of harnesses are illust
149. ar FAR data short FAR xlength unsigned short FAR status Parameters Long session The session handle of the NetScan Short port The port being read from Unsigned short flush Flag to indicate if the receive buffer should be cleared long timeout The time in milliseconds to wait for received data Short terminator The terminator to be used for serial input Short length The maximum number of characters to be Read into the data buffer Char FAR data A buffer where the received characters will be placed Short FAR xlength The number of characters that were read Parameter Values Port NetScan 1 Aux 0 Flush retain 0 Empty 1 Terminator none 1 CRLF 3 User defined 0 to 255 Returns 0 if successful error code or warning if command not completed Description This function s primary use is to read data from the NetScan s ethernet interface The secondary use is to flush all characters from the NetScan s ethernet interface transmit buffer Because this function may take some time to complete the return value must be tested to see if the command has completed The return value for command pending is 801 Example Do ErrVal nSERIALReceive session 1 0 1000 13 100 amp dataBuffer amp xlength while errVal 801 NetScan User s Manual 11 09 98 B 35 nSerialSend Function int nSERIALSend long session short port unsigned short flush long timeout short terminato
150. ar panel Remove the fuse 2 3 4 Ensure correct rating of replacement fuse 5 Install replacement fuse 6 If you changed the value of the fuse due to a new voltage selection replace the spare fuse with a fuse of the new value 7 Close the fuse drawer until it snaps into place Fuse Spare Power Receptacle Block with Opened Fuse Drawer Memory Configuration Memory configuration of NetScan consists of installing expanded memory boards optional and selecting write enable or write disable for calibration memory Expanded Memory Options NetScan can accommodate up to 8 MBytes of memory which is ideal for both high speed and long term data logging Measurements can be stored in memory and read out by a controlling computer as time permits 7 4 NetScan User s Manual NetScan provides three options for expanding the standard 256 KB of memory to 1 MB CSN MEM1 4 MB CSN MEM 4 or 8 MB CSN MEM8 To install a memory option into the unit it is necessary to perform the following steps WARNING Never disassemble NetScan s case while it is connected to the AC power line Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog terminals 3 disconnect AC power line then disconnect any other cables WARNING Never disconnect the AC power line from NetScan while analog connections to an externa
151. ard s used as well as the thermocouple type and the data acquisition instrument used TempScan MultiScan ChartScan or NetScan Double clicking the left mouse button in a meters scale area brings up a channel selection pop up menu not shown A single click with the right mouse button in this same area brings up a configuration pop up menu see Bar Graph Meters figure item H Both of these pop up menus are discussed in the section Meters Configuration Menu Note that each of the above channels shows a trend indicator on the left side of the meter The items in this window are as follows A Start C N A E Print G Number of Meters B Stop D Stay On Top F Rows x Columns H Configuration Pop Up Menu Toolbar items A through G are discussed in more detail in the following section Meter Toolbars Item H is discussed in the subsequent section Meters Configuration Menu Configuration Note For Digital Meters Configure the Digital Meters settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the digital meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection etc Refer to the section entitled Configure Meter Settings for more detail 4 30 ChartView Software Reference 0 NetScan User s Manual Meter Toolbars The toolbars for the three meter types are identical with exception that the Digital Meters toolbar does not have a Reset Pea
152. artViewNET Plus when both codes are used For ease of discussion this chapter s use of the term ChartView also refers to ChartViewNET and ChartView Plus refers to ChartViewNET Plus Configuration Files ChartView makes use of one or more user transparent configuration files Configuration files maintain information regarding various aspects of your setup serving as an initialization file for subsequent ChartView startups These files can be recognized by their cvw extensions Note When you run ChartView for the very first time there will be no configuration file however one will automatically generate and be saved after each use of the program NetScan User s Manual 11 16 98 2 1 ChartView uses Chartvw cvw as a default configuration file This file maintains a location for ChartView configuration information including e Device Interface Mode e Hardware Configuration e Channel Settings Alarm Settings Limits Hysteresis Setting e Acquisition Configuration e Data Storage Settings Channel Enable Disable On Off Type Label Units gt gt The configuration file ensures that when you restart ChartView it will be in the same state upon your last exit This means that the Chartvw cvw file will be an updated copy of the configuration file you are using at the time you exit ChartView It is not catastrophic if a configuration file is deleted since it is a simple task to start ChartView when no
153. ault Settings S1 command and then power cycling the unit or issuing the R command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors for the unit and its slaves however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 RX Restore power on settings to the unit SLEEP 4 Wait 4 seconds to restore communication WHILE S and 4 0 Keep checking the serial poll response of the unit until it is ready PRINT 1 U1X meaning that bit 4 is asserted INPUT 2 AS S VAL AS WEND S Power Up Settings TYPE System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Specify power up configuration mode Valid options for mode are 0 Power up under last known configuration default 1 Power up under factory default configuration DESCRIPTION With the Power Up Settings S command specifying the mode to be 0 will cause the unit to load its last known configuration when it is powered on or when the Power On Reset R command is issued The last known configuration will be exactly the same as the configuration it had when it was last powered down or a R command issued Specifying this mode will insure that the unit will always come up with the configuration which has most recently been defined Using this mode is convenient if it is undesirable to reconfigure the unit every time it is powered up or a R command is issued Specifying the mode to be 1 will cause the unit to load the factory default configuration
154. ay Configuration 2 Start Charts and Indicators 8 Channel Configuration 3 Pause Charts 9 PostView post acq data viewer 4 Stop Charts 10 Arm Acquisition 5 Scroll Faster 11 Disarm 6 Scroll Slower 12 Print Charts Group Select Start Pause and Stop Charts Scroll Faster amp Scroll Slower 4 8 This feature indicates the chart group being charted Clicking on the down arrow t reveals other chart groups configured by the user The standard ChartView program allows the use of only one chart group while ChartView Plus can be configured to display up to 64 groups one group at a time To select a different chart group simply pull down the group list and select the desired group The group list can be obtained by any of the control options provided in the table on page 4 5 These are a clicking the down arrow t b using Ctrl G on the keyboard c using the keyboard up or down arrow key d using the page up or page down key If using a control option other than a you may need to select the group select box by repeatable pressing the keyboard s Tab key until the group select box is selected The name of the currently selected group appears in white on a dark background As their names imply these three buttons are used to start pause or stop the charts Pressing pause suspends chart scrolling but does not stop the charting process While pause is pressed the channel region of the main window will
155. before the trigger is detected are not accounted for In other words these times may be offset as much as the hardware latency times in addition to the amount of time that the longest uninterrupted ISR takes to process TRIGGER SOURCE LATENCY OBSERVED avg VARIATION External Triggers TTL Rising TTL Falling 610 95 us Selected Temperature Range character Alarm Absolute Time 44 5 us Count post trigger 45 9 us 1 When using a channel level or alarm as the trigger source the trigger latency is dependent on the number of channels being scanned and the programmed timebase If the scan time is less than or equal to the programmed scan rate then the maximum trigger latency is equal to the programmed scan rate If the scan time is greater than the programmed scan rate the maximum trigger latency is equal to the scan time Trigger Overrun A trigger overrun condition exists if more than one trigger start event or more than one trigger stop event occurs during one trigger acquisition This is flagged and notification is given but no other action is taken The trigger overrun bit in the Error Source Register ESE is set The user may query with the E command the Error Source Register to determine if a trigger overrun has occurred Buffer Overrun The NetScan s internal buffer will wrap around if the controlling computer cannot read the data out of the buffer before it is completely full This situation is called buf
156. bration of Main Unit details how to use a calibration card and either of two shorting methods Step Instruction Tool Icon Pull down Menu 1 Verify the interface parameters Dip Switch File menu Icon 2 Click the inventory tool to perform a system inventory Inventory Instrument menu Icon 3 Select the desired devices from the inventory list Inventory Instrument menu Icon 4 Click the calibrate tool R Calibrate Calibrate menu Icon Note The following text discusses the use of the tool icons However if desired the pull down menus can be used instead Interface Parameters If your data acquisition device interface is set up for Network ethernet you should change the device interface to RS 232 serial communications prior to performing calibration Refer to your hardware setup chapter as needed la Select the DIP Switch toolbar icon to activate the Interface Parameters window This allows you to select and setup the communication interface used for your scanning system Once the icon is selected an Interface Parameters window appears The following example is from a ChartScan unit with RS 232 Serial Port interface Interface Parameters ES Serial Port R5 232 el Seral Port Parameters Seral Port 3 Handshaking Hone Parity None Baud Rate 9600 bd kd id Rear Panel Switch Settings Verily Cancel Example Screen Capture from a ChartScan System 1b Choose the desired interface by clickin
157. card 1 at 101 7 C Wait for command to complete Remove precision temperature PRINT 1 EX End calibration mode A 30 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference K Enter Calibration Mode TYPE Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Kkey Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword or password is correct where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters Query Kkey as defined above DESCRIPTION Note Calibration should only be performed by a qualified metrology lab If necessary contact the factory for assistance The Enter Calibration Mode K command places the unit into Calibration Mode While in Calibration Mode the unit may be calibrated using any of the defined calibration commands In addition all other commands are valid during Calibration Mode However if the unit is not in Calibration Mode none of the defined calibration commands are valid and an error condition will be generated if any of these commands are issued The K command requires a pre defined keyword as a parameter This keyword must match the existing keyword definition in order to enter Calibration Mode If the keyword is not correct Calibration Mode will not be entered and no calibration commands will be processed Note If the keyword becomes lost or forgotten a new keyword can be issued with the K command Note Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed calibrati
158. ccessed from the Chart Setup Wizard It cannot be accessed if PostView is using an existing display configuration file Unlike editing a display as just described this method involves creating a display from scratch If you plan to have a chart setup which is not weighted evenly 1 e different numbers of channels per chart and different numbers of charts per group you may want to manually create your chart display in this manner This method can only be arrived at from the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Manual Chart Creation Create Charts This bypasses the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual editing mode discussed Although this method is referred to as manual it still contains automatic elements such as Automatically Add Groups to the Setup Perform the following steps to manually create your chart display 1 From the Chart Setup Wizard window select Manual Chart Creation Create Charts This bypasses the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual editing mode k Chart Display Configuration Setup ERpisplay Automatically Add Groups to the Setup Add i Groups to the Setup and create 3 Charts in each Group Create Groups Manually Add 4 Group to the Setup Group Name Group 1 Add Display Group Display Configuration Setup Initial Screen During Manual Creation 2 Perform 2a or 2b as appropriate to your application 2a Automatically add groups to the setup Enter the number of groups and charts
159. cesses the PostView program This independent program allows you to view waveforms recorded by data acquisition programs such as ChartView ChartView Plus and TempView PostView is detailed in Chapter 5 of this manual NetScan User s Manual Device Interface gt Setup IEEE 488 Setup AS 232 Setup Network w Simulated Instrument Setup IEEE 488 The IEEE 488 Setup dialog box appears Valid addresses are 0 to 30 DIP switch settings must agree with this setup For ChartScan an IEEE 488 interface card is required for use of IEEE 488 interface NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface ree When using ChartView with IEEE 488 applications you must make use of an lOtech Driver 488 W31 W95 EE or WNT when made available In addition the device must be configured in the Driver 488 and be named WAVE NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 interface IEEE 485 Setup IEEE Address jo Setup The RS 232 422 Setup dialog box appears If Yes is chosen for modem the RS 232 422 Setup window RS 232 422 changes allowing you to cancel your call waiting service by entering your cancellation code and your modem phone number The Cancel Code pull down list provides three common code options Instead of using a code from the list you can type in the desired code Note that the device DIP switch settings must match those entered in the text boxes RS232 Setup R5232 Setup
160. change to apply to all channels displayed for the chart not just the currently selected channel display This feature applies to the spinners and keyboard up and down arrow keys but not to the text input Value at Marker 13 is the charted channel value at the marker position Item 22 indicates the time this value was read Center Control 14 changes the value of the selected channel s chart centerline Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of the chart s high and low end values items 10 and 16 and possibly an automatic change of the units div item 15 Aside from using the center spinner controls to change center you can change the center value by placing the mouse cursor in or tabbing over to the field and then either typing in the desired value or using the PC keyboard up and down arrow control keys Units div 15 The units in units div 15 can be C F K R mV or V The division referenced is one vertical grid In the example above for Channel 1 each vertical grid increment represents 0 1231 C per division Changing the units division spinner controls o t will result in an automatic adjustment of the max scale and min scale values items 10 and 16 Aside from using the units div triangular controls to change the value you can change units div from the Display Configuration Setup dialog box as described on page 5 14 Time at Marker 22 is the time at the marker position It is also t
161. channel SESE j assigned per chart Start with PE1_A01 Channels The number of Instrument Data Channels available ts 1 Manual Chart Creation Create Charts Manually The above setup will assign 1 channels starting from channel PDO1_ A Chart Setup Wizard Simple Mode Chart Setup Wizard Automatic Setup Options for PostView Setup Type Group Setup Chart Setup Channel Setup for Chart Groups Simple 1 group only Up to 16 charts 1 channel per chart Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels perchart_ 1 group only Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Up to 64 groups Up to 16 charts per Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart group Note The Manual Charts Creation Create Charts button above figure allows you to exit the Chart Setup Wizard and enter the manual Display Configuration mode Automatic Display Creation The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation The following figures show the Moderate and Advanced mode dialog boxes Automatic Chart Creation Create Charts Simple Moderate Advanced Create 16 Charts mE q overlapping channels With per chart CH g Starting with channel The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 The above setup will assign 64 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CHE4 Automatic Chart Creation Create Charts Simple Mod
162. channel for specific thermocouple type or voltage Input Types J K T E R S B N and 10V 5V 1V 100mV Input Connector Subminiature plug Temperature Range Accuracy and Resolution e Typed 100 to 760 C 0 5 C 0 10 C 200 to 100 C 0 8 0 20 e TypeK 100 to 1372 C 0 6 C 0 10 C 200 C to 100 C 08C 0 20C e TypeT 100 to 400 C 0 5 C 0 15 C 200 to 100 C 0 8 0 25 e TypeE 100 to 1000 C 0 7 C 0 10 C 200 C to 100 C 0 9 C 0 20 e TypeR 0 0 to 1780 C 2 0 C 0 40 C e TypeS 0 0 to 1780 C 2 0 C 0 40 C e TypeB 350 to 1820 C 20 C 0 50 C e TypeN 100 to 1300 C 0 6 C 0 15 C 200 to 100 C 0 97 0 20 Temperature Units C F K R mV and volts Fault Detection Open T C may be detected by a software query Cold Junction Sensors One for every 4 input channels Input Impedance and Input Bias Current 1M Ohm typical and 20 nA maximum Maximum Common Mode Voltage 200 VAC or 200 VDC peak Maximum Normal Mode Voltage 10 VDC or 10VAC peak Common Mode Rejection 100 dB typical Maximum Allowable Input 25V rms Channel to Power Ground Isolation 200V peak Channel to Channel Isolation 200V peak Temperature Coefficient lt 0 1 x rated accuracy C NetScan User s Manual Hardware Digital Filtering Averages 32 samples at 50 60 Hz for line cycle noise rejection VDC measurements Voltage Range Accu
163. channel scan do not have to be configured In addition to channel type each channel in the scan can optionally have a high and low alarm level and hysteresis associated with it NetScan s alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of desired limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on the NetScan back panel More information on using alarms appears later in this appendix in the section Configuring Alarms The CSN14 HV S supports both DC and AC voltages Simply select the desired channel type during configuration Volts DC Volts AC Note Above mentioned ranges are maximum peak to peak signals for AC volts Vrms values are accurate to 70 7 of peak value The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a high volts channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place Note Additional information can be found under the command reference for C in Appendix A Scan Configuration Configuring a Scan Although 128 channels are available for scanning when an expansion chassis is added to the NetScan unit only those channels configured in the channel scan are collected and available to the controlling computer Channels are always scanned in ascending order regardless of the sequence you input The same configuration is used in reading channel data through the H
164. cking on the Acquisition Setup tab from the Channels or Data Destination dialog boxes c using the Setup pull down menu and selecting Acquisition ChartScan NetScan and MultiScan have two modes of data acquisition these are e Normal mode e High speed single channel mode burst mode 4 36 ChartView Software Reference ssi Ne Scan User s Manual The mode is selected from the lower left hand portion of the dialog box The following figure represents a screen capture with normal mode selected Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup Data Destination Event Configuration Trigger Channel Value Stop Count from trigger z Count 100 Acquisition Parameters Scan Counts 1 Pretrigger Scan Intervals Hrs Min Sec 0 Post Stop Pre trigger o o T l o amp post stop Average weight E Past T rigger jo a oo jo Mode Normal X Use One Interval High speed single channel Acquisition Setup Dialog Box Normal Mode The following figure depicts components of an acquisition The Trigger and Stop Points represent the entries described under the Event Configuration selection in the table on the following page Trigger Scan Pre Trigger Scans Post Trigger Scans Post Stop Scans A A F D C 3 ae Time Scan Interval A Scan Interval B Scan Interval A Stop Event Acquisition Example In the
165. configuration file exists This is described in the tutorial Understanding Groups Charts amp Channels 2 2 When starting the program with no configuration file present a feature called Chart Setup Wizard is automatically activated to assist you with your setup To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you need to understand the relationship of Groups Charts and Channels Note ChartView and Chart Setup Wizard are detailed in Chapter 4 of this manual Group Group refers to a group of charts ChartView makes use of one chart group ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups depending on the capabilities of your PC but only displays data from one chart group at a time Chart Chart refers to display area which reflects real time channel data values and can be scrolled at various rates One chart can display data from up to four channels In addition each chart will display real time information for a selected channel You can assign up to 16 charts per group Channel Channel refers to a signal channel You can have up to 4 channels assigned to one chart Channels will be displayed in units of C F K R mV V or in user defined units depending on the configuration and type of signal conditioning card used NetScan s signal conditioning card options are detailed in Chapter 7 cee Display ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual Three Ways of Using ChartViewNet You can use Chart
166. continue to display real time values Pressing pause a second time restarts the scrolling action Pressing stop causes the charting process to stop and instantly freezes the channel region at its present values This does not affect the acquisition These buttons provide a means of speeding up and slowing the chart s scrolling rate also referred to as chart speed These two buttons do not affect the scan rates of the acquisition device The chart speed item 23 is indicated in the lower right hand corner of the main window as time div There are 14 possible chart speeds as follows 0 1 sec div 1 sec div 10 sec div 2 min div 30 min div 0 2 sec div 2 sec div 30 sec div 5 min div 1 hr div 0 5 sec div 5 sec div 1 min div 10 min div ChartView Software Reference NetScan User s Manual Display Configuration The Display Configuration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box This box will also be displayed if a Create Charts Manually is selected during use of the Wizard Chart Setup program b you select Setup from the Chart pull down menu c you right click on the chart region in ChartView s Main Window Note If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration the current group will be selected in the display configuration tree When you first click on the Display Configuration button a Display Configuration Setup box appears A display region shows the configured structure of
167. cted in the above figure you can alter Y Max and Y Min These are the upper and lower limits of the Channel as they will appear on the chart when the channel is selected When you change either parameter Y Center and Units Division are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units Division while Units Full Scale is selected You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its full scale setting across the chart Units Div When Units Div is selected you can alter Y Center and Units Div Y Center is the centerline value of the chart when the channel is selected Units Div is the vertical value of on chart grid increment When you change Y Center or Units Div Y Max and Y Min are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while Units Div Is selected You can change Y Center and Units Div by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Div Mode will maintain its units per division scale setting across the chart Manually Creating a Display 5 12 PostView Note This method of creating a display can only be a
168. cts or the plug in terminal blocks otherwise the circuit board may be damaged Note that ratings of relay contacts exceed the current carrying capacity of the printed circuit board When the Alarm Relay Card option is used it is not possible to install more than 7 signal conditioning cards 3 in the main unit since the relay card occupies one card slot This means you can have no more than 112 channels instead of 128 when using this option Note The relay output card option if used must be inserted into slot 1 the bottom slot of the main NetScan unit The channel assignments are then automatically bumped as shown in the following table Device Channel Assignments when relay option is used 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 NetScan sd 1 32 33 48 Expansion etca a 64 aE 80 96 97 112 option CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a NetScan system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of NetScan s main unit could possibly cause equipment damage NetScan User s Manual CSN Relay Card Specifications Number of Channels e 16 2 groups of 8 channels Relay Contacts Manufacturer s Ratings e 8 Amps 125 250 VAC Resistive e 5 Amps 30 VDC Resistive Card Contact Ratings e 8 Amps maximum on group commons Contact to System Isolation e 500 Volts AC or DC Manufacturer s ratings for the relays used on the CSN Relay Card Expansion Chassis CSN Exp Option You can
169. d Device Dependent Error are also cleared with an Error Query E command NetScan User s Manual D 15 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Bit Description Location DIO1 Alarm DI02 Trigger Detected DI03 Ready DI04 Scan Available DI05 Message Available MAV DI06 Event Status Register Bit ESB DIO8 Buffer Overrun Set Clear and Descriptive Information Set when the scanning device has sensed a valid alarm condition The alarm is cleared when the alarm condition no longer exists Set when the NetScan has detected the trigger condition and will be cleared when the acquisition is complete or the trigger has been reconfigured Set when the NetScan is ready to process another command It is cleared when the NetScan is processing a command line This bit should be examined with a serial poll prior to issuing a new command line This allows any detected errors to be traced to the specific command line containing the error If all the setup information for a specific NetScan operation is included in one line this bit also indicates when all processing is done and the X command is completed This ensures that the NetScan is done processing all state changes before initiating any further activity Set when at least 1 acquisition scan is available in the acquisition buffer to be read Cleared when there are no scans available in the buffer to be read Set when the output queue is not empty It is cleared when the output
170. d Sensing Connectors Connections for Main Unit Gain Calibration 6 8 Calibration NetScan User s Manual 1 Connect HI LO S and S lines from the precision calibrator to the binding posts of the calibration card as indicated in the figure above 2 Apply 4 4 VDC minus 4 4 VDC from the calibrator to the calibration card Use a precision digital multimeter to verify voltage accuracy Note You can view the main unit calibration constants by typing C OX QC selects the main unit chassis To monitor the chassis calibration voltage type B to clear the buffer C3 90X__ to address the backplane T1 1 0 0X xX to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes x starts acquisition U13xX__ very entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Voltage will appear in counts For 4 4 volts the reading should be 32038 844 counts Note that x can be used to start or stop the acquisition 3 Type Go 91x The Trigger LED will flash indicating that gain calibration is in progress When flashing stops the chassis gain calibration is complete 4 Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occurred 5 Apply 4 4 VDC positive 4 4 VDC from the calibrator to the calibration card Use a precision digital multimeter to verify voltage accuracy 6 Type Go 91x The Trigger LED will flash indicating that gain calibration is in progress When flashing stops th
171. d or stop an acquisition on certain times and or dates The values of the start and stop times are only used when the start and or stop events have been configured for Absolute Time If only the start time is needed the stop argument should be setto 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 Likewise if only the stop time is needed the start argument should be setto 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 In addition to the ability to start stop on a particular time date the unit has the ability to start stop at a particular time independent of the date If the date for the start stop time is of no concern then the date portion of the time date field should be set to 00 00 00 In this way the unit can start or stop an acquisition at a particular time regardless of the date This feature is particularly useful when using the auto rearm feature of the unit since it will allow the collection of data at a particular time each day without user intervention EXAMPLE PRINT 1 S12 54 00 0 01 01 93X Set the internal clock of the unit PRINT 1 P01 00 00 0 01 01 93 Set start 1 00 am and stop 2 00 am acquisition 02 00 00 0 01 01 93xX times PRINT 1 T11 11 0 0X Configure for start stop on Absolute Time A 36 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Query TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX Query the present configuration or mode of the command preceding the DESCRIPTION Most commands have a corresponding Query command formed by appe
172. d the hysteresis parameters for the Channel Configuration C command and the Set Trigger Level L command These are the only command parameters over which the Data Format F command has control These command parameters cannot be issued in binary format If binary format is specified by the F command these parameters will be interpreted as Engineering Units These parameters will always be interpreted as Engineering Units as currently defined by the Engineering Units argument of the F command except when the Counts format is specified When the Counts format is specified these parameters are interpreted as Counts For additional information see the command reference section Note If Counts or Binary format is specified as the format the Engineering Units parameter of the F command is ignored Examples PRINT 1 F0O 0xX Interpret C and L command parameters as Engineering Units Degrees C PRINT 1 F1 1X Interpret C and L command parameters as Engineering Units Even though binary is specified Degrees F PRINTH1 F3 3X Interpret C and L command parameters as Counts Counts format is specified Note that Engr Units parameter is ignored NetScan User s Manual D 5 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Data Output Formats Data Output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may be used for Channel Data Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format
173. d the memory size but the post trigger count can If the post trigger count exceeds the memory size it is the responsibility of the controller to deplete the FIFO buffer as the data is being collected or a buffer overrun error will occur A Post Stop Event Count can also be associated with an acquisition to collect a counted amount of samples after the Stop Event occurs If a trigger is encountered before the pre trigger count is satisfied the unit will trigger but have fewer than the specified pre trigger count in its buffer The Buffer Status String U6 command can be used to query the box for the size of the pre trigger Although normal pre trigger scans are acquired as soon as the acquisition is armed they are not available or valid until the start trigger event occurs Note The unit can be configured to have different timebases for its pre and post trigger states When the user specified trigger condition is satisfied the unit goes from the pre trigger to the post trigger state changing its timebase if configured to do so Refer to the Continuous Gap Free Acquisition with Two Timebases in Appendix C for more information High Speed Single Channel Mode When in High speed single channel mode burst mode count see syntax is used to select the number of 256 sample blocks to collect Valid values for count are as follows In each case the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2 EXAMPLE for Normal Mode PRINT 1 Q
174. d to calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation of the thermocouple signals Each thermocouple input channel has associated with it one of these temperature sensors Although calibrated at the factory these temperature sensors are subject to component aging which may affect their accuracy over time The function of the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset J command is to allow the adjusting of the internal firmware to compensate for the affects of component aging Since there are 4 cold junction temperature sensors associated with 32 temperature input channels it is necessary to select 4 channels Each channel is associated with one of the 4 cold junction temperature sensors in order to calibrate all cold junction temperature sensors on a given card Note Four separate channels on each card must be supplied with an accurate thermocouple signal of known warm junction temperature The parameter type is the same channel type that is used with the Configure Channels C command After the command has been issued the applied thermocouple signal must remain at its value until the trigger LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results For further details on channel calibration see Chapter 6 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345xX Enter Calibration Mode Apply precision temperature PRINT 1 J1 2 101 7X Compute cold junction offset for the temperature sensor associated with the type K thermocouple on channel 1 of
175. dies of purchaser set forth herein are exclusive and the total liability of OMEGA with respect to this order whether based on contract warranty negligence indemnification strict liability or otherwise shall not exceed the purchase price of the component upon which liability is based In no event shall OMEGA be liable for consequential incidental or special damages CONDITIONS Equipment sold by OMEGA is not intended to be used nor shall it be used 1 as a Basic Component under 10 CFR 21 NRC used in or with any nuclear installation or activity or 2 in medical applications or used on humans Should any Product s be used in or with any nuclear installation or activity medical application used on humans or misused in any way OMEGA assumes no responsibility as set forth in our basic WARRANTY DISCLAIMER language and additionally purchaser will indemnify OMEGA and hold OMEGA harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of the use of the Product s in such a manner RETURN REQUESTS INQUIRIES Direct all warranty and repair requests inquiries to the OMEGA Customer Service Department BEFORE RETURNING ANY PRODUCT S TO OMEGA PURCHASER MUST OBTAIN AN AUTHORIZED RETURN AR NUMBER FROM OMEGA S CUSTOMER SERVICE DEPARTMENT IN ORDER TO AVOID PROCESSING DELAYS The assigned AR number should then be marked on the outside of the return package and on any correspondence The purchaser is responsible for shipping charges freight
176. discussed in the following text is typically not used for temperature readings since temperature data will be linear However you can use the equation in temperature applications for example setting b to 32 in order to watch deviations from freezing point when temperature is in F In addition with ChartView Plus you can subtract a reference channel from the mX b equation to obtain a temperature differential as indicated in the following example Example A heated room has 2 thermocouples T1 for CH1 and T2 for CH2 with T1 being in the center of the room and T2 positioned at an outer wall If the outer wall is monitored to ensure a temperature within 2 F of the temperature indicated by thermocouple T1 then CH1 can be used as a reference channel such that its value will be subtracted from the actual value for channel 2 Assume the central thermocouple is reading 90 5 F and the outer thermocouple for CH2 is reading 89 0 F In this case we can use the equation so channel 2 s charted reading will not be of the actual temperature but will be the differential between CH1 and CH2 e g y mX b ref chan where y Channel 2 s charted value a temperature n at NPU IOTC Nanine HANO TEIETENGE differential Input for Channel 2 m 90 5 F b 0 X CH2 y mX b ref chan ref Chan CH1 Thermocouple 2 Channel 2 s charted value 1 x CH2 0 CH1 Channel 2 s charted value 1 x 89 0 F 0 90 5
177. e Ff Stop Bits hooo H Cancel Simulated The program will generate data from a simulated instrument with no actual hardware concerns Instrument Device Status gt Interface Status Instrument Inventory Alarms Status Instrument Error Statue Log configuration bog Ernane etn ee Instrument Realtime clack Instrument Accesses the System Inventory dialog box Inventory Alarms Brings up selection list for Status Log configuration and Log Enable Status Brings up the Alarm Status box The Alarm Status box shows the current state of each alarm The alarm state appears as either a 1 or 0 the 1 being digital High and the 0 being digital Low 0 A one for one correlation between the alarm number and channel can only occur if each channel of a 32 channel or less system is assigned to a dedicated alarm number Log configuration Alarm logging is a feature of ChartView Plus only Alarm Logging allows you to monitor the Alarm states of the instrument and save selected information to a file whenever any of the states change Alarm logging is implemented by periodically polling the instrument the time interval between polls is about one second With this in mind be aware any event that could trigger an alarm asting one second or less could be missed and not logged 4 24 ChartView Software Reference 0 NetScan User s Manual Alarm Log Configuration E A
178. e Command Characters Data Destination and Timeout These are discussed on the following page 4 20 ChartView Software Reference 00 NetScan User s Manual 83 DDE Configuration for Excel x Command Characters Command character for row setting R Command character for column setting Ic US Example row R column C Data Destination Row fi Specity the upper left hand comer cell for the Column fi data On Arn Acquisition place next On Arm Acquisition place next Row 1 Column 1 Row 1 Columna 7 M Increment the row on each new scan Row after last scan Timestamp format Prompt each time HH MM SS xm MMDD AY AMS See MEDO A r HH MMS See MM DO CT HH MMS See DO Mbi T HH MM SS eee eM MDD MMDD A HH Mh See DID hl AHH MESS et MMOD HH MMS 5a Command This area contains two fields for entering command characters one for row setting and one for column Characters setting Enter the characters Excel parameters to match the applicable version of Excel for example France Row L Column C Germany Row Z Column S United States Row R Column C Data Destination Assign the Data Destination This area allows you to assign the data destination on the Excel spreadsheet Specify the data starting point by entering a number for row and another for column The two numbers designate the upper left hand corner cell of the Excel data entry Positioning Data in Excel The data destinatio
179. e NetScan main unit constants are stored in NV RAM Signal Conditioning Card constants stored in each card s EEPROM Note Industry standard calibration period is once every year NetScan User s Manual General Information and Specifications 3 7 Notes 3 8 General Information and Specifications NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 ChartView ChartView Plus ChartViewNET and ChartViewNET Plus Overview 4 1 Groups Charts amp Channels 4 2 Three Ways of Using ChartView 4 2 What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide hohe 4 3 Main Window 4 4 Channel Information Region 4 6 Status Indicator Region 4 7 Main Window Toolbar 4 8 Group Select 4 8 Start Pause and Stop Charts 4 8 Scroll Faster amp Scroll Slower 4 8 Display Configuration 4 9 Channel Configuration 4 15 PostView post acq data viewer 4 15 Arm Acquisition 4 15 Disarm 4 15 Print Charts 4 16 Main Window Pull Down Menus 4 16 Bar Graph Analog and Digital Meters 4 27 Overview 4 27 Bar Graph Meters 4 28 Analog Meters 4 29 Digital Meters 4 30 Meter Toolbars 4 31 Meter Pull Down Menus 4 31 Meters Configuration Menu 4 32 Setup Window 4 33 Channel amp Alarm Setup Dialog Box 4 33 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box 4 36 Channel Configuration Columns
180. e ae ee ee ee ee ee ee ee E Low Volts Scanning Card with Removable Screw Terminals i OLOO S Low or High Volts Scanning Card O O O OO DOO OO OOOOO with Safety Jacks ie al FE A A HE EE HE EE kE EE Mi HE EE EE EE NetScan Front Panel One of Many Possible Set ups NetScan Users Manual 11 17 98 7 1 Rear Panel NetScan s rear panel contains several items including a set of LEDs for status indication The LED indicators are described in the following table Other rear panel items are listed in a separate table following the illustration LED Indicators Chassis ALARM TRIGGER SCAN SEND RECEIVE ERROR POWER ON when an alarm has occurred The indicator remains ON until the alarm condition clears OFF when no alarm condition exists Flashes when ARMed waiting for a trigger is ON continuous when triggered is OFF when data collection is finished Trigger is also turned OFF by IEEE DCL or SDC ON when NetScan is storing a channel scan in its internal buffer ON when transmitting data to the serial interface for RS 232 operation only ON when receiving data from the controlling computer for RS 232 operation only ON when an error has occurred OFF when no error condition exists See the Error Query E command for more information ON when power is applied to NetScan and the power switch on t
181. e while simultaneously acquiring data to disk you need to configure a display and or meter as well as configure the acquisition Note that the channels from the display setup are automatically enabled You can enable additional channels from the channel configuration dialog box for the data acquisition to acquire more data however these additional channels will not change your display setup or the channels being monitored In other words you can acquire data from channels which you do not monitor ChartViewNET Quick Start Starting ChartView Configuring the System and Collecting Data Note The configuration file discussed in this section will not be present during your first start of the program Use the ChartView icon in Windows to start the ChartView program ChartView will run using the latest configuration file This is a file which is automatically saved upon exiting the program The configuration file contains all setup information including that pertaining to channels alarms and acquisition configuration When ChartView opens using a configuration file the program s main window appears on the screen as indicated in the following figure Note In the following figure item 24 Status LEDs and labels does not appear when using Windows 3 1 However when using Windows 3 1 text will appear in region 24 to inform you of the status This is in addition to the text in the Status Message Box Item 22 NetScan User s M
182. e V indicates the status bar will not be visible on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select this option NetScan User s Manual Options Option Settings a Option Settings includes three separate dialog boxes accessible by tabs as indicated in the following screen captures Charts Site I Restrict scroll speed to actual scan rate Restricts Scroll Speed to Eliminate Aliasing It is possible for chart displays to exhibit aliasing when using ChartScan NetScan or MultiScan devices The aliasing effect can be eliminated from the display by enabling the Restrict scroll soeed to actual scan rate feature This reduces the scroll speed to a range that results in non aliased displays System Communications Timeout 2 setting in seconds Determines Communication Timeout in Seconds The system communications timeout determines how long the software will wait before declaring a detected communications error If linked to Excel the system timeout value indicated in the above figure will be overridden by the timeout value in the DDE Configuration for Excel dialog box accessed from the Data pull down menu Acquisition a q Charts System Acquisition W Enable Postview Comment Postiew 3 3 or later only PostView Comment and Auto Re arm Trigger Options PostView Comment Enabling this option allows the user to enter a comment in a text box located in the Setup Data Destination dialog box The following screen capture
183. e a of Buffer Status String response The following table describes the fields for the U6 response when the acquisition buffer is empty For ease of reference the previous figure has been repeated 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 r V Ta a gt D 0000000 0000000 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 00 00 000 00 00 00 0999999 00 Time Date Time Date Acquisition Buffer Interrogation Example of Buffer String when the Acquisition Buffer is Empty Field Response Implication 1 0000000 No trigger blocks available 2 0000000 No scans are available 3 0999999 The current read pointer is undefined 4 00 00 00 000 The trigger time stamp is undefined 00 00 00 5 0999999 The stop event pointer is undefined 6 00 00 00 000 The stop event time is undefined 00 00 00 7 0999999 The end scan pointer is undefined 8 00 The current trigger block is not complete NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers The following figures and table illustrate a case in which an acquisition has been triggered the stop event and end scan have occurred and the buffer contains several trigger blocks 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 g A D Cc Bi 2 A 0000007 0020567 00000100 12 01 43 100 03 01 97 00000100 12 25 01 300 03 01 97 00000250 01 Read Pointer Scan 100 As each scan is read the pointer F can E Trigger Scan Scan 000 Scan 047 Scan 048 Scan 100 Scan 101 ee eee Scan 1
184. e arm for ChartView Plus Only Folder The drive and directory where data will be written Filename Name of data file Format File saved as an Excel TXT or Binary IOT format Scan Format Data marked with Time Date Stamp and or Alarm Stamp Note These parameters cannot be altered while the acquisition is in progress Auto Re arm for ChartView Plus only Auto Re arm is a feature available with ChartView Plus As seen in the previous figure Auto Re arm is accessed from the Data Destination box The Auto Re arm feature allows for a large number of acquisitions to take place automatically with each acquisition using the same configuration settings With Auto Re arm the system immediately re arms itself waiting for the trigger to be satisfied as soon as the previous trigger block is terminated NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 39 4 40 Auto Re arm allows you to choose one of the following three options e capture one trigger block default Auto Re arm disabled e capture multiple trigger blocks in one file e capture multiple trigger blocks in indexed files To one file To one file Z E Ka To separate p files K One trigger block Trigger blocks Trigger blocks Capture one trigger block Capture multiple trigger blocks Capture multiple trigger blocks Default in one file in separate indexed files Auto Re arm Options Why use Auto Re arm You can use Auto Re arm as a conv
185. e chassis gain calibration 1s complete 7 Type U2xX U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occurred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 8 Type EX The calibration mode is disabled 9 Position the Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton in the non indent disable position Note to ChartScan users Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel as indicated in the NetScan figure page 6 2 10 Remove power from the main unit and all connected devices 11 Remove the calibration card from the chassis You are now ready to calibrate the signal conditioning cards as described in the following sections of this chapter NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 9 Calibration of Signal Conditioning Cards Offset Calibration of Cards Required Equipment BNC Short for CSN14 LV B cards see note Terminal Type Short for CSN14 L
186. e cleared after the status string is read by the controller Calibration errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated Status strings are returned when the unit is next addressed to Talk The terminators used and the use of the End Or Identify EOI line can be changed with the Set Query Terminator Q and Set User Terminator V commands If the unit is configured to trigger on Talk requesting a status report will not cause the unit to trigger The following paragraphs provide more detailed information about the U responses U0 Reads and clears the Event Status Register ESR Refer to the Status and Event Reporting sections of Appendix D for details on status reporting UO responds with 001 Acquisition Complete 016 Execution Error 002 Stop Event 032 Command Error 004 Query Error 064 Buffer 75 Full 008 Device Dependent Error 128 Power On U1 Read the Status Byte register STB The Status Byte register is a read only register It responds with 001 Alarm 016 Message Available 002 Triggered 032 Event Detected 004 Ready 128 Buffer Overrun 008 Scan Available U2 Read and clear the Calibration Status Register CSR The response to this request is the current contents of the Calibration Status Register This register contains information regarding the calibration of the unit and any errors encountered while attempting to calibrate the unit Refer to the following figure for details about the Calibration Status R
187. e engineering units that you prefer to work with Valid options are 0 degrees Celsius default 1 degrees Fahrenheit 2 degrees Rankine 3 degrees Kelvin and 4 Volts format places the readings in a format that you prefer to work with Valid options are 0 Engineering Units default 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 2 Binary High Byte Low Byte and 3 Counts ASCII Query the data format By Set Bust Mote a Select burst mode sampling frequency where freq is a real Frequenc number and where 38 5 lt freq lt 20000 0 Hertz default Calibrate Channel Gain Calibrate the correction gain constants for given option card where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 type is the channel type Calibrate Channel Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card Offset where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 Set Scan Interval Inorm acq Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where norm and acq are the normal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form hh mm ss t where hh is hours mm is minutes ss is seconds and t is tenths of a second Query scan interval selection Digital Input Stamping I state Specify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled state may have either of the following values The default of 0 wh
188. e following query terminators resp This argument specifies the response terminator for general purpose queries issued by the controller These queries are queries that do not request High Low Last or Acquisition Buffer data This terminator is used in all query responses unless the query refers to data in the High Low Last registers or the Acquisition Buffer In these cases these types of queries have separate terminators as described below hil This argument specifies the channel terminator to be used for queries which request data residing in the High Low Last registers When this terminator is specified the terminator will be inserted between each channel response when a High Low Last register query request is made The queries that request High Low Last register data are U4 U5 U13 and R Remember the Read Last Readings R command is an HLL register query scan This argument specifies the terminator which will follow each scan that is output when a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data this terminator will be used to terminate each scan as it is output to the interface This will be true except for the last scan in the block In this case the trigger block terminator will be used to terminate the scan and the block The only query command which requests Acquisition Buffer data is the Read Buffered Data R command block This argument specifies the terminator which w
189. e last calibration time date stamp The response is the number sign to distinguish it from other time date stamps appended with the time date of the last calibration For example 12 31 01 20 04 24 93 U13 Queries the last scan read U14 Queries the card type Returns card ID for each card slot Valid card IDs for use with NetScan are 1 Card not installed 16 TC Volts card 17 High volts card Note This command can only be issued when all channels are in an unconfigured state If any channel is configured the system will issue a command conflict error in response to the U14 command Also see QC And C commands U15 Queries the product information The response to this command is the current product information including revision levels U16 This command queries the measuring mode parameters defined by the Set Measuring Mode M Set Burst Mode Frequency F and Set Averaging Weight W commands The response has the following form M modeF freqw wt NetScan User s Manual A 47 API Command Reference Appendix A A 48 U17 This command computes and returns the root mean square RMS value of the last completed burst mode acquisition U18 Queries the acquisition states and various system flags The response nnn has the following integer form 000 lt nnn lt 255 The bit mapping of the response is as follows e eles e to Acquisition State 00 Idle no acquisition armed or acquired 01 Armed acquisit
190. e raw Both temperature and volts readings will be represented by a bipolar 16 bit value of the form xxxxx Time Date stamp format is hmstMDY which is the same as that specified for the binary data format The Counts format is both a valid input C and L command format and a valid output format R R U4 U5 U8 U13 C and L command queries D 8 NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Configuring Power Up State The NetScan has an internally stored factory default configuration which can be recalled at any time You can program the NetScan to power up in a user defined state or if desired can configure the unit to power up with the default configuration During normal operations the factory defaults may be recalled by issuing the Restore Factory Defaults F command When this command is processed the NetScan will load the factory default configuration and will operate accordingly This command however may not be issued while an acquisition is currently configured Usually the NetScan is configured to power up with the last known configuration at the time that it was powered down or at the time that a R is issued However you can configure the unit to always power up with the factory default configuration by issuing the Power up Settings S1 command Issuing an SO power up under last known configuration command causes the unit to power up under the last known configuration Note
191. easurements NetScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle In order to compute an accurate RMS value you must program a frequency which will yield a sufficient whole even number of samples per line cycle Note In High speed single channel mode upon completion of the acquisition AC voltage RMS values can be retrieved with the U17 query command To use the High speed single channel mode use the following commands or use ChartView see Chapter 4 Note that these commands or ChartView equivalent are all that is needed to initiate the High speed single channel mode data acquisition M 1 Select high speed single channel mode Cchan type Select channel number and voltage range F freq Select sampling frequency where 38 5 lt freq lt 2000 0 YO count 0 Select count where count is the number of 256 sampling blocks to be acquired T1 8 0 0 Arm the system to start on stop on count Start the acquisition NetScan User s Manual C 5 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C The remainder of this appendix and the next pertaining to acquisition setup refer to normal mode acquisitions only Configuration Requirements C 6 NetScan does not scan channels on its initial power up Even though most user set configuration states have associated defaults you must configure a few items before scanning begins For NetScan to
192. ected directly to a PC using a crossover cable Since there is no actual network the only requirements are 1 The first three numbers of NetScan s IP address must match the first three numbers of the computer s IP address 2 The sub net mask should be set to 255 255 255 0 3 The gateway address can be omitted Example TPC IP address set to 192 88 247 1 Sub net mask set to 255 255 255 0 2 Private Local Area Network LAN Setup Ethernet Hub Private Local Area Network NetScan Private LAN Setup In this simple LAN scenario NetScan is connected to a network with several PC s using the TCP IP protocol These networks typically use a system administrator or network analyst to address TCP IP issues For private LAN setups requirements are 1 A unique IP address must be assigned to the NetScan device 2 The first three numbers of the IP address must be the same for all devices on the network 3 The sub net mask should be set to 255 255 255 0 4 The gateway address can be omitted Example TPC IP address set to 192 88 247 1 for NetScan device First three numbers of all network devices are 192 88 247 Sub net mask is set to 255 255 255 0 NetScan User s Manual Configuring and Starting NetScan 1 9 3 Private LAN Setup with Multiple Networks Gateway Ethernet Hub Ethernet Hub FELLJ FELIZ NetScan Local Area Network 1 Local Area Network 2 Private LAN with Multiple Networks In multiple network scenarios two o
193. ecting PostView from the appropriate pull down menu PostView opens Chart Setup Wizard PostView s File Open Box Two Basic Methods of Opening PostView When you first open PostView the program automatically checks for the existence of an iot or txt data file previous figure If no data file can be found PostView displays its File Open dialog box so you can select the desired file In addition PostView checks for a Display Configuration File see Note If none is found the File Open dialog box still allows you to select the desired file In this later case the Chart Setup Wizard opens providing a means of setting up a chart display the number of chart groups number of charts per group channel assignments for each chart and types of channels Note PostView automatically checks for Data Files These files are recognized by iot or txt filename extensions Note PostView automatically checks for Display Configuration files These files are automatically saved when exiting your data acquisition program These files are recognized by filename extensions of io for binary files and tx for ASCII files Note Several copies of PostView can be active at the same time allowing you to view different data files during the same session To view a data file from PostView select Open under PostView s File menu and select the desired data file NetScan User s Manual 11 06 9
194. ection boxes are not visible The following list identifies the various areas of the region DAJ 2 EAT ee CH2 fi 10 Chart Max Scale Value Grid Limit Line a 11 Channel Selection Of chart s available channels 03 05 37 22 12 Multiply x2 Baar 13 Deg C 13 Value at Marker L ef 50 49 14 Center 3 14 Center Value at chart mid line 15 Units Division Provides the vertical increment of one grid box 16 Chart Min Scale Value Grid Limit Line 17 Divide 2 22 Time at Marker Multiply and Divide Buttons 12 amp 17 In addition to reading channel values you can increase or decrease the size of the selected channel s chart This is accomplished with the Multiply 12 and Divide 17 push buttons The Multiply push button effectively increases the size of the selected channel s chart by a factor of 2 while automatically adjusting the chart s high and low values items 10 and 16 Aside from clicking on the Multiply Divide controls you can use your keyboard spacebar to control this feature once the button 12 or 17 is selected Selection may be with mouse or by tabbing over to the control Making changes to a channel s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of the other channels with the following exception Holding the keyboard s control key down while adjusting either spinner 0 t for center item 14 or spinner for units div item 15 causes the parameter
195. ects of errors and improve synchronization of command execution The primary advantage of deferred commands is that they are executed as a group either all or none If any errors occur deferred commands have no effect and the device is left in a consistent state instead of a partially modified inconsistent state NetScan User s Manual A 3 API Command Reference Appendix A The following is a list of all the immediate and deferred commands for NetScan e J Trigger On Command Deiered gt B Flush Acquisition Buffer Immediate Deferred immediate immediate immediate immediate immediate T immediate Deferred Deferred c Deferred cf immediate Deferred immediate E immediate Deferred Deferred G immediate immediate T Deferred 4 immediate J immediate immediate T Deferred Deferred Deferred immediate Deferred immediate Deferred 9c immediate immediate immediate immediate Deferred immediate Deferred Deferred immediate A 4 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A Deferred Commands Order of Execution The immediate commands take effect immediately when they are interpreted Even so they must be followed by an Execute X command to terminate the command string for correct operation For example K00001X API Command Reference Deferred commands are not executed until the X command has been successfully parsed and interpreted Upon interpretation of the X command the order of execution of all deferred command
196. ed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 4 With all covers in place allow the ChartScan or NetScan unit to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour also allow calibration equipment to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour 5 Short circuit the input channels that will be used for calibration one calibration channel per card The following figure illustrates the four different types of shorting connectors 6 10 Calibration NetScan User s Manual Copper Wire Solder ts Lp Sd Copper Wire ZZ ES BNC Connector Terminal Type Connector On Board Portion with Copper Short with Copper Short of Terminal Type Connector Short for CSN14 LV B Short for CSN14 LV T Copper Wire Copper Wire Banana Plugs Type U Subminiature Plug with Copper Short with Copper Short Short for CSN14 HV S and CSN14 LV S Short for CSN14 TC P Four Possible Short Types used for Signal Conitioning Card Offset Calibration 1 If the calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and the current password This enables the calibration mode 2 Type U2x to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode 3 Type H1x The Trigger LED will flash indicating that offset calibration is in progress for Channel 1 4 Type U2xX U128 should appe
197. egister NetScan User s Manual A 45 API Command Reference A 46 STATE INDICATOR 71615 4 3 2 1 0 State Indicator 00 Normal run mode 01 EPROM test mode 10 Cal mode idle 11 Cal mode cmd active BIT DEFINITIONS Normal Read Failure Write Failure Chksum Err NVRAM Err Inv Password Inv Command Appendix A Cal Modes pai Sas EEPROM rite Failure Errors Chksum Err Cal Err Inv Password Inv Command Not in cal mode offset cal gt offset out of range 365 gt offset gt 365 50 m v gain cal gain out of range 8 gt gain gt 1 2 cold junction cal temp sensor offset out of range 1000 gt offset gt 1000 Contents of Calibration Status Register CSR U3 Query the current system settings This command responds with the equivalent of the following F I L P Q S T Y U4 Reads the current High Low Last data for all configured channels Refer to the Data Output Format section of Appendix D for the format of the High Low Last response U5 Reads and resets the High Low Last data This command performs exactly like the U4 command except that it clears out the current High and Low readings for all of the configured channels U6 Reads the Buffer Status String The buffer status string contains current information regarding the current state of the acquisition buffer The current status of the acquisition buffer may be interrogated at any time by issuing the
198. elect Channels box and then clicking on the Remove button In the previous figure CH7 in the select box is highlighted Clicking the Remove button would delete the channel from Chart1 Note When a chart contains overlapping channels and the channels share values such that their traces reside on top of each other then the channels that are listed lower in the display list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels higher in the list those that were added first 10 In the display area on the left hand side of the screen click on a channel to check the channel s configuration and to re configure the channel if desired The Display Configuration Setup Window will appear similar to the following figure Note Changing the display configuration does not change the existing channel and alarm configuration It only changes how the chart groups charts and channels will be displayed This screen contains two radio buttons for selecting the method of adjusting the display mode and channel setup It is the same screen discussed in the sub section Editing an Existing Display Configuration From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale or Units Div Each method was previously discussed see page 4 11 Display Configuration Setup Es TF F ia CF F Ok sloni Slorr e Display Et Group 1 Units Full Scale SE Chart 1 C Units Div Type J Units JE Trace Color Blue Y Max 100
199. emperature Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels Repeat this test for all thermocouple type signal conditioning cards The T C Calibrator Simulator Method is not recommended because unlike voltage calibrators T C Calibrator Simulators have no provisions for remote sensing and are therefore more readily subject to the transient effects of sampled data acquisition systems such as ChartScan and NetScan These transient effects can cause erroneous readings even when both units are calibrated within specifications Calibration 6 19 Cold Cell T Type T C Wire fo Simulator for 0 C and subminiature plug connector Eas 2 Thermocouples 2 ine at 0 C MEIS n o gt e 4 gee pos Hs pi Re afet Mle O O0 _ E a EE tt _ Phop aol Bed CHM A etree 0 O 0 oaa a e Connection Box Not part of Cold Cell a gi
200. empty For more information on using the R command refer to Appendix A NetScan User s Manual C 25 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Configuring Alarms NetScan can produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of user defined limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on the NetScan back panel To use alarms the channels in question must be part of the channel scan The alarms will become active and monitored only after an acquisition has been configured and armed and only at the programmed scan rate Note To enable alarm monitoring prior to the trigger event or to have an alarm condition serve as a trigger event you must first configure the acquisition with at least one pre trigger scan Alarm Set Points Each channel has an associated high and low set point Set points are defined as part of a channel configuration using the C command These set points create the envelope that constitutes the channel s normal operating range If the channel value goes above the high set point or below the low set point the channel is in the alarm state If any channel configured by the C command 1s in the alarm state a system alarm event is posted For example if the trigger source is on Alarm the alarm event would cause a trigger Digital Alarm Outputs If desired you can use an alarm event for a specific channel as a stimulus
201. enient way to monitor and analyze specific types of trigger events For example if you set Channel 1 going above 30 C as a trigger you can choose to repeat 100 or more acquisitions with this same trigger criteria Channel 1 gt 30 C Whether you select to capture the trigger blocks in one file or each in a separate file each of the data acquisitions will occur automatically and each will make use of your set configuration Disabling Auto Re arm To disable Auto Re arm simply use Auto Re arm s default setting of Capture one trigger block When you capture only one trigger block you are in essence not making use of the automatic re arm feature Note The trigger event trigger by absolute time is not suitable for automatic re arming In this instance the default of Capture one trigger block is automatically forced ChartView Software Reference NetScan User s Manual Chart Setup Wizard Reference Note For very first time start up of ChartView and a program tutorial that includes a first time use of the Chart Setup Wizard refer to Chapter 2 Introduction Chart Setup Wizard is a feature of ChartView ChartView Plus and PostView The feature allows you to set up your initial chart display configuration using an automated method or manually create a new display configuration The following points are important in regard to the Chart Setup Wizard You can edit the chart display by accessing the Display Config
202. er s Manual 11 9 98 General Information and Specifications 3 1 Although NetScan can acquire temperature readings at a rate of 147 channels sec you may also program the unit to acquire data at specified time intervals using the hh mm ss t format For the ultimate in flexibility you may also program separate pre and post trigger sample rates As an example NetScan can be programmed to sample data once per hour and then sample once per second when channel 2 reaches 70 C NetScan was designed with the convenience of remote operation through the ethernet If desired RS 232 or RS 422 serial connections can be used instead of ethernet connections Chapter 7 Hardware contains information regarding non ethernet use of NetScan Statistics such as High Low and Last are available for each channel for data reduction In addition up to 32 alarms may be programmed using the programmable high and low limits for each channel NetScan s features include Thirty two TTL Transistor to Transistor Logic digital alarm outputs and 8 TTL compatible digital inputs Two programmable scan rates 1 a programmable scan rate for pre trigger and post trigger sampling and 2 a programmable scan rate for accelerated sampling on event detection A built in real time clock which synchronizes the acquisition to the time of day and provides time and date stamping for trend analysis Time stamping may be in relative or absolute time 10Base T Ethernet Interface w
203. er On Reset R command The following list outlines the possible conditions of the ESE NOOO Sending this command clears the entire mask of the Event Status Enable ESE Register to zero NOO1 Acquisition Complete Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB if the unit has determined that the configured acquisition has completed N002 Stop Event Sending this command allows the setting of the ESB when the pre defined stop event of a configured acquisition has occurred NOO4 Query Error This condition is set when an attempt is made to read data from the output queue when no data are present or data in the output queue were lost Data may be lost when too many data are requested to be buffered in the queue for example issuing multiple commands to return data without ever reading them NOO08 Device Dependent Error This condition is set when a conflict in programmed parameters is detected This is also referred to as a conflict error N016 Execution Error This condition is set when a parameter exceeds valid limits for a particular command This is also referred to as Invalid Device Dependent Command Option IDDCO error N032 Command Error This condition is set when an illegal command is sent to the unit This is also referred to as Invalid Device Dependent Command IDDC error NO64 Buffer 75 Full Sending this command will allow the setting of the ESB when the unit has determined that the acquisition buffer is at least 75 fu
204. erate Advanced Create a Display Groupe With 2 Charts per group overlapping channels That hawe fa per chart Starting with channel CH1 r The number of Instrument D ata Channels available ts 128 The above setup will assign 24 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CH24 Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation 5 8 PostView NetScan User s Manual It is a simple task to create a chart display configuration using the automatic method The following steps apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard Note If PostView locates a display configuration file Chart Setup Wizard will not be activated unless you choose to manually activate the Wizard from the File pull down menu 1 From the Chart Setup Wizard window select the desired mode Simple Moderate or Advanced Note Selecting Manual Chart Creation Create Charts bypasses the Chart Setup Wizard and enters a manual editing mode This option makes use of PostView s Display Configuration feature discussed in the following section Display Configuration 2 Use the pull down arrows t or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections for the number of groups charts and channels as applicable 3 If you desire to start with a channel other than channel 1 use the pull down arrow and select the desired starting channel number 4 When your setup is complete click on the Create Charts butto
205. es that the command will be executed immediately upon successful parsing of the command and instrument parameters Deferred Indicates that the command will be saved and executed later after successfully parsing and performing an Execute X command The Commands The following pages presents the API Command Reference for NetScan The API Commands have been arranged in alphabetical order by command syntax with the and characters preceding the alphabetical characters and with preceding the letter Q A 10 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Trigger On Command SYNTAX Triggeruponreceiptofan O Z S O The Trigger On command will start or stop the acquisition accordingly when the start or stop arguments of the Set Trigger Configuration T command is set to 1 trigger on The T command is used as a trigger source and follows the same rules as other trigger sources as defined by the T command The command is valid only when an acquisition is configured where either the start and or stop event is defined as the Trigger On command If this command is issued when the acquisition is not configured for stop and or start Trigger On command an error condition will occur EXAMPLE PRINT 1 T1 1 0 0X Configure an acquisition with both start and stop trigger being Trigger On command PRINT 1 X Start the acquisition SLEEP 10 Wait 10 seconds to collect data PRINT 1 X S
206. et Data Format F which determines the input and output format used for channel data when X is interpreted As deferred commands are interpreted their desired effects are recorded in internal temporary registers As additional deferred commands are interpreted their effects are added to these registers possibly overwriting earlier effects Finally when X is interpreted the temporary registers are examined in the execution order described below If two deferred commands that do not affect the same function are received before the Execute X command they take effect in the execution order described below If a deferred command is sent multiple times within a command line the last occurrence of the command will take precedence Note that a command line is terminated by the x For example if F1 1 F1 3X is sent the data output format will be as specified by the F1 3X command The F1 1 command is overridden and never takes effect If an error is detected during command processing commands are ignored up through and including the next execute command Thus any immediate commands after the error and all deferred commands are ignored For example the command line T1 1 0 00216 0 25 255AAT3 7 K20 X containing the error AA only executes the 00 because it is an immediate command that occurred before the error The deferred commands T1 1 0 0 and T3 7 0 0 and the immediate command K20 after the error have no effect Deferred commands help reduce the eff
207. eters The DIP switch is located on the lower right corner of NetScan s rear panel Default settings are as follows Note that micro switch 1 must be set to the O position The IEEE position does not apply to NetScan Selection Micro Switch Setting IEEE RS 422 ON 1 COMM SELECT 1 0 Required for NetScan 0 HANDSHAKE H S 2 3 1 0 Hardware Handshake 1 cE Ba as 2 PARITY 4 5 0 0 No Parity tn ne ay oe BAUD RATE 6 7 8 1 1 0 19200 Baud SELECT BAUD RATE RS 232 422 SELECT 9 0 RS 232 NetScan Default DIP Switch Settings 1 Turn the NetScan system s power OFF 2 Set the Ethernet RS 232 422 Selector Switch to the RS 232 422 position This switch is located on the ethernet interface portion of NetScan s rear panel refer to rear panel figure as needed 3 Ensure the COMM SELECT micro switch 1 on NetScan s rear panel DIP switch is in the 0 down position This position is required Note that the IEEE 488 position does not apply to NetScan 4 Adjust micro switches according the following table 7 7 Configuration Settings on Rear Panel DIP Switch IEEE RS 422 EPERBRTEE 3 4 5 6 7 8 LILI Lt COMM H S PARITY SERIAL RS 232 SELECT BAUD RATE Micro Label Description switch COMM SELECT 0 Selects serial communication Not applicable to NetScan No Handshake Handshake PARITY 00 NoParity Cis 1 6 7 8 SERIAL BAUD RATE 000 300 baud 600 baud 1200
208. etup and Verification of Calibrated Temperatures The cold junction calibration applies only to thermocouple cards CSN14 TC P The figure on the next page Cold Junction Calibration Equipment Setup represents the setup for a T C card in slot 1 In this example channels 3 6 11 and 14 must be used for the cold junction calibration The following table indicates channel numbers applicable to the T C card in each of the eight possible card slots Unt S O Main Chassis bottom slot Expansion Chassis Option 67 70 75 78 83 86 91 94 99 102 107 110 8 top slot 115 118 123 126 CAUTION when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause lt Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note The Cold Cell Simulator in the following figure shows a special connection box attached to it This connection box which can be easily made is not part of the cold cell device NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 17 connector 1 of 4 ML 2 Thermocouples HIG at 0 C j pE i 2 i mo i e ell iS T Type T C Wire and subminiature plug T C Card in Main Chassis O 0 right 19 g Ditech Ine TO CHARTSCAN LV TC INPUT CARD Copyt
209. ewing area as compared to using one third of the area The zoom feature can also be invoked by double clicking in the chart region of the chart you want to apply the zoom to Once you have zoomed in on a chart the pull down menu Zoom option is replaced by a Restore option Selecting Restore from the menu will return the main window to its previous multiple chart viewing status The restore feature can also be invoked by again double clicking in the chart region Allows you to turn the chart s grid limit lines items 13 amp 19 on or off If on you can have the grid lines appear as solid or dots Allows you to select an Absolute or Relative style of timestamp Toolbar Timestamps amp Chartspeed Statusbar 4 18 ChartView Software Reference W Toolbar W Timestamps amp Chartspeed W Statusbar Options A y by Toolbar indicates the toolbar will be visible The absence of the v indicates the visible toolbar option is not chosen and in this case will not appear on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select the toolbar option A v by Timestamps amp Chartspeed indicates the options are selectable and visible The absence of the V indicates the timestamp chartspeed option is not chosen and therefor not visible on the Main Window Use the mouse to select or de select this option A Vv by Statusbar indicates the Status Message Box and Status LEDs are visible items 22 and 24 page 4 5 The absence of th
210. f every chart showing the time and magnitude of the first visible point Ctri Left Mouse Button moves the markers from all the charts in unison The Options menu contains a function which allows you to turn markers on and off When a check appears in front of this item its associated indicator is on or visible Selecting the menu item tog gles the indicator and the check mark on and off Marker See figure PostView TimeBase Marker See figure PostView TimeBase The Scroll Bar at the bottom of the PostView window allows the waveforms to be scrolled right or left in two ways 1 When clicked on the small left and right arrow boxes scroll the waveforms approximately 20 2 The plain scroll button shows the relative location of the visible region of the waveforms and can be dragged along the scroll bar to any location desired 5 4 PostView NetScan User s Manual Channel Information Region By clicking on the up or down arrows o or t by the channel selection box item 11 you can select one channel of a maximum of 4 overlapping channels that were assigned to that chart You could then observe the chart related information for that specific channel You can also select a new channel for the information region by placing the cursor in or tabbing over to the Center or Units Div fields and then pressing PageUp or PageDown This is particularly useful when your main window has been re sized such that the channel sel
211. f the NetScan Returns 0 if successful error code if not Description This function is used to end an active session When operations with the NetScan are completed this function should be called to end the session nSwDeinit ae Function int nSWDeinit void Parameters None Returns 0 if successful error code if not Description This function is used to de initialize all resources allocated by the nSWInit function This is the last function that should be called NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Reference Note If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Commands A Reference Note Hardware configuration is discussed in Chapter 7 Contents Memory Allocation 474 474 74774447474747477774 4MM C 2 Measuring Modes 4 4747474474747474747477424741 n nnn n nn nen nnn n nn nnn nnn nnn n eee n nnn n nnn e eee n nnn eeenee C 3 OVerVieW C 3 Normal Mode C 4 High Speed Single Channel Mode C 5 Configu
212. fault PRINT 1 R3X Request all scan data in buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A 0234 20 0019 404 0001 40 0023 60 With absolute time stamping PRINT 1 T1X Enable time stamping PRINT 1 R3X Request all scan data in buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT AS 07 35 22 400 08 29 94R 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 Note The R following the date 08 29 94 in the above code is a reading separator which has been assigned with Query Terminator Q With relative time stamping PRINT 1 T2X Enable time stamping PRINT 1 R3X Request all scan data in buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A 00 01 05 5 0000001R 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 Note The R in the above code is a reading separator which has been assigned with Query Terminator Q Note Time stamping is not valid in burst mode or when the output format is binary Additionally relative time stamping is invalid when attempting to use it in conjunction with continuous gap free acquisitions with two time bases Alarm Stamping A For further monitoring and analysis of alarm conditions the states of the 32 alarm outputs can be stamped to scan in real time Alarm stamping can be enabled with the A 1 command and disabled with the A 0 command Refer to the A command description for further details An example of the A command follows Note Alarm stamping is not valid in high speed
213. fer overrun It prevents new data from being lost and keeps the scan rate consistent but it also overwrites the oldest data Although registered as an error depending on the application a buffer overrun may be a part of normal operation For example if a NetScan with 256 Kbytes of memory was configured to scan 16 channels at a one minute interval the buffer would fill and an overrun would occur in about 5 6 days Regardless of how long the NetScan is left unattended after that point it will always maintain the newest 5 6 days of scans There are two cases of buffer overrun One when only one trigger block is in the buffer and secondly when multiple trigger blocks are in the buffer If a buffer overrun occurs it may be detected by querying the Status Byte STB by a U1X command PRINT 1 U1X INPUT 1 AS S VAL AS IF S and 128 128 THEN PRINT Buffer Overrun Occurred ENDIF NetScan User s Manual D 17 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block When only one trigger block is in the buffer a buffer overrun will erase the entire pre trigger If the controller was reading pre trigger data from the buffer the next scan read will be the trigger point If no pre trigger was configured or the pre trigger has already been read a buffer overrun will only erase the oldest scan in the buffer If the scan being erased is currently being read the contents of the read scan wil
214. figuration mode Valid options for mode are 0 Power up under last Known configuration default and 1 Power up under factory default configuration T Time Stamping Tstate Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable time stamping default 1 Enable absolute time stamping and 2 Enable relative time stamping Assign Alarm Output Set alarm condition where chans is the channel s to assign to the digital output chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan output is the digital output number to associate the channel s with where 0 lt output lt 32 Query channels assigned to digital output Alarm Stamping A state Specify whether or not alarm stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable alarm stamping default and 1 Enable alarm stamping Configure Channels Cchans Configure the channels for the master unit and its slave units type chans and type are required arguments while Lowsp aap highsp and hyst are optional a T chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 type is the type to assign to those channels Query current cha
215. first Group Q 11 ChartView Plus users click on the word number Group 2 Q 12 ChartView Plus users click on the word number Chart 3 of Group 2 You should now see channels 21 through 24 listed at that location The channels in the setup you just created will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on ChartView s Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at a time even if you are using ChartView Plus You can enable additional channels from the Channel Configuration window This allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels which you do not monitor Q 13 Click Okay to exit the dialog box Group 1 M L 1 Group Select 7 Display Configuration 2 Start Charts amp Indicators 8 Channel Configuration 3 Pause Charts 9 PostView 4 Stop Charts 10 Arm Acquisition 5 Scroll Faster 11 Disarm 6 Scroll Slower 12 Print Charts ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual ChartView Toolbar Reference 3 Configure Channels amp Alarms Configure channels and alarms as follows Q 14 On ChartView s Main Window click on Setup in the pull down menu row The Setup pull down menu appears allowing you to make more specific selections P
216. for a digital output signal TTL on the back panel of the NetScan This signal can be used to set off an audible alarm user supplied or to inform another device of the alarm condition Thirty two digital alarm outputs are available on the NetScan back panel Although analog input channels on the expansion chassis can be used to stimulate alarms no digital output signals are available on the expansion chassis Regardless of the number of expansion chassis connected no more than 32 digital alarm outputs are available The Assign Alarm Output A command may be used to assign alarm conditions of various channels to one of the 32 digital TLL level outputs located on the back panel You can tie as many of the alarm conditions as you want to any digital output Use the C and A commands to configure alarm conditions for driving the digital output lines to enable alarm monitoring e The C command determines the high and low setpoints and hysteresis of the alarm condition e The A command assigns an input channel alarm to a digital output The following example indicates how to configure alarms and associate them with digital outputs for 24 channels on the NetScan PRINT 1 C1 24 1 100 0 100 0 10 0X Setup channels 1 24 type J low setpoint 100 0 C high setpoint 100 0 hysteresis 10 0 C PRINT 1 Al 1X Assign alarm channel 1 to Digital Output 1 PRINT 1 A2 2X Assign alarm channel 2 to Digital Output 2 C 26
217. fset value the value of the calculated reading when the scanned value is zero CHOOSE UNITS gt Configure Engineering Units Use the form below to configure the channel to the formula Y mX b Ref Chan Chan Value Scale Factor Raw Chan Value Offset Ref Chan In Units C 1 000 A In Unite E 0 000 z CH2 Linear Transfer Function yY eme h Yy output channel i OK x input channel m slope Cancel b y intercept Alarm Configuration Columns 1 Low Limit Set alarm low limit 2 High Limit Set alarm high limit 3 Hysteresis A hysteresis value can be set for each channel to avoid a chatter problem See Appendix C Set Point Hysteresis page C 27 4 Alarm You can assign one alarm number 1 to 32 to a channel Any number of channels can be assigned to the same alarm number A given digital output will be set true 1 if at least one of the common channels assigned to a single alarm enters an alarm state Acquisition Setup Dialog Box The information entered in the Acquisition Setup dialog box is used by the Arm Acquisition command to set up the acquisition of data to disk When the trigger is satisfied the scans are collected at the selected scan frequency and stored to disk in the designated file The Acquisition Setup dialog box can be accessed in one of three ways a clicking on the Channel Configuration button item 8 in Main Window figure b cli
218. full scale setting across the chart Units Div When Units Div is selected you can alter Y Center and Units Div Y Center is the centerline value of the chart when the channel is selected Units Div is the vertical value of on chart grid increment When you change Y Center or Units Div Y Max and Y Min are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while Units Div Is selected You can change Y Center and Units Div by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at a time Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Div Mode will maintain its units per division scale setting across the chart NetScan User s Manual PostView Timebase PostView automatically detects and displays the data file timebase along the X axis at the bottom of the PostView window The timebase can be displayed as relative time or as absolute time in the format 00 00 00 0 hour minute second tenth The timebase format of absolute or relative can be selected in PostView s Option pull down menu or by using Ctrl A or Ctrl R respectively Note PostView automatically displays milliseconds ms or microseconds us when applicable to acquisition programs that make
219. g Acquisition in Instrument 4 Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Sensor ZS Acquisiton Device Computer System Acquisiton Device Computer System Acquired data from point of trigger is received by acquisition device Acquired data is uploaded to the PC hard disk from the device buffer and temporarily stored in device buffer As in the previous scenarios As in the previous scenarios selected display channels can be selected display channels can be viewed viewed Four Basic Data Acquisition Scenarios What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide ChartView and ChartView Plus provide you with the capability to connect to and control any member of the ChartScan NetScan MultiScan or TempScan family of data acquisition instruments as well as Create and edit chart display setups ceeeeeeeee ee earns See Display Configuration beginning on page 4 9 and Chart Setup Wizard beginning on page 4 41 Set up analog input parameters selecting Channels See Setup Window beginning on page 4 33 TC types Units to acquire data Configure alarms log alarMS cccceeeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeseneens See pages 4 24 4 33 and 4 36 Configure and arm an ACquiSitiONn cceceeeee ee eee ee ee eee ees See Acquisition Setup Dialog Box page 4 36 View real time display of channel data via the Main Window See Main Window beginning on page 4 4 Save dala to CIS onsaictenccaranesiacenenstnenantyst
220. g Meters configure the meter settings by first clicking the right mouse button anywhere within the meter display area A pop up menu will appear allowing you to reconfigure the meter in regard to scale limits channel selection adding peak hold indicators etc Refer to the section entitled Meters Configuration Menu for more detail NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 29 Digital Meters Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Digital Meters window to display several channels in numeric format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time ioul Chart iew Digital Meters Oy x Control View 1 CH1 Q 400500 mv 6 040555 o 5 740777 x 0 040576 v 0 040444 v Digital Meters Shown with 6 Meters Selected for Viewing z 5 740777 3 v 0 050575 ee 0 040576 S y 0 040444 P Note Although the Digital Meters instrument is capable of displaying 6 decimal places there is not 6 place accuracy in the readings Due to transducer and transient noises the accuracy of voltage readings is 0 02 Temperature accuracy varies depending on thermocouple type with type J having 0 5 C for a range of 100 C to 760 C For your application please refer to specifications of the signal conditioning c
221. g the top pull down triangle t and then selecting the applicable interface from the expanded interface list Note that Rear Panel Switch Settings shown in the window correspond to the chosen interface Click the Verify box to make sure the settings are correct The Calibration Enable Disable pushbutton located on the main unit chassis rear panel must be in the indent enable position in order to calibrate the main chassis Early production ChartScan units units that have no calibration pushbutton must have DIP switch 9 in the 1 up position After completing the prompt instructions you can save the calibration settings by selecting the Save Interface Parameters selection from the File pull down menu or toolbar The settings and constants will be stored in a file with a CAL extension 6 4 Calibration NetScan User s Manual System Inventory 2 Select the Inventory icon from the toolbar to generate a list of items that make up your scanning system 3 Select the items you wish to calibrate Calibration 4 Select the Calibration icon from the toolbar to initiate the automatic calibration process The ScanCal program will prompt you through the calibration Be ready to supply the corresponding passwords when prompted by ScanCal ScanCal contains a feature that allows you to view the calibration steps without performing an actual calibration This is accomplished by using the Skip this Step button to skip a procedural step
222. gardless of whether you are using the basic ChartView program or ChartView Plus there is a maximum limit of 16 charts per group Multiply and Divide Buttons _In addition to reading channel values you can increase or decrease the size of the selected channel s chart This is accomplished with the Multiply 15 and Divide 20 push buttons The Multiply push button effectively increases the size of the selected channel s chart by a factor of two while automatically adjusting the chart s high and low values items 13 and 19 Aside from clicking on the Multiply Divide controls you can use your keyboard spacebar to control this feature once the button 15 or 20 is selected Selection may be with mouse or by tabbing over to the control Making changes to a channel s chart parameters does not affect the parameters of the other channels with the following exception Holding the keyboard s control key down while adjusting either spinner o t for center item 17 or spinner for units div item 18 causes the parameter change to apply to all channels displayed for the chart not just the currently selected channel display This feature applies to the spinners and keyboard up and down arrow keys but not to the text input Center Control The Center control item 17 changes the value of the selected channel s chart centerline Changing the value of center results in an automatic change of the chart s high and low end values ite
223. ge and Sensing Connections Harness and Connections for Gain Calibration of CSN14 HV S Card NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 15 6 16 Calibration 2 Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each CSN14 HV S card see following table and verify with a digital multimeter Requirements for both devices are specified in Required Equipment VoltsDC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Note In the slot columns the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding the X assigns the voltage value e g G1 20X means Calibrate Gain for channel 1 2 5 V After each calibration type U2xX and check for a return of U128 to confirm no errors Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 4 After completing the gain calibration of all cards type EX to end the calibration mode Type U2xX to confirm calibration mode is disabled A return of U000 confirms this Note You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following C 1X QC for slot 1 You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry s
224. gger event once a stop event and post stop event is detected If the feature is not in use a T command must be issued after a stop event before the unit can begin looking for a trigger However using Auto Rearm does not allow the user to change the trigger configuration between triggers the initial configuration will be used until Auto Rearm is disabled To disable Auto Rearm a T command must be issued with the flag set to zero Data will still be available after the T command is issued Refer to the Command Reference section for details NetScan User s Manual C 13 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C In order for an acquisition to take place the unit must have a trigger event and can be assigned a Stop Event This allows different stimuli to begin and end an acquisition Note Ifthe trigger start event is level or alarm at least one pre trigger scan must be programmed to initiate scanning in order for the NetScan to recognize the event External TTL High or Low Level Start and or Stop Event When External TTL Level is specified as a trigger source T6 or T7 a TTL level signal on the external trigger connector rear panel BNC will generate a trigger The external trigger is level sensitive and triggering on the high level or low level can be specified Selected Temperature Channel High or Low Level Start and or Stop Event When a selected channel is specified data collection starts when the level for the selected ch
225. ght inputs and thirty two outputs see note The digital outputs can be controlled either automatically via the alarm settings or with programming using the Set Digital Outputs O command To determine the digital output state use the O command With the Set Digital Outputs O command you can output a byte for each output bank and specify which output bits should be cleared logic false or set logic true The O command will override the digital output states as set by the alarm condition Refer to the Command Reference section of this manual for details Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL loads Each digital input line is one eighth 0 125 TTL load All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltages Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to 0 3 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Reference Note If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of A the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Commands Contents Using the High Low Last HLL Registers 2 222220000 0220200 D 2 What is Contained in the HLL Registers D 2 Accessing the HLL Registers
226. gital Meters selection Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters selection Displays a pointer to indicate the direction of the trend Note during rapid meter fluctuations the increase and decrease pointers will appear to blink simultaneously Provides a way of establishing high and low limit set points Displays limits in color red for high blue for low The color is applied to scale regions gt the set limit values For Digital Meters the limits are indicated by red numbers and an upper red bar for hitting or exceeding the high limit and blue numbers and a lower blue bar when reaching or exceeding the low limit Allows setting and showing limits as well as opening the Scale dialog box You can access a different dialog box from the one initially selected For example from the Set Scale dialog box you can select Limits to access the Set Limits Show Limits display as well as select Misc to Show Trend Indicator and Show Peak Hold Indicators You can use the Simulated Instrument mode to familiarize yourself with various meter configuration options Setup Window The Setup Window is used to configure channels setup acquisition parameters and assign data destinations and configure the auto re arm feature The Setup Window contains three tabs Channel a
227. hat the stop event occurred for the current read block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query then this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 e End Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current read block that the end scan occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer unless a post stop count is specified Y command in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event Pointer by the value of the post stop count e Block Status This field represents the status of the current read block If the current read block is not yet completely written then the value of this field will be 00 If the current read block has been completely written and has terminated normally the value will be 01 If however the current read block has prematurely terminated because of user intervention the value will be 02 Note Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se The trigger block numbers referred to in the U6 examples in Appendi
228. he back panel is in the ON position depressed OFF if power is not present LED Indicators Ehternet Interface Panel ACTIVITY LINK ETHERNET ON when data is being sent or received through the internet ON when the NetScan unit has a solid connection to the internet ON when the ethernet interface is enabled and functioning properly OFF when the ethernet interface is disabled FLASHES when a problem exists that requires factory attention LED Indicators Power Switch ALARM TRIGGER SCAN na ERROR POWER Ethernet Interface A cimry a CONFIG o ETHERNET Beer ee Elan te DIP Switch i Power Fuse Chassis Alarms amp Digital O RS 232 422 Connector Holder Ground Trigger In TTL Output DB50 Connector DB9 Connector Calibration Enable Disable Power Connector Power Switch Chassis Ground Calibration Enable Disable Trigger In TTL Output Alarms amp Digital I O DB50 Connector RS 232 422 DB9 Connector Interface Card Slot LED Indicators 7 2 NetScan Rear Panel Description Provides a means for connecting NetScan to one of two voltage supplies 105 125V or 210 250V The connected power supply must agree with that selected by NetScan s internal slide switch described later in this chapter Turns power ON or OFF A single point grounding node for but not limited to thermocouple shield termination Pushbutton used to enable disable the hardware protected
229. he chain This hierarchical approach provides the ability to have varying levels of status reporting The lowest levels give general status information while the higher levels give more details of the particular events in question At the lowest level in this chain is the Status Byte Register This allows quick response of certain critical operational status conditions contained in the Status Byte Register STB However since this register is the lowest register in the chain every other status register in the system either directly or indirectly has access to the STB register via the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the STB register This gives these other status registers the ability although not detailed to quickly report their status to the controller The Event Status Enable ESE Register may be used to define which bits in the Event Status Register will be mapped into the Event Status Register Bit ESB in the STB The bits in the ESE represent an exact image of the bits in the ESR When a condition is set in the ESR its image bit is checked in the ESE If enabled the ESB bit in the STB is set The Service Request Enable SRE register may be used to define those conditions in the STB which will generate a Service Request SRQ The bits in the SRE represent an exact image of the bits in the STB accept for Service Request Bit When a condition is set in the STB its image bit is checked in the SRE If enabled the NetScan will generate a Serv
230. he time that the indicated chart value 13 was read NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 5 Menu Items 2 Opens a data file created by the data acquisition program PostView automatically Note In PostView Version 3 0 If there is a Pre trigger then Pre trigger and Post trigger times in seconds are displayed in the Go To menu s dialog box Zoom Chart Absolute time Ctrl A Relative time Ctrl R Autoscale Current Channel Autoscale All Channels Data Commentary Ctrl C Contents 5 6 PostView 2 Zoom Chart causes PostView to display one chart only For example if you were viewing 3 charts and desired to get a better view of Chart 2 you could use Zoom to view Chart 2 using the full chart viewing area as compared to using one third of the area The zoom feature can also be invoked by double clicking in the chart region of the chart for which you want to apply the zoom Once you have zoomed in on a chart the pull down menu Zoom option is replaced by a Restore option Selecting Restore from the menu will return the main window to its previous multiple chart viewing status The restore feature can also be invoked by again double clicking in the chart region Places the timebase in a 24 hour absolute time format For example 25 2 seconds after 3 08 p m would appear as 15 08 25 2 Places the timebase in a relative time format typically having 00 00 00 0 as the start time and having
231. heck and Install Hardware 1 2 Verify Voltage Setting 1 2 Verify DIP Switch Setting 1 2 Install Signal Conditioning Card s 1 2 Connect Expansion Chassis option 1 3 Setup for Ethernet Operation 1 4 Complete Hardware Setup for Ethernet Operation 1 4 NetScan and TCP IP Addressing 1 8 Protocol 1 8 IP Address 1 8 Sub net Mask 1 8 Gateway Address 1 8 Configuration 1 9 Point to Point Setup 1 9 Private LAN Setup 1 9 Private LAN Setup with Multiple Networks 1 10 LAN Setup with Internet Access 1 10 Connect Channel Signal Inputs 1 10 2 ChartViewNET QuickStart and Tutorial Overview 2 1 ChartViewNET Basic Concepts 2 1 Configuration Files 2 1 Groups Charts amp Channels 2 2 Three Ways of Using ChartViewNET 2 3 ChartViewNET Tutorial 2 6 3 General Information and Specifications General Description 3 1 Operational Aspects 3 2 Data Handling and Triggering 3 2 Software and Hardware 3 3 NetScan Specifications 3 3 4 ChartView Software Reference Overview 4 1 Groups Charts amp Channels 4 2 Three Ways of Using ChartView 4 2 What ChartView and ChartView Plus Provide sae 4 3 Main Window 4 4 Channel Information Region 4 6 Status Indicator Region 4 7 Main Window Toolbar 4 8 Grou
232. her in the list those that were added first About Clicking About will display a ChartView or ChartView Plus dialog box as well as the software 7 version number ChartView Plus can be activated from the ChartView dialog box upon entering a valid Registration ID Number and clicking the OK button Your program can be registered through your service representative Ez Chart View az ChartView Plus Version 1 00 Version 1 00 Registration Registration SST rae ID Number ID Number ARRIRA a5 tinapik Tt Contact your sales office to register your copy of ChartView Registered users have access to all of the program s features Dialog Boxes for ChartView and ChartView Plus Exit Exits the ChartView program 4 16 ChartViewSoftware Reference ssi Ne Scan User s Manual File Menu Note When ChartView is started for the very first time there is no default channel configuration file In this case a ChartView Startup dialog box appears providing you with the following four choices Retry Select Device Load File and Exit Program After choosing Select Device a Select Interface dialog box appears allowing you to choose IEEE 488 RS 232 422 Network or Simulated Instrument For ethernet operation Network must be selected as the device interface Note NetScan devices can not make use of the IEEE 488 selection Select Interface E Chart View Startup Device Interface C IEEE 438 O RS 732422 Load
233. ibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Channel Offset H command is used to calibrate the correction offset constants for a given slide in card The channel offset values are necessary in order for the internal firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels This command will take the parameter chan and calculate the offsets based on the present channel input voltage Note To achieve correct results 0 0 mV must be present at the desired channel prior to performing the command The 0 0 mV value is obtained by placing a short across the applicable channel Chapter 6 Calibration provides illustrations of various channel shorts After the command has been issued the precision voltage source must remain at its value at least until the trigger LED stops flashing in order to achieve accurate results Refer to Chapter 6 for more information calibration EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345x Enter Calibration Mode Connect short across applicable channel PRINT 1 H17X Calculate offsets for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 EX End Calibration Mode NetScan User s Manual A 27 API Command Reference Appendix A I Set Scan Interval TYPE Acquisition EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Inorm Set the two configurable scan intervals of the unit where norm and acq are acq the n
234. ibration of Main Unit 6 6 Calibration Setup 6 1 Offset Calibration of Main Unit 6 6 Non Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants Gain Calibration of Main Unit 6 8 RRN 6 2 Hardware Protected RAM 6 2 Manual Calibration of ScanCal Software Application 6 3 Signal Conditioning Cards 6 10 ScanCal s Main Window 6 3 Offset Calibration of Cards 6 10 Using ScanCal 6 4 Gain Calibration of Low Volts Cards 6 12 Interface Parameters Gain Calibration of High Volts Card 6 15 System Inventory Cold Junction Calibration 6 17 Calibration Calibration Without ScanCal 6 5 Password 6 5 Calibration Mode Indicator 6 5 Command Active Indicators 6 5 CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Introduction ScanCal is a Window s based software program that provides step by step calibration instructions If you do not wish to use ScanCal you can manually calibrate the system according to instructions presented later in this chapter Note that this chapter has been written for both ChartScan and NetScan devices Note The main unit ChartScan or NetScan and signal conditioning cards are calibrated prior to shipment however these items require periodic calibrati
235. ice Request SRQ In the same fashion that the setting of events or conditions affects the lower levels of registers in the chain the clearing of events or conditions in the higher level registers also causes the clearing of those affected conditions in the lower level registers The following sections describe in detail the contents and operation of these registers More information on these registers can also be found in the Command Reference section under the M N U and E commands relating to these registers D 12 NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries State Indicator Error Indicators A f ua D Calibration Status Register U2 Refer to U2 Command Reference for definitions of indicators QO Q a IDDC Error Source Register E _ E S roy 5 D Z Q F a z ES 5 ss O x ng gt sE S ao 5 a oO Ww Q r Q SNI O Yo lt Event Status Register U0 AND Logic Connection Event Status Enable Register Nn N Not Empty o Output Queue Read by Serial Poll EE IEEE 488 only ervice QS east Pid i ir sew an ae ea UN Read by U1 rete CAET IEEE 488 or Serial oe Available eee 71x 15 la 3 l2 l1 Service Request Enable Register Mn M Status Reporting Registers NetScan User s Manual D 13 Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix D Calibration Status Register U2
236. ich disables digital input stamping or 1 to enable digital stamping Calibrate Cold Junction Calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation Offset of the thermocouple signals where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan type is the thermocouple channel type temp is the reference temperature currently being applied to the selected channel with the form nnn n in degrees C Enter Calibration Mode if the keyword or password is correct where key is the keyword in the form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters Query Kkey as defined above NetScan User s Manual A 7 API Command Reference Appendix A Command Description Set Trigger Level Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan level is the level against which the readings are tested to determine if the level has been exceeded hyst is the hysteresis level po P Query the the current level settings ane eal Mode Specify measuring mode Valid options for mode are 0 Line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode and 1 Single channel high speed burst mode Set Event Mask Nmask Directly sets the Event Status Enable Register ESE where mask is in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 is summed
237. igh Low Last Registers or the Acquisition Buffer Scan configuration is also accomplished using the Configure Channels C command This command allows up to 128 channels to be specified by either assigning individual channels or entering a range of channels The 128 possible channels can be configured in any sequence but the scan will be ordered sequentially by NetScan Note Channels cannot be accessed randomly as part of a channel scan Configuring the Scan Interval The scan interval is the frequency at which the scans are acquired It can be programmed via the Set Scan Interval I command from a 99 hour period down to as fast as the unit can run under the current channel configuration The normal scan interval can be programmed in increments of 0 1 seconds NetScan has two distinct scan intervals e normal scan interval The normal scan interval is used when NetScan is collecting scans before the start event has occurred or after stop event has occurred These two regions are called the pre trigger scan and the post stop scan respectively e acquisition scan interval The acquisition scan interval is used when the NetScan is acquiring scans after the start event has occurred but before the stop event has occurred This region is referred to as the post trigger scan NetScan User s Manual C 9 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C The I command is used to set these two scan intervals For example the following command
238. igit h hours L low order byte h hours m minutes h hours m minutes s seconds m minutes s seconds mil see Note 1 s seconds mil see Note 1 MM months t tenths MM months DD days M months DD days YY years D days YY years DDDDDDDD Days Y years DDDDDDDD Days Note 1 mil is milliseconds for ASCII but microseconds for binary 2 hexidecimal output format Data output formats differ slightly from data input formats in that binary formats may be used for Channel Data Channel Data is the only output data which may use the binary format if it is specified Channel Data is defined as data originating from the High Low Last HLL Registers or the Acquisition Buffer The commands that initiate Channel Data output are the R R U4 U5 and U13 commands However Channel Data may also be output as Engineering Units and Counts Data output formats for command queries will follow the same rules as data input formatting As in the case of data input formats all readings output will be in Engineering Units unless Counts is specified However there are only 3 command queries which need to follow the F command format in this fashion They are C L and U8 command queries Note It also should be noted that readings are only converted to the specified engineering units if the associated channel type is a channel that supports those engineering units For example if the specified channel is a volts channel and
239. iled information Ethernet or Two position switch used to the select ethernet or serial RS 232 422 mode of operation RS 232 422 Selector Power Aspects Changing the Voltage Setting Based on your order your NetScan system was set at the voltage indicated by a sticker or tag located on the rear of the unit near the power switch If you need to change the voltage selection complete the following steps WARNING Never disassemble NetScan s case while it is connected to the AC power line Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog lines 3 disconnect AC power line then disconnect any other cables WARNING Never disconnect the AC power line from NetScan while analog connections to an external device exist Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog lines 3 disconnect AC power line then disconnect any other cables CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Ensure the NetScan is not connected to any power source 2 Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and on side of unit and slide top cover
240. ill follow each trigger block that is output when a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data When a query request is made for Acquisition Buffer data this terminator will be used to terminate each trigger block as it is output to the interface This terminator will be in effect during Read Buffer Data R commands It should be noted that the last scan in the trigger block to be output will be terminated by the defined trigger block terminator rather than the scan terminator Each of the above four arguments may be defined with one of the following terminator types where USER is the user defined terminator corresponding to the numeric ASCII value val as defined by the Set User Terminator V command Terminator Type Terminator Description po None pa CR pe ER Oo 8 U OE po SER sep This argument specifies whether or not a separator character should be placed between each returned reading in the buffer scan data This field will be in effect during Read Buffer Data R commands The value of this field is interpreted as follows 0 Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read A 38 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference The following table summarizes terminator usage with all possible commands in ASCII mode no terminators are
241. imilar to the following B to clear the buffer CI TIX to addresses the channel this example is for slot 1 channel 1 T1 1 0 0X X to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes X starts acquisition U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Note that x can be used to start or stop the acquisition NetScan User s Manual Cold Junction Calibration Required Equipment Equipment for CJC Calibration Cold ice cell for calibration with thermocouples at 0 C T C wire and subminiature plug connectors T Type T C wire is recommended U Type copper shorting plugs Thermocouples Equipment for Verification of Calibrated Temperature Option a Cold Cell Method Cold ice cell Volts DC Calibrator Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter 2 22 Twisted pairs Voltage to temperature reference tables Thermocouples T C wire and subminiature plug connectors T Type T C wire is recommended Option b Hot Cell Method Hot Cell Thermocouple T C wire and subminiature plug connector T Type T C wire is recommended Option c T C Calibrator Simulator Method Using a T C Calibrator Simulator is not recommended due to possible transient effects which can cause erroneous readings T C Calibrator Thermocouple T C wire and subminiature plug connector T Type T C wire is recommended see required specifications on page 6 2 Note See figures Cold Junction Calibration Equipment S
242. ing and Mask Registers 2220 02 02 2 2220 2022 D 11 Theory of Operation D 12 Calibration Status Register D 14 Error Source Register D 14 Event Status Register D 14 Event Status Enable Register D 14 Status Byte Register D 15 Using Status Reporting Registers 2 222 200 2222 MMMM D 16 Trigger Latency 222222 nnn nnn nnn n nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn enn nnnn nn nn nee eeeee D 17 Trigger Overrun 22220 22222 nnn nnn n nn nen n nnn nnn nen nen nnn nnn nnn nnn e nnn n ene e eee n nnn e ees D 17 Buffer Overrun 0 0 0022002200 20022002200020022002200220022 D 17 Buffer Overrun With One Trigger Block
243. ing Units Data Format D 6 If the engineering units data format is selected the NetScan will supply data in format appropriate for the configured channel type The selected unit affects the number of decimal places used by either the ASCII or binary formats This section describes engineering units in relation to thermocouples volts time date stamps and scan intervals Thermocouples The NetScan uses a default system unit of degrees Centigrade Therefore the resolution of returned data independent of configured temperature units is 0 1 C The binary format also returns data in degrees Centigrade The default binary format returns two bytes of 2 s complement binary data with user selecting low high byte or high low byte If the ASCII data format is selected the controller can select temperature units This requires the conversion of degrees Centigrade to configured temperature unit Conversion to degrees Fahrenheit degrees Rankine and degrees Kelvin are via the following formulas Centigrade 3276 7 lt C lt 3276 7 Fahrenheit F 9 5 C 32 Rankine R 9 5 C 491 69 Note R F 459 69 Kelvin K C 273 16 For channels configured as thermocouples all ASCII readings will be returned in the format which corresponds with the engineering unit selected The formats are as follows where X is an ASCII digit Centigrade XXXX XX Fahrenheit XXXX XX Rankine XXXX XX Kelvin XXXX XX NetScan User s Manu
244. instance if the Set Scan Interval I command is issued during an acquisition tstart 0 After execution of the Error Status Query most error conditions are cleared Error conditions may also be cleared by issuing a Clear Event Status U0 command to the unit The ERROR light will remain on until an E or U0 command is executed to clear the error condition NetScan User s Manual G 1 NetScan Error Messages Notes G 2 Appendix G NetScan User s Manual Appendix H Abbreviations aller symbol and eg 8C CA Fr Form Feed ASCII Control Code SSS eS File Separator ASCII Control Cod B5 Backspace ASCII Control Code mse Most Significant Bit SSS Nak Negative Acknowledgement ASCII Control Code DoE Dynamic Data Exchange Rs Record Separator ASCII Control Code Rs Revised Standard eg RS 232 RS 422 RS 422485 DMA Direct Memory Acces Dim Digital Multimeter SO Shif Om ASCII Control Cod Der Data Set Ready ine son Star of Header ASCII Control Cod Em End of Medium ASCII Control Cod Eng inquiry ASCH Control Code NetScan Users Manual a a Abbreviations Appendix H Notes H20 0 NetSean User s Manual Index A Abbreviations Appendix H Alarms 4 24 4 33 4 38 C 26 D 16 API Commands see Appendix A ASCII Code Summary see Appendix F Auto Re arm 4 39 4 40 C Calibration Calibration Mode Indicator 6 5 Command Active Indicato
245. ion armed and may be acquiring pre trigger data 10 Acquiring post trigger data 11 Acquiring post stop data Timestamping 00 Timestamping disabled 01 Absolute timestamping enabled 10 Relative timestamping enabled Alarm Stamping 0 Alarm stamping disabled 1 Alarm stamping enabled Power up Setting 0 Power up as last configured 1 Power up using default configuration Acquisition Block Available 0 No acquisition block available 1 Acquisition block available U18 Bit Mapping EXAMPLES Refer to the EXAMPLES section for each of the following commands AN Change Calibration Keyword Configure Channels Select Card Set Data Format Enter Calibration Mode Set Query Terminator Execute Set Counts K MONAHAN NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference V Set User Terminator TYPE EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Vval Set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value val is in the range 0 to 255 Query the present user terminator value DESCRIPTION The Set User Terminator V command is used to set the User Terminator value to any character whose numeric value ASCII value is in the range 0 to 255 The User Terminator may be used by the Set Query Terminator Q command to specify a user defined terminator for any of the defined terminator types or as a reading separator for the Read Buffered Data R command EXAMPLE PRINT 1 Q1 0 1 1
246. is not the same as 123 Multiple Parameters If more than one parameter is used for a command they must be separated by a comma or white space For example Q4 1 1 0 00rQ 4 1 1 0 0 is appropriate Command Strings Commands may be sent individually or in a string with other commands For example the following four lines of a program PRINT 1 C1 1X PRINT 1 A1 1X PRINT 1 C2 2X PRINT 1 A2 2X have the same effect as the single line PRINT 1 C1 1 Al 1 C2 2 A2 2 X Execute Command Deferred commands are interpreted and processed as they are received They require the Execute X command to be issued in order to be executed If multiple system commands are used in the same string each use of the command must be followed by the Execute xX command However immediate commands do not require an Execute command to be processed For more detail on deferred and immediate command types refer to the next section on Command Interpretation in this chapter For example to clear the SRQ mask and then set it for SRQ on trigger PRINT 1 M000 X M002 Xx To configure channels 1 through 32 for temperature and 33 through 64 for volts using one command string PRINT 1 C1 32 1C33 64 11x A 2 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Fixed Formats Any Query command or Status U command returns a fixed format For instance any option that can range up to 65 535 always returns five digits so zero would
247. is reason sampling weights less than 32 can yield incorrect results To use the Normal scan mode for high speed multiple channel applications when noise filtering is not needed use the M and W commands or use ChartView see Chapter 4 Example M 0 Select normal mode WHI Select 1 sample over which to average Note The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following 2 4 or 8 Reading inaccuracies can result if common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar This is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between channels Settling time is defined as the time measured to a point at which a transient voltage value is within a specified percentage of the final voltage value Settling time is usually measured in nanoseconds To eliminate these inaccuracies the settling time can be increase with use of the D command as described in Appendix A API Command Reference C 4 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers High Speed Single Channel Mode The High speed single channel mode also known as burst mode is used for post acquisition waveform analysis of AC and DC voltages In this mode NetScan can sample from 38 5 Hz to 20 0 kHz and store the data in memory Note that NetScan s memory can be expanded up to 8 Mbytes When performing post acquisition waveform analysis such as Fast Fourier transforms
248. it 02 of the Status Byte will be set and the TRIGGER light on the front panel will turn on Setting the start parameter to 0 will disable the acquiring of scan this may be performed at any time during or after an acquisition The start parameter will automatically be set to 0 upon the termination of an acquisition unless the re arm flag is set to 1 Note If the trigger start event is level or alarm at least one pre trigger scan must be programmed to initiate scanning in order for the event to be recognized stop defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to stop acquiring scans This event is referred to as the Stop Trigger When the unit has recognized that a Stop Trigger has been encountered it will stop acquiring scans at that point unless post stop count is defined see Y command The last scan collected the Stop Trigger scan will be time date stamped for later reference Also when the Stop Trigger is recognized the Trigger Bit 02 of the Status Byte will be cleared and the TRIGGER light on the front panel will turn off Setting the stop parameter to 0 will have the same effect as setting the stop parameter to 1 Stop on Count with Post Stop Count Y command set to 0 In both cases the Start Trigger scan will be collected and the acquisition immediately terminated re arm determines if after the initial acquisition the acquisition should be re enabled automatically If this parameter is set then after the Stop
249. ith alternate choice of RS 232 422 interface 256 Kbytes of memory expandable up to 8 Mbytes If your application must gather large amounts of data options are available for expanding the standard 256 kB of memory to 1 MB 4 MB or 8 MB Capable of channel expansion up to 128 channels with the use of a CSN Exp expansion chassis Operational Aspects Data Handling and Triggering Note Also see Software amp Hardware table and NetScan Specifications Data Handling Built in memory 256 Kbyte 10Base T ethernet interface 3 ethernet RS 232 serial interface 3 serial non ethernet RS 422 serial interface 3 serial non ethernet Time amp date stamping 3 Digital inputs 8 Programmable alarm outputs 32 Digital trigger input 3 Analog trigger input 3 Trigger on time of day 3 Pre trigger scan rate Programmable Post trigger scan rate Programmable 3 2 General Information and Specifications NetScan User s Manual Software and Hardware ChartViewNET PostView ScanCal ClMScan optional ScanServer optional 16 Channel Signal Conditioning Cards Optional Low voltage with removable CSN14 LV T terminal block input module Low voltage with BNC input CSN14 LV B module Low voltage with safety jack CSN14 LV S input module Isolated TC voltage with CSN14 TC P plug type input module Isolated high voltage with CSN14 HV S safety jack input module Cables CA 47 Computer to NetScan Cable PC AT XT serial
250. ither of the following methods NetScan User s Manual double clicking the cell with the mouse highlighting the cell and typing in the new value or label selecting from a list using copy Ctrl C and paste Ctrl V functions ChartView Software Reference 4 33 Setup Channel Types Alarms and Acquisition Parameters Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup l Data Destination En or Enable Spreadsheet Reading L0H SIOFF LOS Make All Channels Inactive Wake All Channels Active CHOOSE TYPE gt Channel Configuration 0062 40 yd 3276 60 0000 00 3276 60 0053 50 32r 6 60 0054 70 3276 60 32r 6 60 3276 60 32r 6 60 32r 6 60 3276 60 32r 5 60 3276 60 32r 6 60 32r 6 60 3276 60 32r 6 60 3276 60 Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Message and Pull Down List Aspects Column Message CH N A On ENABLE or DISABLE Reading N A Type CHOOSE TYPE gt Label ENTER LABEL MAX 8 LETTER Units CHOOSE UNITS gt ENTER DESIRED LOW LIMIT ENTER DESIRED HIGH LIMIT Hyst ENTER DESIRED HYSTERESIS O Alarm SELECT AN ALARM A 3 indicates the associated item has a pull down list from which a selection can be made List High O ss Alarm Configuration 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 3276 60 The preceding table indicates message and pull down menu aspects of the Channel and
251. ix C 7 End Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current trigger block that the end scan occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point Since the end scan must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the end scan has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 This field will always be the same as the Stop Scan Pointer unless a post stop count is specified y command in which case the End Scan Pointer will be greater than the Stop Event Pointer by the value of the post stop count 8 Block Status This field represents the status of the current trigger block If the current trigger block is still being acquired the value of this field will be 00 If the current trigger block has been completely acquired and has terminated normally the value will be 01 If however the current trigger block has pre maturely terminated because of user intervention the value will be 02 Trigger blocks are not assigned a trigger block number per se Trigger block numbers are relative to the read and write blocks respectively The current trigger block always refers to the trigger block that is currently being read For example the current read trigger block is always trigger block 1 Conversely the current write trigger block is always the value of Blocks Available in the Buffer Status String With this in mind look at the following exampl
252. k Hold button item C in the following figure Control View SLE Meters Toolbar Buttons Item Name Function A Start Starts meters B Stop Stops meters C Reset Peak Hold Resets the floating markers Upon reset the markers will instantly Indicator adjust to indicate the highest and lowest values reached since the time of the reset This feature does not apply to the Digital Meters D Stay On Top Locks or unlocks the meter window on top of other windows Push pin Print Sends the meter s display image to connected printer Rows x Columns Opens a small menu with row x column arrangement options Example When the number of meters is 6 the grid options will be 6x1 3x2 2x3 and 2x4 with the first number being the number of rows If you then select 3x2 you will have 3 rows of meters with 2 meters per row G Number of Meters Specifies the number of meters to appear on the screen A maximum number of 32 meters can be selected Meter Pull Down Menus The meters windows each have a Control and View pull down menu as indicated by the following figure The functions of these menus can also be implemented by using the toolbar buttons Stark w sa 1 Stop 2x2 z 3x 3 Reset Peak Hold het stay Un Top 4 Print O 16 J2 Custom NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 31 Meters Configuration Menu A meters configuration menu lower left corner of figure will appear when you place the mouse
253. k the channel s configuration and to re configure the channel if desired The Display Configuration Setup Window will appear similar to that in the following figure This screen contains two radio buttons for selecting the method of adjusting the display mode and channel setup It is the same screen that was discussed in the sub section Editing an Existing Display Configuration From this screen you need to choose Units Full Scale or Units Div Chart Display Configuration Setup EHA Display Data Type Et Group 1 Category Voltage ELEY Chart 1 Units y Channel Settings i Units Full Scale Display Mode ome Clin Aoao Trace Color Be Y Max nmm Y Center omy YMinf an Units Division Wee Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 Units Full Scale When Units Full Scale is selected as depicted in the above figure you can alter Y Max and Y Min These are the upper and lower limits of the Channel as they will appear on the chart when the channel is selected When you change either parameter Y Center and Units Division are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units Division while Units Full Scale is selected You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its
254. l device exist Common mode voltage potentials exceeding 60 VDC or 30 Vrms may exist which could cause bodily injury or death Prior to disassembly 1 turn off power 2 disconnect analog terminals 3 disconnect AC power line then disconnect any other cables CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge 1 Turn off the power disconnect the analog cables the power line cord and then all other test cables from the interface 2 Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and slide top cover plate free of NetScan unit Remove the expansion chassis if applicable Memory Module JP201 Reserved for Second Memory Module f T E O00 Microprocessor Board Not all components shown 3 Locate memory SIMM sockets JP201 and JP202 on the microprocessor board This board is mounted vertically near the center of the NetScan unit Remove the 256 KB module from JP201 Install the applicable memory option according to the following table Memory Option JP201 JP202 CSN MEM1 1 MB Insert a 1 MB module CSN MEM4 4 MB Insert a4 MB module CSN MEM8 8 MB Insert a4 MB module Insert a 4 MB module
255. l Group 1 Channel Type Show All Types Available Channels Selected Channels CH1 Add gt CH3 CHS lt Remove Note IF you add more than one channel to a Chart Channels that appear lower in the Selected Channels list will have a higher precidence that those at the top of thelist Assigning Channels to Chart I of Group 1 NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 13 9 Choose channels for the selected chart With ChartView Plus you can select up to four overlapping channels per chart With the basic ChartView program you are limited to one channel per chart There are four methods of adding channels These are as follows e Highlight an available channel using the cursor and left hand mouse button then click the Add button Repeat for each channel to be added e Double click on the channel in the available channels list to add in the selected channels list to remove e Hold down the keyboard s Shift Key and use the left hand mouse button to select a block of consecutive available channels up to 4 then click the Add button Example CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 e Hold down the keyboard s Ctrl button and use the left hand mouse button to select up to 4 available channels these can be non consecutive then click the Add button Example CH1 CH3 CH5 CH7 as in the previous figure Note You can also remove channels in a similar manner by highlighting a channel s in the S
256. l be enabled and will appear in ChartView s Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart for ChartView Plus applications and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time It is important to understand that other channels those not in the display setup maintain their existing configuration status They are not affected by the edit of the configuration display You can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 11 4 12 Manually Creating a Display For ChartView Plus users if you plan to have a chart setup that is not weighted evenly 1 e different numbers of channels per chart and different numbers of charts per group you may want to manually setup your chart display from scratch 1 e without beginning from a pre existing display configuration This method is arrived at from the Chart Setup Wizard window by selecting Manual Chart Creation When this button is clicked the program exits the Chart Setup Wizard and enters the manual method of Display Configuration Setup Although this method is referred to as manual it still contains some automatic elements such as Automa
257. l be in error If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read operation any further reading must be considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued This can be done by either resetting the buffer with a B command and or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it 1s clear Buffer Overrun With Multiple Trigger Blocks When more than one trigger block is in the buffer a buffer overrun will erase the oldest trigger block If the block being erased is currently being read the block read will be terminated and the read pointer will be advanced to the start of the next block If an overrun condition is detected by the controller during a read operation any further reading must be considered corrupt until a buffer reset is issued This can be done by either resetting the buffer with a B command and or reading the remaining data out of the buffer until it is clear Real Time Clock NetScan contains a programmable battery backed real time clock which has a resolution of ImS The clock is set at the factory in Eastern Standard time U S The time and date are used to tag the trigger point in each trigger block and HLL register This data is incorporated into the Acquisition Buffer Open Thermocouple Range Error Checking The NetScan has built in facilities for detecting open thermocouple and range errors one in hardware and two in software e In hardware the thermocouple cards contain circuitry to detect open
258. larm Log File Folder E PROJECT SCHAAR TIWN Fil ALARMS LOG Alarm Log Options Il Time l Alam ID M Alam States nannsonnnnnann nun Se T b Show Single Alarm Delimiter Character Slam Channels M Date From the Alarm configuration dialog box you can define the information that will be saved in the log file Options include the Time and Date when the state change occurred the Alarm number the Channel s that tripped the alarm along with the current reading and the state of the alarm itself or all alarms either 1 or O Additionally you can define the character that is used to separate the information in the file This is useful if you want to read the file into a program that presents the information in a tabular format such as Microsoft Excel By using combinations of option settings you can define how the alarm log file is filled If you choose not to save Alarm ID s Alarm numbers in combination with saving All Alarm States your Alarm file will be saved with one line of text each time an Alarm state change is detected during polling The line will contain the optional Time and Date and 32 digits one for each alarm set to either O or 1 The left most digit being Alarm one the rightmost Alarm 32 You can not choose to save channel information if you have selected not to save Alarm ID s The following example shows what the Alarm log entries look like if this configuration is selected 1 21 10 PM 10 29 98 000
259. lay channels now enabled The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the following e number of chart groups available for viewing e number of charts shown for each selected group e the number of overlapping channels in each chart not to exceed 4 You can choose to manually create a configuration or have one created automatically The automatic setup method offers three choices Simple Moderate and Advanced Moderate and advanced are only available with ChartView Plus Note You can use Chart Setup Wizard to quickly set up a large number of charts You can then fine tune the layout manually via the Manual Chart Creation feature NetScan User s Manual i i ssts lt lt i lt lt z O st ChatView Software Reference 4 41 A Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a manual mode This option makes use of ChartView s Display Configuration feature reference page 4 9 Manual chart creation allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart as well as vary the number of charts per group Chart Setup Wizard sar Setup Wizarea Automatic Chart Creation Group Selector Create Charts Simple Moderate Advanced A Charts Eo Create Charts with one channel l assigned per chart CHI z Starting with channel Channels The number of Instrument Da
260. le 7 6 P PostView Chart Setup Wizard 5 7 Data File Accessibility 5 1 Display Configuration 5 9 Menu Items 5 6 Starting 5 3 Timebase 5 15 Program Examples see Appendix E Programming Information see Appendices Quick Start for ChartViewNET 2 3 R Rear Panel NetScan 1 2 7 2 Registers see Appendix D Registration of ChartViewNET 1 5 4 24 ChartViewPlus 1 6 4 16 RS 232 422 Interface 7 6 thru 7 9 S Serial Interface 7 6 thru 7 9 Signal Conditioning Cards Calibration of see Calibration Installation of 1 3 CSN14 HV S 7 15 CSN14 LV T B amp S 7 14 CSN14 TC P 7 12 Software Installation of 1 5 also see ChartView see PostView Specifications NetScan Main Unit 3 3 CSN14 HV S 7 15 CSN14 LV T B amp S 7 14 CSN14 TC P 7 12 CSN Relay Card 7 17 Expansion Chassis 7 20 a TTL BNC Connectors 7 11 Voltage Setting 7 3 Index 1 NetScan User s Manual WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OMEGA ENGINEERING INC warrants this unit to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of 13 months from date of purchase OMEGA Warranty adds an additional one 1 month grace period to the normal one 1 year product warranty to cover handling and shipping time This ensures that OMEGA s customers receive maximum coverage on each product If the unit should malfunction it must be returned to the factory for evaluation OMEGA s Customer service Department will issue an Authorized Ret
261. lectronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note Grounding circuit white is only partially shown Actual grounding circuit is on reverse side of the board Use shorting bar or shorted banana plugs to short V and V to ground Ground Line see note L j a 0G DO no O Binding Post S V GND V S 1 of 7 Shorting Bar IN IN IN V _ GND V 3 Banana Plugs on 3 4 Centers on 1 8 x 1 2 x 2 Copper Bar 3 Shorted Banana Plugs Calibration Card and Two Shorting Options 6 6 Calibration NetScan User s Manual L pe 3 Ensure the main unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it If a signal conditioning card is in slot 1 of the chassis remove the card Install Calibration Card into Slot 1 bottom slot of the main unit CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour 10 NetScan User s Manual With all covers in place allow the main unit and calibration equipment to warm up powered on for at least 1 hour Place the Calibration E
262. ll N128 Power On This condition is set whenever unit is first powered up or a R is issued EXAMPLE PRINT 1 NO X Clear the Event Status Enable ESE Register PRINT 1 N X Read the Event Status Enable ESE Register LINE INPUT 1 N PRINT N Computer screen shows N000 PRINT 1 N1N2X Set enable ESB setting on pre trigger count satisfied or acquisition complete PRINT 1 N X Read the Event Status Enable ESE Register LINE INPUT 1 NS PRINT N Computer screen shows NO 03 A 34 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference O Set Digital Outputs SYNTAX Set any of the 32 digital outputs separated into four 8 bit banks to a specified setting where bankn forn 1 2 3 4 is an argument in the form of the number nnn such that 000 lt nnn lt 255 when converted to binary format represents the desired settings for the 8 bit bank Query current state of digital output DESCRIPTION The Set Digital Outputs O command may be used to force any of the 32 digital outputs separated into four 8 bit banks on the unit to a certain setting The Bank to Digital Output mapping is as follows Ban Digital Output 01 08 09 16 17 24 25 32 Each argument bankn represents the desired bit mapping for the corresponding bank of digital outputs The argument is a decimal number which when converted to binary format is the desired settings for that bank of digital ou
263. lled in slot 1 bottom slot of the NetScan main unit The CSN Relay card is discussed at the end of this chapter Logic Levels Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL loads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inputs are protected against damage from high static voltage Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to the range of 0 0 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground pins see following table DB50 Pinout CAUTION Do not exceed the 0 0 to 5 3 volt levels described above Exceeding these levels may damaged the unit in a way not covered by the warranty Digital I O Port Pinout The following figure and table identify pin locations for outputs inputs and grounds associated with the DB50 connector Outputs 1 through 32 are typically used for alarms 1 through 32 respectively As mentioned above outputs through 16 can be used with a relay card option 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 33 et mee pe PEH o 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 O aisle 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 3 Inputs Grounds Outputs DBS50 Pin Descriptions Output Pin a mere Se 3 B Ca a 5 35 Oe 8 3 9 20 a Output Pin Input Pin No Signal No Signa 12 13 14 28 29 30 31 45 46 47 NetScan User s Manual External TTL BNC Connectors NetScan s rear panel provides two external trigger BNC connectors The
264. lowing parameters start is the start event stop is the stop event re arm determines if the unit should continue acquiring after the first acquisition completes where 1 is on and 0 is off sync determines if acquisition events should be synchronized with the internal timebases where 1 is on and 0 is off Query the present trigger configuration DESCRIPTION The Set Trigger Configuration T command is the central command which controls how an acquisition is to be configured Upon execution of this command the unit enters the acquiring mode This will be indicated on the front panel by the flashing of the TRIGGER light If a pre trigger has been configured via the Y command then the sampling for pre trigger data will begin at this time Since the Set Trigger Configuration command controls the configuration of an acquisition all other acquisition dependent commands should be sent before the Set Trigger Configuration command is sent to the unit The commands which should be sent to the unit prior to the Set Trigger Configuration command will depend on the desired start and or stop triggers For instance if configuring for Trigger on Command it would not be necessary to send the Set Trigger Level L command The following table lists the valid trigger types and their associated required prior issue commands Trigger Post Stop Commands Type NA NA N A N A Trigger on Command See command Trigger on Channel Above Level L co
265. lt Source on calibration card and 03 Select 0 Volts GND DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation The Adjust Calibration Card Pots P command is used to enable the 4 4 Volt or 4 4 Volt source on the special calibration card to allow for their adjustment Refer to Chapter 6 for specific details A second diagnostic use for this command is to program the channel sequencer to SIT on a specified channel without changing address lines accessing temperature sensors or making breaking relay contacts EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345X Enter calibration mode PRINT 1 P02X Enable 4 4 Volt Source Adjust 4 4 Volt Source PRINT 1 P01X Enable 4 4 Volt Source Adjust 4 4 Volt Source PRINT 1 EX End calibration mode NetScan User s Manual A 13 API Command Reference Appendix A R Power On Reset TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX R Power On Reset Equivalent to a hardware reset DESCRIPTION S O DESCRIPTION The Power On Reset R command has the same effect on the unit as removing and re applying power All data in data buffers and configuration are erased Note Because the R command performs a full power on reset 3 or 4 seconds are required before you can communicate with the unit A total of at least 5 seconds is required before normal operations can take place Note Issuing the Power Up Def
266. m the NetScan unit and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used Installation Category e CE Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal All other terminals are Category 1 Number of Slots Four 4 Channel to Channel Isolation 200 V peak with CSN14 HV S 500 V peak Channel to System Isolation 500 V peak Dimensions e 330 mm wide x 241 mm deep x 152 mm high 13 x 9 5 x 6 Weight e 1 8 kg 4 lbs empty Operating Environment e Standard Indoor use 0 to 50 C e CE Indoor use at altitudes below 0 to 95 RH non condensing to 2000 m 5 to 40 C 0 to 80 RH 35 C linearly derate 3 RH C up to 31 C decreasing linearly to from 35 to 50 C 50 RH at 40 C Power Receives power from main NetScan unit 7 20 NetScan User s Manual Appendices Appendix A API Commands Appendix B Ethernet API Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Appendix E NetScan Program Examples Appendix F ASCII Code Summary Appendix G NetScan Error Messages Appendix H Abbreviations Synopsis of Appendices These Appendices with exception of G and H provide programming related information that is not necessary for users of ChartView and ChartView Plus The appendices cover the following information Appendix A API Commands describes the en
267. mage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a NetScan system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of NetScan s main unit can cause equipment damage The CSN Relay card if used must be installed in the bottom slot of the main unit Aside from this requirement cards may be installed in any slot Ensure NetScan is powered down and not connected to any power source With channel labels oriented upright carefully slide the card into the unit and along the card support grooves Gently force the card to engage its edge connector with NetScan s internal mating connector 3 Tighten the external screws snug at each end of the card N me TC Volts Scanning Card with Mini Plugs EE A EE A E EE E ee a ee ee E ee ee ee APR Ree ee eee ea aieicl Low Volts Scanning Card with Removable Screw Terminals 2 i i QO O O O OOQOQOQOOQOOOOO 3 Low or High Volts Scanning Card O O O O OO DO QOOOOO with Safety Jacks NetScan Front Panel One of Many Possible Set ups Connect Expansion Chassis option If you ordered a expansion chassis CSN Exp please refer to Chapter 7 for installation instructions NetScan User s Manual Configuring and Starting NetScan 1 3 Setup for Ethernet Operation Complete Hardware Setup for Ethernet Operation
268. mal 16 32 64 128 or Recommended for AC noise rejection 256 1 2 4 or8 Recommended for high speed multiple channel applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue High speed not selectable High speed single channel applications for AC and DC voltage post acquisition single channel waveform analysis In the Normal mode NetScan samples channel data at 1 92 kHz or once every 520 83 us You can select the average weight number of samples to average to provide noise filtering as discussed later in this section In the High speed single channel mode NetScan collects data in user defined multiples of 256 samples at a sampling frequency within the range of 38 5 Hz to 20 0 kHz Aside from selecting NetScan s scanning mode and setting the mode parameters from ChartView software see Chapter 4 ChartView Software Reference the following commands can be used Note that Appendix A contains more detailed information regarding these commands Mode Related Parameter Commands Command Syntax Function S M mode Set Measuring Mode Options for mode are 0 Normal mode and 1 High speed single channel mode WHwt Set Averaging Weight Specify the number of samples to average in Normal mode where wt is the averaging weight Options for wt are 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 256 with 32 being the default F freq Set frequency for High speed single channel mode freq must be a value for H
269. mand Conflict Error indicates the issuance of a command that is in conflict with other commands that have been issued or the current configuration This error usually occurs when a command is issued that cannot be performed because of the current state of the unit For instance if the Set Scan Interval I command is issued during an acquisition tstart 0 After execution of the Error Status Query most error conditions are cleared Error conditions may also be cleared by issuing a Clear Event Status U0 command to the unit The ERROR light will remain on until an E or UO command is executed to clear the error condition EXAMPLES PRINT 1 E X Request error status INPUT 1 A PRINT AS Display shows E000 no errors occurred PRINT 1 K3 X Send illegal command option to the unit Note ERROR indicator light turns on PRINT 1 E X Request error status Note ERROR indicator light turns off INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS Displays E002 Invalid Device Dependent Command Option A 22 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference F Set Data Format TYPE System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Fengr Configure the input and output formats format engr converts the raw data to the engineering units with which you prefer to work Valid options are 0 C 1 F 2 R 3 K and 4 Volts C is the default engineering unit format places the readings in a format with which you prefer to work Valid
270. menu 1 Group Select 7 Display Configuration 2 Start Charts amp Indicators 8 Channel Configuration 3 Pause Charts 9 PostView 4 Stop Charts 10 Arm Acquisition 5 Scroll Faster 11 Disarm 6 Scroll Slower 12 Print Charts ChartView Toolbar Reference 8 Start Charts Q 24 Push the Start Charts and Indicators button Toolbar item 2 Charts will begin scrolling More detailed information pertaining to the charts and the ChartView Main Window appear in Chapter 4 s ChartView Main Window section In addition to viewing the data as charts you can select the Windows pull down menu to select one or all of the following e ChartView Analog Meters e ChartView Digital Meters e ChartView Bar Graph Meters Q 25 Select the Windows pull down menu and try each meter option Push the triangular play button of each meter s specific toolbar to activate that meter Meters and charts can be on your computer screen at the same time They can be re sized and repositioned as desired Analog Digital and Bar Graph meters are detailed in Chapter 4 Note that a PostView Post Acquisition viewing program is also selectable from the Windows menu PostView is discussed in Chapter 5 A Note In Closing 2 12 This completes the tutorial You may continue running ChartView in the simulated instrument mode and try various options to get a better feel for the program Remember while in the simulated instrument mode there are no NetSca
271. mmand Trigger on Channel Below Level L command Trigger on TTL Signal Rising Trigger on TTL Signal Falling Trigger on Count Y command Trigger on Alarm Turning On C command I Y C A A is optional I C A A is optional Trigger on Alarm Turning Off C command I Y C A A is optional I C A Ais optional Trigger on Absolute Time P command Lie re m Note If the start and stop triggers are of different tyoes a combination of the start and stop prior issue commands is required The Set Trigger Configuration T command is used to configure the manner in which scans are to be acquired It sets the sources to determine when an acquisition is to be initiated and when it is to be terminated It also determines how these acquisition sources are to be if at all synchronized with the internal scan intervals I command Likewise it may allow the acquisition to re enable itself with the same configuration after the initial acquisition has been terminated NetScan User s Manual A 43 API Command Reference Appendix A A 44 start defines the event that is to take place in order for the unit to begin acquiring scans This event is referred to as the Start Trigger When the unit has recognized that a Start Trigger has been encountered it will begin acquiring scans at that point The first of these scans the Start Trigger scan will be time date stamped for later reference Also when the Start Trigger is recognized the Triggered B
272. mpty in the NetScan or the expansion chassis the channel assignments are as shown in the table with slot 1 being at the bottom of the unit and slot 4 being at the top Device Channel Assignments Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 17 32 33 48 48 64 65 80 81 96 97 112 113 128 The relay card if used must go in slot 1 of the main NetScan unit When the relay card is used there are only 112 channels available The channel assignments are automatically bumped as shown in the following table Device Channel Assignments when relay option is used Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 NetSean 16 1732 3348 CAUTION Only one CSN Relay card can be used in a NetScan system Attempts to install the CSN Relay card in a slot other than slot 1 of NetScan s main unit could possibly cause equipment damage Hardware 7 19 Expansion Chassis Specifications WARNING Service must be performed by qualified personnel All terminals including the AC line and analog inputs must be disconnected prior to opening NetScan main unit or expansion chassis casing Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death CAUTION The Expansion Chassis contains no fuses However fuse failure in NetScan s main chassis indicates a possible problem with device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected fro
273. ms 13 and 19 and possibly an automatic change of the units div item 18 Aside from using the center spinner controls to change center you can change the center value by placing the mouse cursor in or tabbing over to the field and then either typing in the desired value or using the PC keyboard up and down arrow control keys 4 6 ChartViewSoftwareReference ssi NetScan User s Manual Units div The units in units div 18 can be C F K R mV or V The division referenced is one vertical grid In the example above for Channel 1 each vertical grid increment represents 10 58 C per division Changing the units division spinner controls o t will result in an automatic adjustment of the max scale and min scale values items 13 and 19 Aside from using the units div triangular controls to change the value you can change units div by placing the mouse cursor in or tabbing over to the field and then either typing in the desired value or using the PC keyboard arrow control keys Status Indicator Region S ee ee 34 50 Loo 02 30 Loo 02 35 Loo o2 40 Loo 02 45 1 secs div Chatting G2 D Initializing Charting Disk GI Buffering in Instrument G Uploading od The status indicator region of the Main Window located along the bottom of the window consists of the following items 21 Scrolling Time 23 Chart Speed Time Div 22 Status Message Box 24 Status LEDs Scrolling Time Scrolling Time
274. n A percentage of completion bar will appear followed by the PostView window The channels in the setup you create will appear in chart form on PostView s window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart for configurations making use of multiple channels per chart and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Note that only one group of charts can be viewed at a time Display Configuration Note When PostView does not find a display configuration file it automatically opens the Chart Setup Wizard You can use this feature to automatically create a display configuration You also have the option of selecting Manual Chart Creation Create Charts to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter the manual editing mode as discussed in this section The Display Configuration button accesses a Display Configuration Setup dialog box This box will also be displayed if a Manual Chart Creation Create Charts is selected from the Wizard Chart Setup window b You select Setup from the File pull down menu c You right click on the chart region in PostView s window Note If multiple chart groups are present in the display configuration the current group will be selected in the display configuration tree When you first click on the Display Configuration button a Display Configuration Setup box appears A display region shows the configured structure of the groups charts and channels From this box you can select the numbe
275. n command NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Status Byte Register Registers Data Formats amp Queries feb om K T Q oo 5 E oO Cc 20 WwW 0 O oo LU a O qa c EQ O c Z O ox Of ww L _ et E O 5 D a J o gt gt O og vE X D 3 Q 96 NI oo U A O nN lt q Event Status Register U0 amp Logical ANDed Event Status Enable Register Nn N 2 Fa amp T gt Alarm Zc 5 14 O U oc 7 6 jesejmav 3 2 1 o Status Byte Register AND OR Logical Relationship of Event Status Enable Register to Event Status and Status Byte Registers The acquisition device sets the Message Available bit MAV in the Status Byte Register to determine if data can be read by the controller The status byte register contains the following active bits Bit Location DIO1 LSBit DIO2 DIO3 DIO4 DIOS DIO6 DIO7 DIO8 MSBit Value 16 32 64 128 Description Alarm Trigger Detected Ready Scan Available Message Available Event Status Register Bit ESB Service Request Bit Buffer Overrun All bits in the Status Byte Register are cleared by either a R command which returns the NetScan to its power up default conditions or a read of the serial poll status byte register via the Status command U1 The ESB in the Status Byte Register is also cleared by these operations The Command Error Execution Error an
276. n hardware concerns ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual General Information and Specifications 3 CAUTION If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual or if specification limits are exceeded the function of the equipment as well as the protection provided by it may be impaired General Description 3 1 Operational Aspects 3 2 Data Handling and Triggering 3 2 Software and Hardware 3 3 NetScan Specifications 3 3 General Description NetScan is an advanced hybrid data recorder that combines the desirable features of paper based stripchart recorders with the latest PC based data acquisition technology including Ethernet Internet based data logging and control The device provides from 16 to 128 isolated channels In addition 32 digital outputs can be set to automatically function as alarm outputs or be controlled individually through a network Eight inputs provide a means of reading digital input status through the network An outstanding feature of NetScan is that the device can communicate remotely through the internet This feature is made possible by the system s use of TCP IP protocol In addition to chart displays NetScan can be used to display meters in digital analog and bar graph formats The unit can measure up to 64 differential input channels and can easily be expanded up to 128 channels with the use of an expansion module NetScan
277. n region also allows you to select one of three options in regard to positioning data in Excel on subsequent scans Options are as follows Row 1 Column 1 This selection starts the next scan at the designated row and column on the Excel spreadsheet Changing the values in the Row and Column boxes above figure will automatically enter the new values in the corresponding fields of the Row Column placement assignment For example If you entered a 3 in the row box and a 5 in the column box you would see Row 3 Column 5 instead of Row 1 Column 1 in the above figure and the next scan would start at row 3 column 5 in Excel Row after last scan When Row after last scan is selected the next scan will begin at the point in Excel where the previous acquisition left off Prompt each time When Prompt each time is selected after each acquisition is completed a dialog box will ask if you want to return to origin If you select Yes you will have an overwrite on the Excel spreadsheet starting with the existing column and row designation If you select No the next scan will begin on the spreadsheet s next row from where the previous acquisition left off Increment the Row on each new scan With this selected the Excel spreadsheet will use multiple rows one row for each new data scan With no check mark the spreadsheet will make use of one row only and will continue to display the latest scan information in
278. nable Disable Pushbutton on main unit rear panel in the enable indent position to enable writing to RAM Note to ChartScan users Early production ChartScan units do not have a Calibration Enable Disable Pushbutton For these units the calibration mode is enabled by positioning the DIP switch right most micro switch 9 to the 1 up position Note that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel as indicated in the NetScan figure page 6 2 If the calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and new password This enables the calibration mode Type U2xX to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode Insert banana plugs of shorting option shorting bar or 3 linked plugs into V V and GND binding posts of calibration card This short circuits the analog backplane HI and LO voltage inputs and GND see previous figure Calibration Card and Two Shorting Options Type HOX The Trigger LED will flash indicating that offset calibration is in progress When flashing stops the chassis offset calibration is complete Type U2X U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode and that no error has occurred Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Wri
279. nal conditioning module is used 16 differential thermocouple inputs are provided In configuring thermocouple T C channels all that is required is to assign each channel to a particular T C type Support for B E J K R S T and N 14 and 28 gauge thermocouple types are standard The 100 mV 1 V 5 V 10 V volts types with and without range error detection are also supported Channel type can be defined using the Configure Channel C command for a single channel or a range of channels Channels not included in the channel scan do not have to be configured The following table highlights channel types for normal use of the CSN14 TC P signal conditioning card 7 8 N t4gage 9 N 28gage The type parameter is what distinguishes the channel as a thermocouple channel The channel configuration cannot be changed while the trigger is armed or an acquisition is taking place In addition to channel type each channel in the scan channel can optionally have a high and low alarm level and hysteresis associated with it NetScan alarms allow the unit to produce an internal event when the value of a channel is outside of desired limits These alarm events can be used as trigger or stop events or as a stimulus for TTL level signals on NetScan back panel The following example demonstrates how to assign a J type thermocouple to channels on a CSN14 TC P signal conditioning module plugged into NetScan 4 EJ 7 B PRINT 1 C 1 16 1
280. nary Data Format Only High Low Last HLL register and acquisition output data may be in binary format Binary formatted data can be output in either highbyte lowbyte or lowbyte highbyte format Time Date Stamp If binary format is selected the High Low Last register values will also include time date stamps When outputting the High Low Last registers for either highbyte lowbyte or lowbyte highbyte the time date stamp will have the following format hms tMDY where each letter is a byte represented by n os m minutes s seconds rt tenths A typical High Low Last will have the following binary format each letter is a byte of data HHhms tMDYLLhmstMDY11 where HH is high LL is low and 11 is last Counts Data Format The Counts data format is a format that is characterized by an ASCII integer number from 32676 to 32676 that represents a compensated or raw value as it would be interpreted from the A D converter This value would be dependent upon the channel type which has been specified for the channel in question Note The Counts format closely follows the channel type that has been specified Example 1 If channel 16 was type 1 Type J TC with cold junction compensation and linearization then the Counts format output value for this channel would also be cold junction compensated and linearized Example 2 If channel 16 was type 31 Raw A D data then the Counts format output value for channel 16 would also b
281. ncmeniensetsaoscnetaneanecens See File page 4 16 and Data Destination page 4 39 Transmit data to Microsoft Excel via DDE Dynamic Data See Data beginning on page 4 20 Exchange Start PostView an independent application that allows you to See Chapter 5 PostView graphically view data channels from a file Use remote RS 232 communications by attaching the See Device page 4 23 acquisition device to a modem configured for Auto Answer NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 3 Main Window While using this chapter refer to the Main Window figure and its associated control option table as needed Because of the graphic aspect of the window you should be able to develop a good understanding of the program s capabilities and associated operating techniques within a very short time The following comments apply to the figure and table on the following page e In regard to the control option table presented on the facing page the symbols i mouse amp arrow keypads B Page Up Page Down keypads and spacebar are control options that allow you to tab to a field and make changes with the specified control e Channel Selection 14 can also be made by tabbing to the Center Control 17 or Units Div Control 18 and using PageUp or PageDown B e The min and max scale values 13 and 19 are automatically generated but can also be set from the Chart Setup Dialog e Yo
282. nd immediately after the Trigger Configuration T command is issued When the Trigger event occurs the Pre Trigger data portion of the Trigger Block will contain the most recent Pre Trigger scans The number of Pre Trigger scans collected will depend upon when the Trigger event occurs If the Trigger event occurs before the number of Pre Trigger scans collected at least equals the specified Pre Trigger count the number of Pre Trigger scans will be the number of scans collected to that point Otherwise the number of Pre Trigger scans will be the number specified by the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command If it is not desired to collect any Pre Trigger data while in the Pre Trigger state the Pre Trigger count parameter of the Set Count Y command may be set to zero Pre Trigger data may not be accessed while NetScan is in the Pre Trigger state The Pre Trigger data for a particular Trigger Block is not made available to be read until the specified Trigger event occurs There are two ways to determine if the unit is in the Pre Trigger state 1 Visually check the TRIGGER LED If it is flashing then the unit is in the Pre Trigger state 2 Query the Status Byte STB register and check the Triggered Bit If the Triggered Bit is not set and the acquisition has been configured then the unit is in the Pre Trigger state When the specified Trigger event occurs NetScan exits the Pre Trigger state and enters the Post Trigger state The
283. nd Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup and Data Destination Once in the Setup window you can access an inactive dialog box by clicking on its related tab The three tabs remain visible regardless of which dialog box is active Access the Setup window using one of the following methods e Use the Setup pull down menu on ChartView s main window and select the desired dialog box Channel and Alarm Setup Acquisition Setup or Data Destination e Double click the Channel Configuration button item 8 main window figure then click on the appropriate dialog box tab Channel amp Alarm Setup Dialog Box The Channel and Alarm Setup dialog box consists primarily of a configuration spread sheet The dialog box allows you to configure the input channels and displays them Each row shows a single channel and its configuration The number of rows may vary depending on the number of channels present in your acquisition system Four of the columns On Type Label and Units allow blocks of cells to be selected and altered at the same time Clicking on one of these column headers selects the entire column When a cell is selected the message box reveals a note and often a related pull down list In the following figure the cell for channel Type has been selected This caused the CHOOSE TYPE gt message to appear along with the type pull down menu Depending on the column you can make changes to the information contained in the cell by e
284. nd U5 The U4 command requests the HLL data while U5 requests the HLL data then clears and resets the high and low value to the last value If not cleared the high and low will be maintained All HLL data will be sent to the controller in the order dictated by the scan configuration and in the format specified by the Data Format command F The HLL data is retrieved in the following sequence e high the high reading ht the high time date stamp low the low reading It the low time stamp last the last reading NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries You can use the Query Terminator Q command to specify a response terminator between each channel of the HLL response Use the Format F command to specify the output format of the HLL Registers The following examples show how to use these commands to configure and query the HLL Registers Example 1 Example 1 shows how to configure and query all the HLL registers and how the HLL terminator can be used to control the flow of the HLL response output PRINT 1 F0 0 Q1 1 0 0 0X Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of CR LF EOI Configure four channels 1 2 10 and 15 After an indiscriminate amount of time Configure and start the acquisition PRINT 1 C1 2 1C10 1C15 1X x PRINT 1 U4X Query the current HLL settings LINE INPUT 1 AS Get HLL for channel 1 PRINT AS Screen shows 1450 20812 23 21 700
285. nding a question mark to the command letter Query commands place their responses into the output queue until the controller retrieves them They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command When appropriate the response from a Query command is in the form of a command string which if it were executed would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the Query was executed For instance the response of the User Terminator Query V X command is in the following form Vval where O lt val lt 255 This response is in the form of the Set User Terminator V command and if it is sent to the unit it would set the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the Query was issued Query responses are always fixed length strings in a pre defined format Any number of Query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that responds with only the information of interest for a given application Query commands are immediate Their responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted before any other commands including the Execute X command Note Even though Query commands generate their responses as soon as they are interpreted they must still be followed by an Execute X command for proper termination For more information on command execution refer to the X command reference presented later in this appendix EXAMPLE PRINT 1 V1 X V X Get the re
286. necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge The main main unit and each signal conditioning card are calibrated separately Note that the main unit and its signal conditioning cards contain components for saving calibration constants allowing for card swapping within a system card swapping between systems and system expansion Calibration relates to the main unit and cards as follows Main Unit NetScan or ChartScan main chassis calibrated for offset and gain only Signal Conditioning Cards Calibrated for offset gain and cold junction sensor offset if thermocouples are used Non Volatile Storage of Calibration Constants To preserve calibration constants main unit constants are stored in an on board battery backed up RAM and the constants for each signal conditioning card are stored on the card s EEPROM Hardware Protected RAM Your scanning device contains a security circuit This circuit disables writing to the portion of battery backed up RAM which holds the main unit s calibration constants and calibration password You must enable the calibration mode prior to calibrating the main unit or changing the password LLLLLLA ALARM TRIGGER SCAN SEND RECEIVE ERROR POWE
287. new acquisition is configured either through the Trigger Configuration T command or when the unit is rearmed via the auto rearm mode Set when the controller has attempted to read from the acquisition device when no response is present or pending or when a response has been lost because the controller has sent a new query before reading the response to a prior query Set when a conflict error has occurred A conflict error is generated when a command cannot execute correctly because it would interfere with other commands or settings Set when one of several errors has occurred during the execution of a command Set when a command syntax error is detected Set when the Acquisition Buffer has been filled to at least 75 of its capacity The bit is cleared when the amount of data in the Acquisition Buffer falls below 75 of its capacity Set on power on or system reset R Event Status Enable Register The event status enable register controls which events if any are to be reflected in the status byte register As shown in the following figure the bits of the event status register are logically ANDed with the corresponding bits of the event status enable register The resulting bits are logically ORed together in the status byte register The event status enable register does not affect the event status register it only affects the ESB bit of the status byte register The event status enable register is set and interrogated with the N
288. ng U6 command may also be used to retrieve more detailed information about the state of the Acquisition Buffer The following are simple examples to illustrate the uses and effects of all three R command types Note Although not mentioned prior to these examples the responses to all queries U6 R1 R2 etc can be configured with specific field separators and response terminators For detailed instructions on setting query terminators refer to the Q command description in Appendix D The R1 command will read the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block For instance PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 0000006 0020216 00000100 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 01 53 01 300 03 24 97 00000250 01 The above response indicates that there are 6 trigger blocks currently defined in the Acquisition Buffer and there are 20216 total scans in the buffer Furthermore it shows that the current read pointer is at scan 100 in the Ist trigger block To retrieve that scan perform the following PRINT 1 R1X Request the oldest scan LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 4 channels are configured 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 PRINT 1 U6X Request the current status of the Acquisition Buffer LINE INPUT 1 A Retrieve it PRINT A Screen shows 0000006 0020215 00000099 12 51 43 100 03 24 97 00000100 0
289. ng Plug Note With a card in slot 1 channels 3 6 11 and 14 Not part of Cold Cell 1 of 4 must be used for cold junction calibration The table previous page provides CJC channel numbers for other card slot positions Cold Junction Calibration Equipment Setup CAUTION The main unit chassis and T C cards must be calibrated for offset and gain prior to calibrating the T C cards for cold junction CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit has been powered on for at least one hour and the Cold Cell powered on for at least 2 hours The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour chassis warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 1 With power OFF to the main unit complete the system setup as indicated by the previous figure and table 2 Turn power ON to the main unit Cold Cell calibrator and digital multimeter Allow at least one hour warm up time before proceeding Allow at least 2 hours warm up for the Cold Cell 3 Ifthe calibration password has not been changed enter K12345 If the password has been changed enter the K command and current password This enables the calibration mode 6 18 Calibra
290. ng illustration figure a Adjust the calibrator voltage to match that of the desired test temperature using Voltage to Temperature Reference Tables Verify the channel readings match the test temperature for each of the four CJC reference channels Repeat verification for all T C cards Note The Cold Cell Simulator in figure a shows a special connection box attached to it This connection box which can be easily made is not part of the cold cell device Hot Cell Method Connect Hot Cell simulator to T C card s first CJC reference channel Adjust Hot Cell to obtain desired test temperature and ensure temperature is stabilized Observe channel reading to match test temperature Repeat test for remaining three CJC reference channels Repeat verification for all T C cards T C Calibrator Method see note Connect a thermocouple calibrator simulator to the first ChartScan or NetScan CJC channel in accordance with the calibrator simulator manufacturer s instructions Certain simulators will require the use of specific type T C extension wire to create a cold junction at ChartScan s or NetScan s input while other simulators require copper wire and reduce the output voltage as a function of ambient temperature to create the effect of a cold junction at the main unit Adjust the output setting to the desired temperature and verify the channel reading is within the range of ChartScan s or NetScan s tolerance band for the T C type and t
291. nnel configuration C Select Card C card Select the card from which subsequent QC and U12 interrogation will retrieve information Without optional Relay Card Valid options for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 2 3 or 4 Selects the card in corresponding slot of the main unit with 1 being the bottom slot and 5 6 7 or 8 Selects the corresponding slot on the expansion chassis with slot 5 being the bottom slot of the expansion chassis With optional Relay Card installs in slot 1 Valid options for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 selects card in slot 2 2 selects card in slot 3 and so on with 7 selecting the card in slot 8 and no card 8 available NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Command Set Relay Make Time D make Specify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before reading valid data where make is the number of 520 833 microsecond intervals E End Calibration Mode E Terminate Calibration Mode Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following error codes E000 No error has occurred E001 Invalid device dependent command IDDC E002 Invalid device dependent command option IDDCO E004 Channel configuration error E008 Calibration error E016 Trigger overrun E032 Open TC or Range Error E128 Command conflict error Set Data Format Fengr Configure the input and output formats format engr converts the raw data to th
292. nnels list Note When a chart contains overlapping channels which share values such that their traces reside on top of each other the more recent channel will obscure the earlier channel Note that the lower a channel is on the display list the more recent it is in regard to the display Chart Display Configuration Setup Erie Display EF Group 1 Available Channels A EJPD1 ADI PE1_40 PDT Ag FelPo1_A03 ee FaJPD1_A05 PO1_ A065 Selected Channels Remove POI ADI PDT _Adg PDT ADS PD1 ADF Category Voltage Units Y Adding Channel 2 to Chart 1 5 10 PostView NetScan User s Manual Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel In the following figure Channel 1 of Chart 1 Group 1 was selected resulting in a new screen image From this screen you can edit the channel setup k Chart Display Configuration Setup eon EOF lon j 2l0FF EHG Display Data Type Group 1 Category Voltage EHA Chart 1 Unite F Channel Settings amp Units Full Scale Display Mode aid ex lists fin Trace Color Be 4 YMax 10 240 Y Center 0 000 YMin 10 20 A Units Division 0 923 E Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 PostView channels can be set for either of two modes Units Full Scale or Units Div The mode is selected by radio button Mode descriptions are as follows Units Full Scale When Units Full Scale is selected as depi
293. nner and can provide readings for DC voltage AC voltage and thermocouple based temperatures at a rate of up to 44 channels per second Noise filtering improves by selecting higher average weight settings but reduces the overall response time of the unit You can use the following formulas to compute the amount of time needed to acquire one scan For 60 Hz systems Scan time channels x samples channel 12 x 520 83 us For 50 Hz systems Scan time channels x samples channel 12 x 625 00 us To use the Normal scan mode such that noise filtering line cycle integration is enabled use the M and w commands or use ChartView see Chapter 4 Example M 0 Select normal mode WH 16 Select 16 samples over which to average Note The number of samples in the above example could also be one of the following 64 128 or 256 However using the weight of 256 will limit the number of active channels in an acquisition to 122 due to hardware constraints If noise resulting from AC voltage line pick up is not a problem you can set the system to average 1 2 4 or 8 line cycles per channel for faster scanning throughput high speed multiple channel application For example if the unit is configured to take 1 sample per channel it will scan 147 channels per second Note In regard to AC voltage measurements NetScan only supports AC voltages having an input signal frequency which is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle For th
294. no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read Query current terminator settings Query Card Data QC Read back card ID and calibration information from the card previously selected by the Select Card C command Read Buffered Data Read scan data from the acquisition buffer where type is the type of data request being made Valid options for type are 1 Read the oldest scan currently residing in the acquisition buffer 2 Read the oldest complete trigger block currently residing in the acquisition buffer and 3 Read all the scan data that currently resides in the acquisition buffer Query the contents of the data buffer A 8 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference Read Last Readings R chans Queries the last readings from the HLL Registers for specified channels chans may be in two forms chan for a single channel where 1 lt chan lt max or first last for a range of channels where 1 lt first lt last lt max where max 128 for NetScan Set Real Time Clocks Set the unit s internal real time clock where time is in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes SS is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year S Query the internal real time clock
295. nses into the output queue until the controller retrieves them They respond with the present configuration or mode of a previously executed command When appropriate the response from a query command is in the form of a command string which if it were executed would put the unit into the configuration it was in when the query was executed For instance the response to the User Terminator query command v X is in the form Vuser where O lt user lt 255 This response is in the form of the User Terminator v command and if it is sent to the NetScan it would set the User Terminator to the same value that it had when the query was issued Query responses are always fixed length strings in a pre defined format Any number of query commands can be combined into one string to create a specialized status command that responds with only the information of interest for a given application Query commands are immediate in other words their command responses are generated as soon as they are interpreted and before any other commands including the Execute x command For example PRINTH 1 V1 X V X Get the response of current User Terminator INPUT 1 AS Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows V1 PRINT 1 VO X V X Change User Terminator and get response INPUT 1 AS Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows VO PRINT 1 V4 V X Change User Terminator and Get response No intermediate X command INPUT 1 AS Retrieve re
296. ntitled Power Aspects Changing the Voltage Setting Verify DIP Switch Settings The DIP switch is located on the lower right corner of NetScan s rear panel Default settings are as follows Note that micro switch 1 must be set to the O position The IEEE position does not apply to NetScan Selection Micro Setting Bi E o ORSA Switch 1 COMM SELECT 1 0 Required for NetScan 0 HANDSHAKE H S 2 3 1 0 Hardware Handshake Te mE TT L i a PARITY 4 5 0 0 No Parity ee H S PARITY SERIAL ee 232 BAUD RATE 6 7 8 1 1 0 19200 Baud SELECT BAUD RATE RS 232 422 SELECT 9 0 RS 232 position NetScan Default DIP Switch Settings gah The IEEE position does not apply to NetScan 1 2 Configuring and Starting NetScan NetScan User s Manual Install Signal Conditioning Card s Signal conditioning cards are pre installed per customer order However if you need to install a signal conditioning card or CSN Relay card perform the following steps Repeat the steps for additional cards and for placing cards into the optional CSN Exp expansion chassis if applicable CAUTION Ensure NetScan is powered down and not connected to any power source prior to installing or removing a card Failure to do so could cause equipment damage CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment da
297. ntly available Enables ChartView to access device memory and upload scans until scanning is complete Bar Graph Meters Analog Meters Digital Meters PostView post acq data viewer ChartView Software Reference window Bar Graph Meters Analog Meters Digital Meters PostView post acg data viewer Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Bar Graph window This window displays several channels in bar graph format To activate the display select the Start button in the meter toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page 4 28 Selecting Analog Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Analog Meters window This window displays several channels in a dial gage format To activate the display select the Start button in the meter toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page 4 29 Selecting Digital Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Digital Meters window to display several channels in numeric format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time See page 4 30 The PostView post acquisition data viewer selection ac
298. nts hysteresis values for high and low set points Scan Sequence e Any combination of temperature and voltage channels may be scanned but channels are scanned in ascending numerical order 3 4 General Information and Specifications NetScan User s Manual Scan Interval e Absolute time between scans hh mm ss t min 00 00 00 0 max 99 59 59 9 Note Specifying a value of 00 00 00 0 results in no delay between channel scans Installation Category e CE Category 1 Programmable Triggering e Temperature or Voltage level above or below absolute time of day alarm condition on or off external TTL trigger rising or falling specified number of readings Temperature Level Trigger e Programmable value for any one channel Not available in Burst mode TTL Trigger e Programmable for rising or falling edges Pre Trigger Count and Post Trigger Count e Programmable integer lt memory size 1 and programmable integer Digital Filtering e Average 16 samples at 50 60 Hz for line cycle noise TC Reference e TC reference tables based on the IPTS 68 standard as listed with the US Department of Commerce NTIS International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 43 760 Trigger Input Connector Trigger Output Connector External BNC connector External BNC connector Data Storage amp Format Storage e 128 K reading 256 Kbyte standard optional 500 K reading 1 Mbyte 2 M reading 4 Mbyte 4 M reading 8 Mbyte
299. ode 8 bytes will be appended as follows DXXXD000 Where D User Terminator and XXX the decimal equivalent of I8 I1 Note If Alarm Stamping A is also enabled the Digital Input Stamp I will be appended after the Alarm Stamp EXAMPLES Without Digital Input Stamping default PRINT 1 I 0X Disable digital input stamp Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer LINE INPUT 1 AS 0234 20 0019 40 0001 40 0023 60 With Digital Input Stamping PRINT 1 I 1X Enable digital input stamping Configure and start an acquisition PRINT 1 R1X Request the next scan in the buffer LINE INPUT 1 AS 0234 20 0019 404 0001 40 0023 60 036 000 NetScan User s Manual A 29 API Command Reference Appendix A J Calibrate Cold Junction Offset TYPE Calibration EXECUTION SYNTAX Calibrate the cold junction offsets for cold junction compensation of the thermocouple signals where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan type is the thermocouple channel type temp is the reference temperature currently being applied to the selected channel with the form nnn n in degrees C DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation Active only in calibration mode the Calibrate Cold Junction Offset J command is use
300. ode Details Decimal Values 00 to 31 ACG amp UCG Descriptions ASCII Control Codes 00 to 31 Name Descriptions O O Null NUL Space filler character Used in output timing for some device drivers 1 Start of Header SOH Marks beginning of message header Start of Text STX Marks beginning of data block text O End of Text ETX Marks end of data block text End of Transmission EOT Marks end of transmission session Inquiry ENQ Request for identification or information Yes answer to questions or ready for next transmission Used in asynchronous protocols for timing o7 Carriage Return CR Data Link Escape DEE 7 Device Control 2 DC2 Device Control 8 DC3 No answer to questions or errors found re transmit Used in asynchronous protocols for timing Substitute SUB Used to replace a character known to be wrong N 7 Escape ESC Marks beginning of an Escape control sequence Group Separator GS Marker for submajor portion of transmission Record Separator RS Marker for minor portion of transmission Unit Separator US Marker for most minor portion of transmission M File Separator FS Marker for major portion of transmission G eo Fill w o os or ball T os o E iat oe m E as EO E E eae z E a cs cs E ee E E R NetScan User s Manual F 3 ASCII Code Summary Appendix F Notes P4000 Net Sean Users Manual
301. ode Specify measuring mode Valid options for mode are 0 Line cycle integration high speed multi channel mode and 1 Single channel high speed burst mode DESCRIPTION The Set Measuring Mode M command selects one of the two internal measuring modes supported by the NetScan units Normal Mode for Line Cycle Integration and High Speed Multi Channel applications Normal mode is the system default In this mode each channel is averaged over a selected number of samples as specified with the Set Averaging Weight W command As there are 32 samples per line cycle 32 64 128 or 256 samples will automatically enable line cycle noise rejection Thermocouples and DC Volts are averaged over the specified number of samples For AC Volts the root mean square RMS is computed over the specified number of samples High speed Single Channel Mode Burst mode is used to sample a single channel at a frequency specified by the Set Frequency F command The channel is sampled in blocks of 256 readings with the number of blocks specified by the Set Counts Y command Refer to Measuring Mode section of Appendix C for more detailed information EXAMPLES PRINT 1 M 0X Select Line Cycle Integration High Speed Multi Channel Mode PRINT 1 W 32X Select number of samples 32 PRINT 1 YO 10 0 Setup to read 10 post trigger scans PRINT 1 C1 3 1X Enable channels 1 3 for Type J thermocouples PRINT 1 T1
302. of the memory option used NetScan will automatically allocate its memory for optimal use according to its current configuration NetScan memory is broken into two main regions as shown in the following figure e High Low Last Data Registers only configured channels Location 0 e Acquisition Data Buffer The High Low Last Data Size equals the Total Channels in Scan multiplied by 20 When channels are configured NetScan will calculate how much memory will be needed for the High Low Last Registers The memory allocated to High Low Last is Acquisition Data Buffer e Number of channels x 20 The remaining memory is then allocated to the Acquisition Buffer For example if the memory option used is the standard 256K 262144 bytes and the number of configured channels is 128 x 20 then the amount allocated to the acquisition buffer would be The Acquisition Data Buffer Size equals the Memory Option Size minus the High Low Last Data Size 262144 Total Memory Option Size 256K 19840 High Low Last Data Size 128 x 20 242304 Acquisition Data Buffer Allocation 236 6K Size of Memory gt Option C2 NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Measuring Modes Overview You can select either of two scanning modes for NetScan 1 Normal mode or 2 High speed single channel mode NetScan Measuring Modes Average weight Application Setting Nor
303. og Box This box can be accessed through the Setup pull down menu Q 23 Data File Parameters Check Data File Parameters These parameters can be set from the Data Destination Dialog Box accessible from the Setup pull down menu and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible from the Data pull down menu NetScan User s Manual ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial 2 11 6 T Optional Save Configuration File Although the updated Chartvw cvw file will automatically save upon Exit there may be times when you want to manually initiate a save This will help you save time if an error occurs that may corrupt your configuration You may create a new configuration file by using an existing one and making the necessary changes In actual applications use the File pull down menu to manually save configuration files if this option is desired Note The cvw file contains all setup information Setup information includes channel information alarm configurations and acquisition configuration information Optional Check the System Inventory and Device System Time Check the System Inventory and Device System Time via the Status selection from the Device pull down menu In an actual application if the System Inventory and Device System Time configurations were acceptable you would proceed to Arm an Acquisition by clicking the Arm Acquisition button item 10 or by using the Arm Acquisition selection in the Acquire pull down
304. ommand Stop Trigger on post trigger count 10000 and synchronize the Start Trigger to the pre trigger timebase interval PRINT 1 X Issue Start Trigger acquisition may begin as much as 12 hours from now because we synchronized with pre trigger timebase interval NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference U User Status INE EXECUTION SYNTAX Ureq Request information about various internal conditions of the unit where req refers to one of the following request types 0 Query and clear the Event Status Register ESR 1 Query the Status Byte Register STB 2 Query and clear Calibration Status Register CSR 3 Query system settings 4 Query current High Low Last registers 5 Query and clear current High Low Last 6 Query the Buffer Status String 7 Query assigned alarm outputs 8 Query configured channels 9 Query digital inputs 10 Query memory option in Kbytes 11 Query all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints 12 Query last calibration time date 13 Query last scan read 14 Query card IDs 15 Query product information 16 Query measuring mode parameters 17 Query root mean square RMS 18 Query acquisition states and various system flags DESCRIPTION The User Status U command is used to return information about various conditions of the unit and may be sent at any time without interfering with normal operation Any error conditions except Calibration Errors ar
305. on page 4 12 NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 43 Notes 4 44 ChartView Software Reference itsti i OO NetScan User s Manual PostView 5 Introduction 5 2 Starting PostView 5 3 Toolbar 5 4 Channel Information Region 5 5 Menu Items 5 6 Understanding Groups Charts and Channels 5 7 Chart Setup Wizard 5 7 Introduction 5 7 Automatic Display Creation 5 8 Display Configuration 5 9 Editing a Display 5 10 Manually Creating a Display 5 12 PostView Timebase 5 15 Data File Accessibility PostView post data acquisition software supports several programs including ChartView DaqView LogView Personal DaqView TempView and WaveView These six acquisition programs create data files that can be viewed and analyzed in PostView after the acquisition has been completed PostView makes use of ASCII txt or PostView Binary iot files However most acquisition programs create the data files in raw binary format bin during the acquisition For these programs a conversion of the file format must be completed before PostView can access the data A further explanation follows e Personal DaqView DaqView LogView and WaveView create raw binary bin formatted files during the data acquisition After the acquisition is complete these programs convert the bin formats to iot or txt formats as determined by
306. on instruction EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345x Enter Calibration Mode with the keyword 12345 PRINT 1 U2X Check for keyword error INPUT 1 AS C VAL AS Get the Calibration Status Register IF C AND 16 THEN Is there a keyword error PRINT ERROR INVALID KEYWORD STOP If so stop execution ENDIF Connect short across applicable channel PRINT 1 H17X Calculate offset for card 2 Wait for command to complete Wait until trigger LED stops flashing Apply precision voltage PRINT 1 G17 1X Calculate gain for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage PRINT 1 G17 1X Calculate gain for card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 EX End Calibration Mode NetScan User s Manual A 31 API Command Reference Appendix A L Set Trigger Level TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX Sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan level is the level against which the readings are tested to determine if the level has been exceeded hyst is the hysteresis level Query the the current level settings DESCRIPTION The Set Trigger Level L command simply sets the level against which the testing of channel readings should be performed The Set Trigger Configuration T command should be used
307. on to ensure accuracy is maintained The industry standard for this calibration is once every year Note Main unit calibration is supported only when operating in the Calibration Mode A specific set of commands is provided for performing manual calibration Calibration Setup CAUTION To ensure accurate measurements calibration must only be performed by authorized personnel Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab CAUTION The VDC Calibrator used must meet the following criteria 1 Range 0 100mV_ Resolution 0 1 pV 2 Range 0 10V Resolution 10 pV 3 Range 0 1000V Resolution 1 mV for CSN14 HV S card calibration 4 Remote sensing terminals Note that stabilizing capacitors will typically be required at the point of connection to the main unit due to the relatively low bandwidth of high resolution VDC calibrators Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and necessitate additional services of an authorized metrology lab NetScan User s Manual 11 16 98 Calibration 6 1 CAUTION The digital voltmeter or digital multimeter used to verify calibration voltage accuracy must meet the following criteria 1 Minimum Resolution 6 1 2 digits 2 Minimum DC Accuracy 0 005 full scale Failure to comply with this requirement can result in faulty equipment performance and
308. onfiguration Setup The Clean Slate Approach 4 As seen in the previous figure for the Clean Slate approach you have two options at this point Perform 4a or 4b as appropriate With ChartView Plus option 4a is typically used ChartView Software Reference NetScan User s Manual 4a Automatically add groups to the setup Enter the number of groups and charts desired by using the cursor and typing in the value or by using the pull down arrows t and making the appropriate selections then click on the Create Groups button 4b Manually add groups to the setup Type in the name of the chart group then click on the Add Display Group button The Display Configuration Setup screen changes to show chart groups and the number of charts for the selected black highlighted chart group From this screen you can change the number of charts in a group as well as change the group name Display Configuration Setup E OF Display Number of charts in 1 the selected Group Group Hame Group sis Adding a Chart to Group 1 5 Change the number of charts per group if desired 6 Change the group name if desired 7 Click on a group to see the chart s assigned to the group In the above example there is one group with one chart 8 Click on a chart to assign channels to the chart A screen similar to the following will appear Display Configuration Setup Display Et
309. onflict Error to inform you that it is not running at the user specified interval The scan interval can be programmed from a 24 hour period to a 0 1 second period in increments of 0 1 second If a scan interval of zero is programmed the interval will default to fast mode Likewise if a scan interval is programmed less than the unit is capable of running at the interval will default to fast mode EXAMPLE PRINT 1 I01 00 00 0 00 00 00 0X Set normal scan interval to once every hour and acquisition interval to fast mode PRINT 1 I X Query the current scan intervals LINE INPUT 1 I PRINT I Screen shows 101 00 00 0 00 00 00 0 A 28 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference I Digital Input Stamping TYPE System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX I state Specify whether or not digital input stamping will be enabled state may have either of the following values The default of 0 which disables digital input stamping or 1 to enable digital stamping DESCRIPTION The Digital Input Stamping I command when enabled will append the digital input state to the end of each scan as it occurs in real time The digital input state consists of 8 bits 18 through I1 Each bit has an assigned binary value of 1 or 0 where 1 indicates digital input on and 0 indicates digital input off In binary mode 2 bytes will be appended as follows Byte 2 00h I8 I1 In ASCII m
310. onic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note Only one expansion chassis can be connected to a NetScan unit I 2 Hardware Ensure the NetScan is not connected to any power source Remove two upper side screws near front of unit and on side of unit and slide top cover plate free of NetScan Note that this plate will be reused as the cover plate for the expansion chassis Using machine screws A provided install two mounting blocks to the inner sides of the NetScan unit as indicated by the following figure 7 17 AN D Cover Plate Cover Plate we Screw 1 of 2 Expansion Chassis C ele oo Screy A 1 per block EE A A EY A A ea ee m AF A Ey ee Expansion a Chassis Screw B 2 per block ia ee Mounting Block WE 2000000000000000 of 4 s OQOQODOOOQOOOQOOOO _z Ribbon Cable Netscan M a 2 CA 154 Included el Mounting Block of 4 DO co o Connector PH401 EE EF A A A e e e eA Ee A a e es ee 7 on back side of Analog Backplane Board OOOO HOOO0O0OOO6 2 0000000000000000 2 NetScan MHO D OOQD DOQO QDOOO Connecting the Expansion Chassis to NetScan 4 Insert one end of the included 40 conductor ribbon cable CA 154 into NetSc
311. ons for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 2 3 or 4 Selects the card in corresponding slot of the main unit with 1 being the bottom slot and 5 6 7 or 8 Selects the corresponding slot on the expansion chassis with slot 5 being the bottom slot of the expansion chassis With optional Relay Card Installed installs in slot 1 Valid options for card are 0 Selects the chassis 1 selects card in slot 2 2 selects card in slot 3 and so on with 7 selecting the card in slot 8 and no card 8 available DESCRIPTION Using the Select Card C command selecting a number from the range 1 8 for the parameter card will cause subsequent QC commands to return the calibration factors of the cards by themselves To return the calibration factors of the cards as part of the system select a number from the range 101 108 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 C OX Select chassis PRINT 1 QC X Read chassis calibration factors LINE INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS PRINT 1 C 5X Select the card 5 PRINT 1 U12X Read back the time date that card 5 was last calibrated LINE INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS PRINT 1 C 105X Select the card 5 in order to read back the calibration factors as part of the system PRINT 1 QC X Read back the system calibration factors of card 5 LINE INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS Note In the above example an expansion chassis is being used thereby allowing an additional 4 card slots Note Ca
312. options are 0 Engineering Units default 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 2 Binary High Byte Low Byte and 3 Counts ASCIl Query the data format DESCRIPTION The Set Data Format F command configures the input and output data format for data transmissions with the unit and requires two arguments The first argument engr is the engineering units the second argument format is the reading format When the unit is inputting or outputting data it first references the current reading format If format is 0 Engineering Units it will then reference the current settings of the engineering units and then perform the necessary conversion Data Input Formats see Note 1 Data Type 0 3 Engineering Units Counts C Temperature XXXXX 0 1 2 3 K Volts 4 XX XXXXXXXXX XXXXX Time Date Interpreted as Absolute hh mm ss mil MM DD YY Engineering Units hh mm ss mil DDDDDDDD hh mm ss mil Interpreted as Engineering Units x ASCII digit MM month h hour DD day m minute YY year s second DDDDDDDD day mil see Note 2 Note 1 Binary Low Byte High Byte 1 and Binary High Byte Low Byte 2 are interpreted as engineering units Note 2 mil is milliseconds for ASCII but microseconds for binary 2 hexidecimal format The Set Data Format F command determines the format of readings input from the controller However the only readings input from the controller come in the form of command par
313. or Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters 4 Select the desired option from the meter configuration menu 5 Ifa dialog box is required for example to change a limit simply enter in the new value in the appropriate parameter box and press Apply or OK Pressing Apply implements your changes but keeps the dialog box open allowing you to make additional changes Pressing OK implements your changes and closes the dialog box The following table as well as the preceding figure serve as a quick reference to meters configuration 4 32 ChartViewSoftwareReference ssi Ne Scan User s Manual 6 Function Select Channel Set Scale Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator Show Trend Indicator Set Limits Show Limits Properties Configure Meter Settings Function Descriptions Description Select a new channel for display The selected channel will replace the one currently seen in the meter Note double clicking the left mouse button in the meter region will also bring up a dialog box that allows you to select a new channel Set the high and low points of the scale as well as define the decimal place format Places high and low uni directional floating markers on the scale to indicate the highest and lowest values reached up to the present time This feature does not apply to the Di
314. or Programmers Reference Note If you are not familiar with programming you will probably gain more understanding of the program related portions of this appendix by first reviewing Appendix A API Commands PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure master channels 1 4 with Type JTC PRINT 1 1I100 01 00 0 00 00 01 0X Configure normal timebase to 1 minute acquisition timebase to 1 second PRINT 1 Y100 1100 0X Set pre trigger scan count to 100 and post trigger to 1100 scans PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Configure start event to trigger on command and stop event to stop post trigger count TRIGGER LED should pulse PRINT 1 X Trigger the acquisition Acquisition scans should now be collected until 1100 post trigger scans have been collected TRIGGER LED should be on Channel Configuration Configuring a channel is the process of describing the channel transducer to NetScan By doing so the configured channel becomes part of the channel scan NetScan performs calculations on the raw voltage before supplying it to the controlling computer To perform such calculations NetScan must know the transducer type NetScan and its optional expansion chassis can each accept from 1 to 4 signal conditioning modules With eight modules possible each with 16 channels the system can scan up to 128 channels Note that the eight modules can be comprised of any combination of the following NetScan Signal Conditioning Modules Type mute ormecton C
315. or type in or Ctrl S Units Division i or type in 16 Chart Min Scale Setup Dialog Box Value Zoom In Divide 2 8 or spacebar 7 AutoScale 1 Time Stamp Hours mins seconds Tenths Time stamp can be relative or absolute Default is relative time stamp Show Grd Cus Show Markers Ctrl K Access Chart Setup 0 Right click to access edit menu for selected chart and channel Chart Max Setup Dialog Box Number of Samples Automatic indication of Scale Value Displayed no of samples per chart Charina D or f Time at Marker Indicates time at marker Selection position Note For keypad options first use the Tab key to tab over to the desired control item For example you can use the tab key to highlight the Group Select item 1 then use any of the following 3 methods to obtain the desired group Ctrl G keypad arrows or PageUp PageDown keys Note Items 10 through 17 and item 22 are discussed in the section PostView Channel Information Region page 5 SNote Toolbar button functions are discussed on page 4 Note Ctrl J will show the software version number 5 2 PostView NetScan User s Manual Starting PostView The main ways of starting PostView are 1 Open PostView directly from the Windows Explorer Desktop Icon or Start Run browse feature on desktop 2 From the acquisition program s main window click
316. or you data acquisition device The Channel TE 16 Information Region is located on the right hand side of ChartView s eiee oossoo main window The values displayed in this region are the real time z0 enter al values of the selected channel S a o 10 58 Bl e diw By clicking on the up or down arrows o or t by the channel selection a a 18 box item 14 you can select one of a maximum of 4 channels that Ii were assigned to a chart You could then observe the chart related oo AE information of the chosen channel You can also select a new channel for the information region by placing the cursor in or tabbing over to the Center or Units Div fields and then pressing PageUp or PageDown This is particularly useful when your main window has been re sized such that the channel selection boxes are not visible The following list identifies the various areas of the region 13 Chart Max Scale Value 17 Center Grid Limit Line Value at chart mid line 14 Channel Selection 18 Units Division Of chart s available channels Provides the vertical increment of one grid box 15 Multiply x2 19 Chart Min Scale Value Grid Limit Line 16 Present Value 20 Divide 2 Note The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than one chart group Multiple group applications ChartView Plus can be activated by use of a special code allowing up to four overlapping channels per chart Re
317. ormal and acquisition scan intervals which have the form hh mm ss t where hh is hours mm is minutes ss is seconds and t is tenths of a second Query scan interval selection DESCRIPTION The Set Scan Interval I command is used to set one of the following two distinct scan intervals The first is the normal scan interval used when the unit is collecting scans before the start trigger has occurred or after stop trigger has occurred Scans in these two regions are called pre trigger scans and post stop scans respectively The second is the acquisition scan interval used when the unit is acquiring scans after the start trigger has occurred but before the stop event has occurred Scans in this region are referred to as post trigger scans The norm and acg arguments represent the normal and acquisition scan intervals respectively The scan interval can be set to run as fast as the current unit configuration will allow This is referred to as fast mode Each of the two scan intervals can be configured as such by specifying 00 00 00 0 as the argument for the desired scan interval When the I command is interrogated by the unit the unit will determine by examining its current channel configuration if it is capable of running at the desired interval If the unit determines that it is not capable of running at the desired interval it will automatically enable fast mode for the interval s in question It will also issue a C
318. ote that ChartScan units with the pushbutton have it located on the rear panel as indicated in the NetScan figure page 6 2 Mode Indicator To denote whether or not calibration mode has been activated bit 7 in the Calibration Status Register will be set after a valid K command has been executed This bit is cleared by the E command see E Command in Appendix A You can verify the register status by the u2 command A response of U128 indicates that the unit is in the calibration mode u2 in the command reference section Appendix A contains details regarding this command Command Active Indicators Since the calibration commands require a few seconds to complete bit 6 in the Calibration Status Register will be set and the trigger LED will flash to indicate that a calibration command is active When these indicators are off a subsequent calibration step can be started NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 5 Calibration of Main Unit Offset Calibration of Main Unit Required Equipment Shorting bar or 3 linked banana plugs see following figure Calibration Card installed in bottom slot slot 1 of the main unit CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and e
319. p Select 4 8 Start Pause and Stop Charts 4 8 Scroll Faster amp Scroll Slower 4 8 Display Configuration 4 9 Channel Configuration 4 15 PostView post acg data viewer 4 15 Arm Acquisition 4 15 Disarm 4 15 Print Charts 4 16 Main Window Pull Down Menus 4 16 Bar Graph Analog amp Digital Meters 4 27 Overview 4 27 Bar Graph Meters 4 28 Analog Meters 4 29 Digital Meters 4 30 Meter Toolbars 4 31 Meter Pull Down Menus 4 31 Meters Configuration Menu 4 32 Setup Window 4 33 Channel amp Alarm Setup Dialog Box 4 33 Acquisition Setup Dialog Box 4 36 Channel Configuration Columns 4 35 Alarm Configuration Columns 4 36 Data Destination Dialog Box 4 39 Data Destination 4 39 Auto Re arm ChartView Plus only 4 39 Why use Auto Re arm 4 40 Disabling Auto Re arm 4 40 Chart Setup Wizard 4 41 Introduction 4 41 Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard 4 41 Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup 4 41 5 PostView Introduction 5 2 Starting PostView 5 3 Toolbar 5 4 Channel Information Region 5 5 Menu Items 5 6 Understanding Groups Charts and Channels 5 7 Chart Setup Wizard 5 7 Introduction 5 7 Display Configuration 5 9 Editing a Display 5 10 Manually Creating a
320. plate free of NetScan unit 3 Locate the two position slide on the power supply board You will notice the switch above the AC power inlet The number visible 115 or 230 indicates the selected power setting To change the voltage selection from 115V to 230V press down on the switch 115 VAC Selected 230 VAC Selected Voltage Selection Switch shown in both possible positions To change the voltage selection from 230V to 115V press up on the switch Hardware 7 3 4 As indicated in the figure press down on the switch to change the setting from 115VAC to 230VAC To change the setting from 230 to 115VAC you must press up on the switch 5 Replace NetScan s cover plate and secure with screws 6 Add anew sticker or tag stating the newly selected voltage Replacing the AC Power Supply Fuse Fuse 1 2A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 105 125V power line or 1 4A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 210 250V power line CAUTION Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used Replace the AC power supply fuse as follows 1 Turn NetScan s power to OFF Open the fuse drawer on the re
321. pointer over a meter and click the right hand mouse button The menu allows you to access various dialog boxes for changing parameters for an individual meter or simultaneously for a group of meters The steps for configuring a meter are detailed below Note The Show Peak Hold Indicator Reset Peak Hold Indicator selections are not an option for Digital Meters and do not appear on the configuration window for digital meters Scale Limits Misc as Cancel High 100 Low i00 Mote These screen images have been condensed Format 0 0 lt gt Select Channel High 100 set Scale Low E L The Meters extension is obtained Chow Peak Held lecicatar ai by pressing Adore 33 Show Peak Hold Indicator F Shove Limits M Reset Peak Hold Indicator Scale Limits Misc HI Show Trend Indicator Show Peak Hold Indicators HCH 4 Cancel Apply All None Meters Configuration Menu Scale Limits amp Misc Dialog Boxes WWeters Extension Dialog Box Meters Show Trend Indicator 2 CHe Set Limits Show Limits Properties Meter Configuration Menu and Related Dialog Boxes Configuring a Meter 1 Bring up the desired meter group Bar Graph Analog or Digital Place the mouse cursor over the meter you desire to reconfigure 3 Click on the right mouse button A Meters Configuration Menu similar to that in the above figure will appear Note The Show Peak Hold Indicat
322. port 9 amp 25 pin sub D to NetScan 9 pin sub D RS 232 422 cable 6 ft CA 192 5 10 Base T straight through ethernet cable 5ft CA 192 Adapter 10 Base T ethernet cross over adapter Additional Hardware Options 4 slot expansion chassis Memory expansion options 1 Mbyte 4 Mbyte or 8 Mbyte 16 output CSN Relay card NetScan Specifications CAUTION If equipment is used in any manner not specified in this manual or if specification limits are exceeded the function of the equipment as well as the protection provided by it may be impaired NOTE Specifications for signal conditioning cards and for the NetScan Expansion Chassis appear in their respective sections of this manual Measurement Parameters A D resolution 16 bit w over sampling Accuracy with type J TC 0 5 C TCs supported J K T E R S B N DCV 3 ACV 3 Ch to ch isolation 500 V or 200 V Ch to system isolation 500 V AC line rejection 3 Switching Technology mechanical relays Max scan rate 147 chs per sec Max single ch scan rate 20 Khz NetScan User s Manual General Information and Specifications 3 3 Min channel configuration 16 channels Max channel configuration 128 channels Installation Category e CE Category 2 for Line Voltage Input terminal All other terminals are Category 1 Warm Up e 1 hour to rated accuracy Expansion Connector e 40 conductor connector for connecting expansion chassis via ribbon cable Ne
323. portion of NVRAM during NetScan main unit calibration Refer to Chapter 6 for detailed information BNC Trigger input for initiating and or stopping acquisition with TTL input signal BNC TTL Scan output signal occurs for each channel scan used for synchronizing other equipment with NetScan acquisition DB50 connector offers easy access to Alarms and Digital I O 32 digital outputs and 8 digital inputs Serial port for operation at remote distances from controlling computer supports 300 to 9 600 baud using RTS CTS or XON XOFF handshaking Used for selecting RS 232 or RS 422 and respective communication parameters i e handshaking parity and Baud Rate For installing the optional IEEE 488 interface card Note that RS 232 serial interface is the default and is possible with or without an interface card See previous table NetScan User s Manual Ethernet Interface section of Rear Panel LED Indicators Activity ON when data is being sent or received through the internet Link ON when the NetScan unit has a solid connection to the internet Ethernet ON when the ethernet interface is enabled and functioning properly OFF when the ethernet interface is disabled FLASHES when a problem exists that requires factory attention ethernet hub Accepts a DB9 cable for communicating with an available PC COMM port This connector is only needed during the configuration of address settings for ethernet operation See Chapter 2 for more deta
324. previously saved configuration file Q 3 Select Simulated Instrument In an actual application you Tos deli would select IEEE 488 RS 232 422 or NetWork E depending on the type of device i O RS 233 422 C Network Simulated Instrument Note IEEE 488 device interface does not apply to NetScan units Ok Cancel 2 6 ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual 2 Configure Chart Setup Q 4 On the Select Interface box shown in step 1 click OK A Chart Setup Wizard window appears see following figure gt GNart Setup Wizara Automatic Chart Creation Simple Moderate Advanced Eieele Charts with one channel assigned per chart Starting with channel CH1 r Selector Channels The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 The above setup will assign 1 channels starting from channel pa Manual Chart Creation Create Charts Chart Setup Wizard Note ChartView Plus has Chart Setup Wizard options including Moderate and Advanced Automatic Chart Creation as well as the ability to create multiple groups ChartView Plus features can be unlocked by use of an authorized registration ID number as an unlock code Contact your service representative for more detailed information The chart setup determines how your ChartView Main Window will appear in regard to the number of groups available for viewing the number of charts shown
325. queue is empty This bit reflects whether any command responses are still in the output queue Reflects the logical OR of all the bits in the Event Status Register ESR ANDed with their equivalent enable bits in the Event Status Enable ESE register If this bit is set at least one bit in the ESR is set and has its corresponding enable bit in the ESE set The status command UO can be issued to read the ESR See the following for more information on ESR and ESE Set if a buffer overrun occurs It is cleared when the buffer becomes empty by either reading out the contents of the buffer or performing a Reset B of the buffer Using Status Reporting Registers As mentioned earlier the status reporting registers are organized in a hierarchical structure with the lower level registers containing more general information and the higher level registers containing more detailed Appendix D information about particular events In general the lowest level register the Status Byte Register STB contains information that may require more immediate action from the controller in that events contained in this register tend to be more time critical However as mentioned earlier other registers may access the STB via the ESB bit This allows any condition within the status reporting register hierarchy to have access to the STB and therefore Serial Poll and Service Request functionality The following is an example to show in brief how the status
326. r Ctrl Y 24 Status LEDs Print Charts YA or Ctrl P Chart Display YA 13 Chart Max Scale From Chart Pull down Value Grid Limit menu or Chart Setup Double click left mouse button in selected chart to zoom in or zoom back out Right click to bring up Chart Setup Dialog Box with the Line Dialog Box current group and target chart selected E EN 2 4 ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial NetScan User s Manual Once ChartView has a configuration file you can start the program quickly using the Windows Run dialog box Before executing this command by clicking on the OK box specify a configuration file as a command line parameter In the following example the user has specified a configuration file which he had previously saved as Test1 cvw Note The file name can be manually entered or can be accessed using the pull down arrow and scrolling the list of available file names Hun ki Ed Type the name of a program folder or document and Windows will oper it for you Oper CAxfer ChartviewNEWichartw exe Testl cvw CAxfer ChartviewNEWichartw exe Testl cvw Testi cw w K Cancel Browse Browse Drive Folder Folder cvw File Single Space Exe File After executing the command ChartView s Main Window opens At this point review the following configurable items prior to Data Acquisition Make changes or load a different configuration file if desired M Device Interface Check the Interface and Statu
327. r short length char FAR data short FAR xlength unsigned short FAR status Parameters Long session The session handle of the NetScan Short port The port being read from Unsigned short flush Flag to indicate if the receive buffer should be cleared long timeout The time in milliseconds to wait for received data Short terminator The terminator to be used for serial input Short length The maximum number of characters to be Transmitted from the data buffer Char FAR data A buffer where the transmitted Data resides Short FAR xlength The number of characters that were sent Unsigned short FAR status Not used Parameter Values Port NetScan 1 Aux 0 Flush retain 0 Empty 1 Terminator none 1 CRLF 3 User defined 0 to 255 Returns 0 if successful error code or warning if command not completed Description This function s primary use is to send data to the NetScan s ethernet interface The secondary use is to flush all characters from the NetScan s ethernet interface receive buffer Because this function may take some time to complete the return value must be tested to see if the command has completed The return value for command pending is 801 Example Do ErrVal nSERIALSend session 1 0 1000 13 100 amp dataBuffer amp xlength amp status while errVal 801 nSessionEnd Function int nSessionEnd long session Parameters long session The session handle o
328. r more networks connect to a common gateway via ethernet hubs In regard to multiple networks a qualified network administrator should assign all TCP IP parameters 4 LAN Setup with Internet Access Gateway Gateway Ethernet Hub X N Sass Ethernet Hub oF oF Local Area Network LAN Remote Internet Site NetScan LAN Setup with Gateway Access to Internet In internet access scenarios a network adminstrator usually assigns TCP IP parameters Configuring for this scenario is identical to that of scenario 2 Private LAN Setup with the following exception The internet access scenario requires the gateway address to be set to the address of the gateway router device that handles routing to the internet Connect Channel Signal Inputs Connect channel inputs to your signal conditioning cards Each signal conditioning card can support up to 16 Channels With use of the expansion chassis you can have up to 8 signal conditioning cards Depending on the type s of cards used your connections will be made via one or more of the following screw terminal mini plug BNC or safety jack type input connector Reference Note Chapter 7 contains information regarding each type of signal conditioning card that can be used with NetScan NetScan has eight digital input lines and thirty two digital output lines available on the rear panel DB 50 connector see pin out below Each digital output line will drive five 5 standard TTL lo
329. r of charts to be assigned to a specific group With the use of the mouse cursor you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing The rest of this section has been divided into two parts The first pertains to editing an existing display while the second section pertains to manually creating a display configuration from scratch 1 e there is no existing display configuration to edit Both methods make use of Display Configuration Setup dialog boxes NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 9 Editing a Display k Chart Display Configuration Setup EHG Display Number of charts in a the selected Group 1 x EAFD1_A01 EA FPD1_A03 FAPD1_A05 Group Hame Group 1 Ee PD1_Ag Display Configuration Setup Dialog Box with an Existing Configuration To explain editing a configuration we make use of an example in which assumes you want to edit Chart 1 In the following figure Chart 1 was highlighted by clicking on it with the mouse cursor The Display Configuration Setup box then changed allowing you to see specific channel types such as volts only or to Show all Types as in the example From this setup box you can add or delete charts and channels You can e Use the Shift or Ctrl key in conjunction with the cursor to select several channels for addition or deletion double click on an available channel to add it to the selected channels double click on a selected channel to remove it from the selected cha
330. r programmable ranges 100 mV 1 volt 5 volt and 10 volt The cards share the same signal conditioning characteristics but differ in their style of input connector i e terminal strip BNC and safety jack CSN14 LV T CSN14 LV B and CSN14 LV S respectively o ol Ol Ol ol a ol fe o o 2 8S SBS SBS BS SS e SS BS SBS w SFE S SY BY 2 2 o alo oa OG O OG OEG CEG CE CE CG C lo o TESS Se SSS ee San Sf Se SE gg gg a og a Es Ei a Za i _ E E lr Hal ibaie i a baa fate e bae ael aa aoaia ata qd ay 9 C cao Om 0 QO oo y e
331. r scan data the unit supplies the oldest available scan After the scan is supplied that scan is no longer available As scan data is read from the acquisition buffer the data is removed from the buffer and thereafter may not be referenced or read This command operates as follows When a Read Buffer Data R command is interpreted the requested scan data if it exists is moved one scan at a time from the Acquisition Buffer to the output queue where it will wait in state until you remove it Once the data is removed from the output queue the next Read Buffered Data command may be issued Note If the appropriate amount of scan data is not in the acquisition buffer at the time these commands are issued a conflict error will result The Scan Available bit in the Status Byte STB register may be queried or Serial Polled to determine if there is any buffer scan data available For a more complete description of how much data is available in the acquisition buffer at any particular time the Buffer Status String U6 command may be issued The Set Query Terminators Q command determines the format for the terminators for acquisition buffer data For more information regarding the acquisition buffer terminators refer to the Set Query Terminators Q command Note In High speed single channel burst mode scan means one block of 256 samples EXAMPLE S 0 Wait for a scan While S and 8 0 PRINT 1 U1X INPUT 1 AS S
332. racy and Resolution Note 1 Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 100 mV 0 02 3 05 uV bit 1 V 0 02 30 5 uV bit 5 V 0 02 153 uV bit 10V 0 02 306 uV bit Accuracy is based on 18 to 28 C 1 year includes cold junction compensation excludes thermocouple errors thermocouple readings based on NIST Monograph 175 Resolution given is the typical value Add 5 C for common mode voltages greater than 25 VAC Voltage range is maximum peak to peak signal for AC volts For AC voltages where the frequency of the input signal is an integer multiple of the AC line cycle 1 with line cycle integration enabled Specified for coupling impedance gt 30 MQ and common mode frequency lt 60 Hz 300 VDC or 300 VAC peak before equipment damage occurs There is a 4700 pico farad polypropylene capacitor connected across the input terminals of each channel This capacitor filters input noise when measuring signals from thermocouples When the circuit card is set to the 100 mV range the capacitor reacts with user source impedance to form a low pass filter The filter pole frequency is 1 2 pi RSHI RSLO 4700 10 where RSHI and RSLO are the source resistance of the input leads 7 13 CSN14 LV T B amp S Low Voltage Cards There are three versions of low voltage signal conditioning cards for use with NetScan Each card supports 16 differential input channels and is capable of measuring analog input signals on any of fou
333. rate the correction gain constants for a given slide in card The channel gain value is necessary in order for the internal firmware to accurately interpret readings coming from the input channels This command will take the parameters chan and type and will calculate the gain based on the present channel input voltage Note To achieve correct results this command must be issued twice First with a negative input voltage and then with a positive input voltage Each time the command has been issued the precision voltage source must remain at its value until the trigger LED stops flashing For further details on channel calibration see Chapter 6 EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345x Enter Calibration Mode Apply negative precision voltage PRINT 1 G17 1 Calculate gain for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply positive precision voltage PRINT 1 G17 1 Calculate gain for T C card card 2 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT H1 End Calibration Mode A 26 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference H Calibrate Channel Offset TYPE Calibration EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Hchan Calibrate the correction offset constants for given option card where chan is the channel number such that 1 lt chan lt max where max 128 for NetScan The chassis is chan 0 DESCRIPTION Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own cal
334. rated later in this section With exception of the type of harness see following figure the gain calibration procedure is identical for each of the following cards CSN14 TC P CSN14 LV S CSN14 LV B CSN14 LV T A Reference Note For gain calibration of the CSN14 HV S card refer to the section entitled Gain Calibration for High Volts Cards beginning on page 6 15 CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain and the signal conditioning cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards for gain CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 6 12 Calibration NetScan User s Manual 1 Connect an applicable calibration harness to each card Refer to figure below Twisted Pair
335. ration Requirements 2 220 222 2222 0e nnn n nen ene n nnn n nen e eee n nnn eeeeeen eens C 6 Channel Configuration 222220022222 n nnn nnn n nnn e nen n nnn e enn n nnn e eee n nnn e eens C 7 CSN14 TC P Configuring Thermocouple Channels C 8 CSN14 LV T B or S Configuring Low Volts Channels C 8 CSN14 HV S Configuring High Volts Channels C 9 Scan Configuration 22220 22222 nnn nnn n nnn nner n nnn nen een nnn n nnn eee n nnn n nee ee enn n nee C 9 Configuring a Scan C 9 Configuring the Scan Interval C 9 Acquisition Configuration 2222 22 22 22220 2222 ene n nnn n nnn n nnn n nnn n nee een n nnn eeeeee C 10 Introduction C 10 Pre Trigger State C 11 Continuous Gap Free Acquisition wi
336. rature values values but sensor adjustment i e only only not without raw A D input of the T C linearized linearized temperature type sensor adjustment i e raw A D input of the temp sensors Assignable Channel Types a B N i4gauge 8 383 40 48s 50 N 28gauge 9 39 40 49 50 ee o NA O ONA O A O NA Oo S n NA NA NA NA Volts Type High Voltage Normal Operation Range Type Range Types NetScan User s Manual A 19 API Command Reference Appendix A EXAMPLE PRINT 1 FO 0X Set Data Format to Engineering Units degrees C PRINT 1 CX Clear current channel configuration PRINT 1 C1 1 100 0 100 0 0 5 Configure channel for T C type J with low setpoint of 100 0 C high setpoint of 100 0 C and hysteresis of 0 5 C PRINT 1 C33 34 11 Configure channels 33 and 34 for Volts type 100 mV range and no setpoints PRINT 1 C65 2 Configure channel 65 for T C type K with no setpoints PRINT 1 X Execute the above configuration The unit is now scanning the above configuration PRINT 1 U13X Get the last readings of configured channels LINE INPUT 1 AS Retrieve response PRINT A Screen shows 0034 0103 0012 0004 C Select Card TYPE Calibration EXECUTION SYNTAX C card Select the card from which subsequent QC and U12 interrogation will retrieve information Without optional Relay Card Valid opti
337. rd 5 will typically be located in slot 5 however if the optional relay card is used card 5 will be located in slot 6 and signal conditioning card use is limited to 7 cards instead of 8 A 20 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference D Set Relay Make Time TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX D make Specify how long to wait after closing a channel relay before reading valid data where make is the number of 520 833 microsecond intervals DESCRIPTION S O DESCRIPTION The Set Relay Make Time D command allows the user to increase the delay between closing a relay and reading valid channel data The system powerup default is make 6 3 125 milliseconds If common mode voltages on adjacent channels are widely dissimilar reading inaccuracies can result This inaccuracy is due to inadequate settling time at the instrumentation amplifier when the unit is scanning between channels To eliminate these inaccuracies the settling time can be increased using the D command as shown in the example below EXAMPLE PRINT 1 M 0X Select Normal mode PRINT 1 W 32X Select number of samples 32 PRINT 1 D 12X Set Relay Make Time 12 6 25 milliseconds PRINT 1 YO 10 0X Setup to read 10 past trigger scans PRINT 1 C1 128 1X Enable channels 1 128 for J type thermocouples PRINT 1 T1 8 0 0X Arm the unit PRINT 1 X Trigger unit and collect scans E End Calibra
338. reset You can then activate Wizard by selecting OK or discontinue by selecting cancel Note You can edit the display configuration file without use of the Chart Setup Wizard by using the Display Configuration Setup dialog box This box can be accessed from Setup in the File pull down menu or by clicking on the Chart Setup button in PostView s toolbar This method of display editing is discussed in the section Display Configuration beginning on page 9 The chart display setup determines how your PostView window will appear in regard to the following e number of chart groups available for viewing e number of charts shown for each selected group e the number of overlapping channels in each chart not to exceed 4 You can choose to manually create a display configuration or have one created automatically The automatic setup method offers three choices Simple Moderate and Advanced NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 7 A Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button allows you to bypass the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a manual editing mode This option makes use of PostView s Display Configuration feature discussed in the following Display Configuration section Manual Chart Creation allows you to vary the number of assigned channels per chart as well as vary the number of charts per group a Chart Setup Wizard ge Tar oe Cancel 1tup Wizare Automatic Chart Creation M Charts with one
339. rmal operation Install Software Configure Address Settings for Ethernet Operation Important Be sure you have completed the hardware related steps on page 1 4 prior to performing the steps below Failure to complete the hardware related steps will result in a communications error Use Microsoft Windows Run dialog box to configure NetScan s address and install the ChartView program group Direct Windows to run the SETUP EXE file found on Installation Diskette 1 Follow the on screen dialog boxes to complete a successful installation Early in the setup you will be prompted to enter your Network Interface ID Number This number appears on your Network Registration Sheet and must be entered to enable ChartViewNET Enter Network Interface Registration ID Number x Please enter Network Interface Registration ID Number as it appears on your Network Registration Sheet Ik ig required to be able to run CharkyiewNET Back Cancel Screen Prompt for Entering the Network Interface Registration ID NetScan User s Manual Configuring and Starting NetScan 1 5 If you ordered ChartView Plus you must enter the registration ID number as it appears on your ChartView Plus Registration Sheet Otherwise press Next and continue to follow the screen prompts Enter Chart iew Plus Registration ID Number IF you have purchased Chartyiew Plus please enter Charie Plus Registration ID Number as it appears on your
340. rs 6 5 Main Unit 6 6 thru 6 8 Password 6 5 ScanCal 6 3 Setup 6 2 Signal Conditioning Cards 6 10 thru 6 18 Chart Setup Wizard 4 41 5 7 ChartView including NET amp Plus Alarms 4 24 4 33 4 38 Analog Meters 4 29 Arm acquisition 4 36 Basic Concepts 2 1 Bar Graph Meters 4 28 Chart Setup Wizard 4 41 Configuration Files 2 1 Configure acquisition 2 10 4 36 Digital Meters 4 30 Displays creating amp editing of 4 12 4 41 Dynamic Data Exchange DDE 4 20 Main Window general 4 4 Main Window Pull down Menus 4 16 Main Window Toolbar 4 8 Network 1 5 4 17 4 24 Parameter setups 4 33 Save data to disk 4 16 4 39 Setup Window 4 33 Transmit data 4 20 4 21 Tutorial 2 6 Configuration Aspects for Programmers see Appendix C CSN14 HV S 3 17 CSN14 LV T B amp S 3 16 CSN14 TC P 3 14 CSN Relay Card 3 18 D Data Formats for programmers see Appendix C Data 4 20 4 21 Digital I O Lines 1 10 7 10 DIP Switch 1 2 7 7 F Ethernet Addressing 1 8 ChartView Network aspect 4 17 4 24 Configuration Scenarios 1 9 Interface Panel 1 2 1 4 Operation Setup 1 4 Error Conditions 1 5 Appendix G Expansion Chassis 7 17 thru 7 20 External TTL BNC Connectors 7 11 NetScan User s Manual F Front Panel NetScan 1 3 7 1 Fuse Replacement of 7 4 H Hardware 1 2 Ch 7 Hysteresis C 27 N Network see Ethernet M Memory Configuration of 7 4 Expansion of 7 4 Write Enable Disab
341. rt long baudrate short parity short databits short stopbits short flowctrl long reserved Parameters Long session The session handle of the NetScan Short port The serial port being configured Long baudRate The baud rate to be used Short parity The parity setting to be used Short databits The number of data bits to be used Short stopbits The number of stop bits to use Short flowControl The handshaking method to use Long reserved Always 0 Parameter Values Port Aux 0 NetScan 1 Baud Rates 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 28800 38400 57600 115200 Parity Settings odd 79 Even 69 None 78 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Flow Control none 0 Xon Xoff 1 Dtr Dsr 2 Rts Cts 3 Returns 0 if successful error code or warning if command not completed Description This function is used to configure the selected serial port parameters of the NetScan ethernet interface The parameters used must match the NetScan serial port configuration switches on the rear of the unit Because this function may take some time to complete the return value must be tested to see if the command has completed The return value for command pending is 801 Example Do ErrVal nSERIALConfigure session 1 38400 78 8 1 3 0 while errVal 801 NetScan User s Manual nSerialReceive Function int nSERIALReceive long session short port unsigned short flush long timeout short terminator short length ch
342. s Available will be 0000000 e Current Read Pointer This field represents the current position within the current read block This pointer is relative to the trigger point which is always oriented at location 0 In other words if currently pre trigger scans are being read the Current Pointer will be less than 0 Likewise if post trigger scans are currently being read the Current Read Pointer will be greater than 0 If the current scan to be read is the trigger scan then the Current Read Pointer will be 0000000 If the Current Read Pointer is undefined its value will be 0999999 e Trigger Time Stamp This field represents the Time Date that the trigger event occurred for the current read block This field takes on the same format as other time date stamp fields described elsewhere in this manual If the trigger event has not occurred then this field will have the value 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference e Stop Scan Pointer This field represents the location in the current read block that the stop event occurred This pointer will always be relative to the trigger point with the trigger point always oriented at location 0 Since the stop event must always occur after the trigger event this pointer will always be greater than 0 If the stop event has not yet occurred at the time of the U6 query this field will have the value of 0999999 e Stop Time Stamp This field represents the Time Date t
343. s is as follows a v favere SS 2 e saouto Ca r savaam ooo o o Set Event Mask Set Trigger Level a LA 5 Jz Channel Setup Commands Assign Alarm Output Enable 1 or Disable 0 Alarm Stamping Enable 1 or Disable 0 Digital Input Stamping a 8 9 w0 jY njer O12 Note Data acquisition may begin once the Set Trigger Configuration T command has been defined The above order of deferred commands ensures the configuration of acquisitions will take place before any data is acquired NetScan User s Manual API Command Reference Appendix A Command Summary A 6 Trigger On Command Trigger on receipt of an Flush Acquisition Flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer Buffer C Clear Channel C Clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are Configuration configured eae Restore Factory i Restore unit to factory configuration Settings Change Calibration Kkey Change the calibration keyword where key is the keyword in the Keyword form of a 5 digit number nnnnn Therefore the password can be no longer than 5 characters Adjust Calibration Card Select voltage level to be enabled for adjustment Valid options Pots for chan are 01 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card 02 Enable 4 4 Volt Source on calibration card and 03 Select 0 Volts GND R Power On Reset I R Power on reset Equivalent to hardware reset Power Up Settings Specify power up con
344. s via the Device pull down menu W Channel Configuration Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Channel Configuration Window Access this window through the Setup pull down menu M Acquisition Parameters Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration window This window can be accessed through the Setup pull down menu W Data File Parameters Check Data File Parameters These parameters can be set from the Data Destination window accessible from the Setup pull down menu and from the Data File Parameters selection accessible from the Data pull down menu Using the Run Dialog box to specify a configuration file is very efficient By using this method and various configuration files you should find that managing systems with more than one acquisition device is relatively simple With the use of a portable PC you can quickly interface with a specific acquisition system The pull down menus and numbered areas represented in the previous figure and table are detailed in the Chapter 4 To start the charts scrolling push the Start Charts and Indicators button toolbar item 2 More detailed information pertaining to the charts and the ChartView Main Window appear in Chapter 4 In addition to viewing the data as charts you can select the Windows pull down menu to select one or all of the following NetScan User s Manual ChartView Quick Start and Tutorial 2 5 e ChartView Analog Meters e Chart
345. ser s Manual 11 13 98 ChartView Plus permits multiple groups and up to four overlapping channels per chart These enhanced features are activated by use of a registration ID code Please consult your service representative for more ChartView Software Reference 4 1 Groups Charts amp Channels When starting the program with no configuration file present see Chapter 2 if necessary a feature called Chart Setup Wizard is automatically activated to assist you with your display setup To make the best use of Chart Setup Wizard you need to understand the relationship of Groups Charts and Channels Group Group refers to a group of charts ChartView makes use of one chart group S Display ChartView Plus allows up to 64 groups depending on the capabilities of your PC but can only display one group at a time Chart Chart refers to display area that reflects real time channel data values for a selected channel and can be scrolled at various rates You can assign up to 16 charts per group ChartView Plus enables each chart to display up to four overlapping channels Channel Channel refers to a signal channel Channels will be displayed in units of C F K R mV V or in user defined units depending on the configuration and type of signal conditioning card used With ChartView Plus you can have up to 4 overlapping channels assigned to one chart rE Chart 2 Ea Chart 3 Three Ways of Using
346. sing this method continuous data may be collected as long as the application program can read data out of the buffer before the buffer overruns If the buffer overruns the data read may not be continuous TRIGGER BLOCK 1 TRIGGER BLOCK 2 A a Level Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Timebase 1 Timebase 2 Tine Trigger Event Stop Event Buffer Organization with Gap Free Acquisition C 12 Trigger Event Stop Event NetScan User s Manual Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers Post Trigger State The Post Trigger state is the period between the occurrence of the trigger event and the occurrence of the stop event While the unit is in this state the TRIGGER LED will be on and the alarms and their associated outputs will be updated at the post trigger scan rate During the Post Trigger state the unit will collect Post Trigger data at the rate specified by the acquisition scan interval specified by the Scan Interval I command Post Trigger scans will be collected at this rate until the stop event occurs The number of scans collected during the Post Trigger state is not restricted by the internal buffer size The NetScan can collect scans in the post trigger state indefinitely if the controlling computer is capable of reading data out of the acquisition buffer fast enough to prevent a buffer overrun The Post Trigger state may be detected by querying the Triggered Bit of the Status Byte STB Register
347. specified that each channel s Last reading had to be ENTERed separately Example 4 This example is the same as the previous except no HLL response terminators are specified and the format has been changed to F PRINT 1 F1 0 OL 05 07 07 0X Set format to ASCII degrees F with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 C1 4 1X Configure four channel no setpoints Configure and start the acquisition Just get the Last channel readings Get Last readings for channels 1 4 Screen shows PRINT 1 U13X LINE INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS 1743 08 0483 08 0059 444 0051 62 Notice that there are no HLL channel terminators and that the readings are now in F Example 5 Example 5 shows how changing the channel type can effect the output of HLL queries PRINT 1 F0 0 Q1 0 0 0 0X Set format to ASCII degrees C with HLL terminator of None PRINT 1 C1 4 11X Configure four channel no setpoints to VOLTS Configure and start the acquisition Just get the Last channel readings Get Last reading for channels 1 4 Screen shows 090865 PRINT 1 U13X LINE INPUT 1 AS PRINT AS 000 0045603 000 0000895 000 00800870 000 oO Notice that even though the format was degrees C since the channels have been configured to be VOLTS channels the response is in VOLTS D 4 NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries Example 6 Example 6 shows how to retrieve Last readings for
348. splay list the most recently added channels will obscure the channels higher in the list those that were added first Display Configuration Setup E EHA Display e el Group 1 Channel Type Show All Types Available Channels Selected Channels CH1 Add gt lt Remove CH Note IF you add more than one CHE channel to a Chart Channels that CHA appear lower in the Selected CH10 Channels list will have a higher CH11 precidence that those at the top of CH12 the list Type J Units jE Adding Channel 2 to Chart 1 Another variation of the Display Configuration Setup box appears when you highlight a channel In the following figure Channel 1 of Chart 1 Group 1 was selected resulting in a new screen image From this screen you can edit the channel setup 4 10 ChartView Software Reference istsi isO NetScan User s Manual Display Configuration Setup E Deselect All Channels OK 30H HOFF Select all channels ofthe same type Select method of adjusting channel setup cA Display EHF Group 1 Units Full Scale Ci Units Div Type J Units C Trace Color Blue Y Max 43 06 E Y Center 4 567 gt Y Min 33 93 gt Units Division T242 E Adjusting Channel Setup for Channel 1 ChartView and ChartView Plus data channels can operate in one of two modes Units Full Scale or Units Div The mode is selected by radio but
349. sponding digital input is ON 0 corresponding digital input is OFF Thus in this example digital inputs 6 and 3 are ON How to Decode Digital Inputs Also see Digital Input 1 command in Appendix A NetScan User s Manual C 17 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Acquisition Buffer A Description Once scans are read from the buffer by the controlling computer they are erased from Block NetScan s buffer The acquisition buffer is a FIFO First In First Out buffer In other words the oldest data to be written into the buffer is the first data to be read from the buffer when a read operation is performed The buffer may be broken up into one or more trigger blocks A trigger block is comprised of pre trigger scans optional a Trigger trigger point post trigger scans a stop event and post stop scans optional These components constitute a trigger block in the internal memory of the unit Each trigger block defines an acquisition and each may be of variable length Tigger 1 Scan Block 4 Trigger blocks are allocated sequentially and the scans within the Trigger Blocks are tigger _ sit eae OC written and read sequentially In other words it is not possible to randomly access a Trigger Block or a scan within a trigger block When a read operation is performed the scan that is read is the oldest scan in the oldest trigger block currently defined The figure represents a sample acquisition buffer
350. sponse PRINT AS Screen shows VO User Terminator Response is still VO because V was executed before V4 since V is an immediate and V4 is a deferred command PRINT 1 V X Get User Terminator response INPUT 1 AS Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows new User Terminator V4 Even though query commands generate their response as soon as they are interpreted they must still be followed by an Execute X command for proper termination For more information on command execution refer to the X command in Appendix A U Status Commands Status commands are used to return information about various conditions of the NetScan The status of the NetScan may be read at any time without interfering with normal operation Any error conditions except Calibration Errors are cleared after the status string is read by the controller The Calibration Errors are cleared when the unit is calibrated Status strings are returned when the NetScan is next addressed to Talk The terminators used and the use of the End or Identify EOD line can be changed with the Q commands If the NetScan is configured to trigger on Talk requesting a status report U command will not cause the NetScan to trigger The following table outlines the information available through the U commands See the Command Reference section for details and examples NetScan User s Manual Appendix D Registers Data Formats amp Queries U Commands and Descriptions
351. sponse of current User Terminator INPUT 1 A Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows V1 PRINT 1 VO X V X Change User Terminator and get response INPUT 1 A Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows VO PRINT 1 V4 V X Change User Terminator and get response No intermediate X command INPUT 1 A Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows VO User Terminator Response is still VO because the immediate command V was executed before the deferred command V4 PRINT 1 V X Get User Terminator response INPUT 1 A Retrieve response PRINT AS Screen shows new User Terminator V4 NetScan User s Manual A 37 API Command Reference Appendix A Q Set Query Terminator TYPE EXECUTION SYNTAX Qresp Set the query terminators with the following parameters resp is the hll response terminator h11 is the channel terminator scan is the terminator scan which follows each scan output and block is the terminator which follows block each trigger block output sep sep determines whether or not a separator character should be used Valid options for sep are 0 Place no separators in returned buffered scan data when it is read and 1 Place a separator whose value is determined by the current Set User Terminator V command setting into the returned buffer data when it is read Query current terminator settings DESCRIPTION The Set Query Terminator Q command is used to set th
352. ss over cable may be used in place of an adapter with straight through cable If connecting NetScan to a hub connect a straight through type 10 Base T type ethernet cable CA 192 5 to NetScan s ETHERNET Port then connect the other end of the cable to the PC s ethernet hub Connect a CA 47 cable or equivalent DB9 cable to NetScan s 9 pin sub D CONFIG Port Connect the other end DB25 or DB9 connector end of the CA 47 or equivalent cable to an available COMM Port on your PC Note that the PC COMM ports can be 25 pin or 9 pin Ensure NetScan s Interface Selector Switch is set to the ETHERNET up position Make sure NetScan s power switch is in the 0 OFF position Plug power cord CA 1 into NetScan s power connector located on the rear panel Plug the other end of the cord into an appropriate power receptacle Turn NetScan s power switch to the 1 ON position The Power LED should light up At initial power up NetScan performs automatic self tests to ensure that it is fully functional The rear panel LEDs indicate errors if they occur Possible error conditions and their corresponding indicator light patterns are shown in the following table Any pattern not shown is an internal error that is not field serviceable in this case contact the factory When only the POWER and ERROR LEDs are on a configuration error exists as a result of the setup information in NV RAM 1 4 Configuring and Starting NetSc
353. t The unit will exit the Post Stop state when the specified number of post stop scans have been collected When this occurs the Acquisition Complete Bit of the ESR will be set and the unit will return to a non acquiring state unless the Auto Rearm feature is used Trigger and Stop Events The programmed system events are the driving force behind any acquisition The trigger point also referred to trigger event signals the end of the pre trigger and the beginning of the post trigger the stop event signals the end of the post trigger and the beginning of the post stop In addition to the pre trigger normal scan interval a secondary post trigger acquisition scan interval can be assigned This would allow scans during the post trigger and post stop states to be collected faster or slower than those in the pre trigger One application for this secondary scan interval is when events after the trigger require faster sampling than those before the trigger such as during alarm conditions The NetScan can be configured to start data acquisition on one of many trigger sources The Trigger Configuration T command is used to set the source of the trigger the trigger start and stop event a pre trigger count and or post stop count if used the direction of the trigger source level if used rising or falling edge and whether the Auto Rearm flag is enabled If the Auto Rearm feature is in use the unit will immediately begin looking for another tri
354. t Digital Output Z LERNAN SS LEREN SS Z F F qa adadad ad 1 SA Sh E 46444 dd q ce a E a E a E E E a E oor ero 2 CHARTSCAN ALARMRELAY CARD Ub Aanand 0 CSN Relay Card The high current digital output CSN Relay Card allows you to add relay functions to the first 16 digital outputs The CSN Relay card installs into NetScan s slot 1 bottom card slot Only one relay card can be used per NetScan unit and a relay card can not be installed in a NetScan expansion chassis The CSN Relay Card uses 16 dual coil latch relays and associated circuitry to minimize load on NetScan s internal power supply Note that the relays are contained in two groups with 8 relays per group Current is briefly drawn following a change in digital logic output level In event of a power failure it is possible for a relay to remain in a set state until power is restored CAUTION N Do not exceed specified current limits on relay group commons Exceeding specified limits can damage the printed circuit board There is a common feed to all 8 relays in each of the two groups It is important to stay within the group total current limitation regardless of the current ratings of the relay conta
355. tScan s expansion connector PH401 is located on the analog backplane board Chassis Ground Connection e Screw terminal Dimensions e 330mm wide x 241 mm deep x 152 mm high 13 x 9 5 x 6 Weight e 4 3 kg 9 6 lbs with 4 signal conditioning cards installed Operating Environment e Standard Indoor use 0 to 50 C e CE Indoor use at altitudes below 2000 m 0 to 95 RH non condensing to 5 to 40 C 0 to 80 RH up to 31 C 35 C linearly derate 3 RH C decreasing linearly to 50 RH at 40 C from 35 to 50 C Control e Power Switch Ethernet or RS 232 422 option handshake parity baud rate calibration memory write enable disable Rear Panel LED Indicators e ALARM TRIGGER SCAN ERROR and POWER e SEND and RECEIVE for RS 232 422 serial interface only e ACTIVITY LINK and ETHERNET for Ethernet Interface only Power e 105 125V or 210 250V 50 60 Hz 20 VA maximum Set via internal two position slide switch Transient Overvoltage according to Installation Categories e Overvoltage Category II for mains supply The minimum and normal category is II Pollution Degree e I in accordance with IEC 664 Number of Option Card Slots e 4 Number of Channels e up to 64 channels expandable to 128 with NetScan expansion chassis e 16channels per card e up to 4 cards installed in NetScan up to 4 additional cards with use of NetScan expansion chassis Channel Attributes e High and low set poi
356. ta Channels available ts 128 Manual Chart Creation Create Charts The above setup will assign 1 channels starting from channel CH1 Chart Setup Wizard Simple Mode Chart Setup Wizard Automatic Setup Options Setup Type Group Setup Chart Setup Channel Setup for Chart Groups 1 group only Up to 16 charts 1 channel per chart Simple 1 group only Up to 16 charts Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart Up to 64 groups Up to 16 charts per Up to 4 overlapping channels per chart group Note Moderate and Advanced modes of Automatic Chart Creation are only available with ChartView Plus The standard ChartView program allows for 1 chart group only and does not permit overlapping channels Note The Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button above figure allows you to exit the Chart Setup Wizard and enter a manual create chart display mode Automatic Chart Setup with Wizard The previous figure shows the Simple mode dialog box for Automatic Chart Creation The following figures show the Moderate and Advanced mode dialog boxes available only with ChartView Plus 4 42 Automatic Chart Creation Create Charts Simple Moderate Advanced Create 16 Charts rf q overlapping channels With per chart CH 7 Starting with channel The number of Instrument Data Channels available is 128 The above setup will assign 64 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CHE4 A
357. te The harness for CSN14 HV S is illustrated later in this section WARNING High voltage potentials exist which could cause serious injury or death Observe proper electrical safety precautions throughout this procedure CAUTION The main unit chassis must be calibrated for offset and gain and the signal conditioning cards must be calibrated for offset prior to calibrating the signal conditioning cards for gain CAUTION Do not install or remove any cards from the main unit or from its expansion chassis unless the unit is powered OFF and has no power sources connected to it CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge CAUTION Do not perform calibration until after the main unit and calibration equipment have been powered on for at least one hour The cards to be calibrated including those in an expansion chassis if used should be installed prior to the 1 hour warm up and should be in the slots in which they will be used during data acquisition 1 Connect a harness to the CSN14 HV S card and to the calibrator Refer to the following figure Twisted Pair to Hi V and S Ow MA 100 pF Film Type ff Capacitor Twisted Pair to Lo V and S Banana Plug Solder Harness for CSN14 HV S Calibrator Volta
358. te Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command Calibration 6 7 Gain Calibration of Main Unit Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter used for verification of calibration voltages Calibration Card installed in bottom slot slot 1 of main unit see required specifications on page 6 2 CAUTION Offset calibration of main unit must be completed prior to calibrating the main unit for gain CAUTION Use approved ESD precautions including static free work area and grounded wrist strap when handling circuit boards and electronic components Failure to do so could cause equipment damage due to electrostatic discharge Note Grounding circuit white is only partially shown Ground Line see note ope To Digital Multimeter Binding Post 1 of 7 Digital 22 2 Twisted Pairs Multimeter To the HI and LO Voltage To the Plus and Minus Sense Calibrator Connectors on the Calibrator Connections on the Calibrator HI LO an
359. text cee Display Group Group refers to a group of charts You can add and remove FHE ae 1 groups to your display and you can add or remove charts to each group Depending on the capabilities of your PC you can have up to 64 groups assigned to your display Note PostView can only display data from one group at a time Chart A Chart is a display area containing up to four channels You can assign up to 16 charts per group Charts can be displayed with or without gridlines Channel Channel refers to a signal channel You can have up to 4 channels assigned to one chart Channels will be displayed in units of C F K R mV V or user defined units depending on the configuration and type of signal conditioning card which was used during data acquisition Chart Setup Wizard Introduction The Chart Setup Wizard feature allows you to create PostView s initial chart display configuration with an automated or manual method When PostView can not locate a display configuration file it automatically accesses the Chart Setup Wizard feature If a display configuration file is located PostView bypasses the Chart Setup Wizard Note You can manually activate the Chart Setup Wizard from the File pull down menu Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset an existing display configuration Prior to manually activating the Wizard feature a New Display Setup box will appear to remind you of the display
360. th Two Timebases C 11 Post Trigger State C 13 Post Stop State C 13 Trigger and Stop Events 2222200220222 n nnn n nnn nnn nnn n nnn n nnn n nnn n nnn e een n eens C 13 Time Stamping T 22 02 2222 2222 ee nnn n nnn n nnn nnn ene n nnn nnn e nnn n nnn eee n nnn e eee e nnn n ees C 15 Alarm Stamping AH 2200 222222 e nee e eee e nnn n nnn n nnn n nee e eee e ee nen eens nnn e nee eeeeeee C 15 Digital Input Stamping I 02222 22222222 ee ee eee e eee n nnn n nnn n nnn e nee eeeeeeeeene C 16 Acquisition Buffer A Description 2222220022222 nnn n nnn n nee n nee n nnn MMMM C 18 Trigger Block Organization 222 022 222 2222 en nnn n nnn n nen n nn nee enn n nnn ee eee nnn n eens C 18 Multiple Trigger Blocks 222 000 2222 2 een n nnn n nnn n nnn n nnn n eee e nnn n ee eeeeee C 20 Acquisition Buffer Interrogation 222220022222 eee n nnn n nnn e nen n nnn e ne eeeeee C 21 Reading the Acq
361. the engineering units is 0 C the reading will be interpreted as volts not a temperature in C Note When Binary formats are specified the HLL Scan and Block terminator do not apply The following table shows the effect of the Set Data Format F command on readings input output formats for the commands and queries over which it has control Refer to the Data Format section of Appendix D for more examples Reading Formats Command Engineering Units Counts High Byte Low Byte Low Byte High Byte Engr Units Engr Units Engr Units Counts Engr Units Engr Units Engr Units Counts Engr Units Engr Units Engr Units Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts Counts A 24 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference EXAMPLES PRINT 1 FO 0X Set the engineering units to C and reading format to engineering units PRINT 1 C1 1 100 0 100 0 Set points and hysteresis interpreted as C 1 0X PRINT 1 U4X Retrieve High Low Last readings LINE INPUT 1 A Returned readings are in engineering C format PRINT A PRINT 1 F1 1X Set the engineering units to F and reading format to binary low high PRINT 1 C1 1 100 0 100 0 Set points and hysteresis interpreted as F 1 0X PRINT 1 U4X Retrieve High Low Last readings LINE INPUT 1 A Returned readings in binary low high format PRINT A F Set Burst Mode Frequency TYPE System EXECUTI
362. the groups charts and channels From this box you can select the number of charts to be assigned to a specific group With the use of the mouse cursor you can also select a chart or channel for additional editing In addition to the text presented in the following sub sections Normal Edit and Manually Creating a Display you can refer to the following for related information e The chapter 2 tutorial walks through a display setup from beginning to end e In this chapter Chart Setup Wizard provides information on the use of Chart Setup Wizard for the set up of groups charts and channels Reference Note For the very first display setup or when the configuration file has been deleted you will need to use Chart Setup Wizard First time use is discussed in the ChartView tutorial of Chapter 2 Additional Chart Setup Wizard information begins on page 4 41 The method you use to access the Display Configuration Setup window makes a difference When you use the toolbar button or the pull down menu s Setup selection the Display Configuration Setup window appears with the current chart display configuration intact With this type of access you would simply edit your existing chart display Channel and alarm configurations do not change with exception that newly displayed channels will be enabled When you access the Display Configuration Setup from the Chart Setup Wizard the Display Configuration Setup window appears with no existing display
363. the user PostView can then access the re formatted data e ChartView and TempView create iot or txt formatted data files during the acquisition Since PostView makes direct use of these formats charts can be updated in real time while the acquisition is in progress data acquisition programs Note that some data acquisition programs can convert data Reference Note Refer to PostView s Help file for data file information relating to specific formats to sma format for Snap Master or dat for DADiSP Note This chapter is based on PostView version 3 x PostView 3 x is used in 32 bit applications and PostView 2 x 1s used in 16 bit applications Most differences between these versions exist at the program level and are not visible to the user NetScan User s Manual 11 06 98 PostView 5 1 Introduction PostView is an independent program that allows you to view waveforms recorded by various data acquisition programs As the data file is being created a descriptor file used by Post View is also created aay PostView 3 0 C CHARTYW DATAFILE TXT Ele Golo Options Help De f ar e T 03 05 37 22 50 77 J Deg C TO OE 125 Deg CI div 15 5 l l l l l l l Marker See tems 9 amp 13 l ai I Fi l af 01r F megs e ee PEE ne Oe a I I alee ie eens 200 Samples E 8 Mou ypad Group Select D 3 orf D or Ctrl O Print D or Ctrl P Offset 8 2
364. tically Add Groups to the Setup available with ChartView Plus Note Even if an unevenly distributed chart display is desired you can always edit a pre existing chart setup or create a new setup by one of the Chart Setup Wizard s automatic methods and then edit the setup To manually setup your chart display using the clean slate approach as opposed to editing an existing display perform the following steps 1 Select Wizard from the Chart pull down menu of ChartView s main window The New Display Setup dialog box appears Hew Display Setup AN This operation will reset your Display Setup i Cancel 2 Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box The Wizard setup window appears see following figure 3 Click on the Manual Chart Creation button The Display Configuration Setup box appears Since the previous display configuration was reset no groups or charts are seen in the display area on the left side of the screen Note If you have ChartView Plus you will be allowed to have more than one group as well as overlapping channels up to four per chart If you have the basic ChartView program you will be limited to one group and only one channel per chart Display Configuration Setup lt OF Automatically 4dd Groups to the Setup Add Groups to the Setup And create i Charts in each Group Create Groups Manually Add Groupes to the Setup Enter Group name Add Display Group Display C
365. tion NetScan User s Manual a b c NetScan User s Manual Type U2xX to verify calibration mode U128 should appear indicating the unit is in calibration mode Enter commands similar to those in the first two columns in the following table This example is for a T C card in slot 1 and a Type 3 T type thermocouple The table on the preceding page provides additional channel numbers to use as they apply to your system Enter J3 3 0000 0X After each calibration enter U2X J6 3 0000 0X then observe U128 indicating no errors J11 3 0000 0X J14 3 0000 0X Note The number after the J is the channel number the next number is the thermocouple type and the number preceding the X is the temperature in C Thus J3 3 0000 0X means Calibrate cold junction offset for channel 3 type 3 T type thermocouple at 0 C Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command Verify calibrated temperature using one of the following three options Note related figure on following page Cold Cell Method Connect Cold Cell simulator to the T C card s 4 CJC reference channels and to the DC voltage calibrator as indicated in the followi
366. tion Create Charts button A percentage of completion bar will appear followed by the Channel and Alarm Setup box 7 Make appropriate configuration changes if any are desired including enabling additional channels then click on the OK button After clicking OK the Main Window appears and you can begin running charts The Channel and Alarm Setup section of this chapter contains related information The channels in the setup you create will be automatically enabled and will appear in chart form on ChartView s Main Window The Channels will overlap on their assigned Chart for ChartView Plus applications and will be visible when the applicable Group is selected Only one group of charts can be viewed at a time As mentioned earlier you can enable additional channels from the Channel and Alarm Setup window Enabling additional channels allows you to acquire more data to disk however it will not change your display on ChartView s Main Window In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not monitor Bypassing Automatic Chart Setup You can bypass Chart Setup Wizard by clicking on the Manual Chart Creation Create Charts button in Chart Setup Wizard s main window After selecting this option you will be using the Display Configuration Setup dialog boxes to create a display from scratch 1 e using a clean slate approach This is method is detailed with an example in the section Manually Creating a Display beginning
367. tion Mode SYNTAX Ei Terminate Calibration Mode __ _ Z Z o i O Note This command is only for advanced users who perform their own calibration It is not necessary for normal everyday operation To use this command the unit must be in Calibration Mode The End Calibration Mode E command is then used to take the unit out of Calibration Mode Once this command has been executed the unit will no longer be in Calibration Mode and the Enter Calibration Mode command K must be issued to re enter Calibration Mode Chapter 6 Calibration contains additional information EXAMPLE PRINT 1 K12345xX Enter Calibration Mode Apply precision voltage PRINT 1 H17X Will calculate offsets for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage of 50 0 mV PRINT 1 G17 1X Calibrate negative gain for TC for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply precision voltage of 50 0 mV PRINT 1 G17 1X Calibrate positive gain for TC for card 2 Wait for command to complete Apply temperature of 90 0 C PRINT 1 J1 2 90 0X Calibrate cold junction offset for channel 1 on card 1 Wait for command to complete Remove precision voltage PRINT 1 End Calibration Mode NetScan User s Manual A 21 API Command Reference Appendix A E Error Status Query WEE EXECUTION SYNTAX E Returns present error condition of the unit with one of the following error codes E000
368. tions to device including the AC line and analog inputs must be disconnected prior to opening the NetScan main unit or the expansion chassis Internal voltage potentials exist which could cause bodily injury or death WARNING NetScan s ground on the AC power connector must be connected to an external earth ground Failure to make such a connection could present an electric shock hazard causing bodily injury or death Fuse 1 2A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 100 140V power line or 1 4A 250V Slo Blo 3AG for 200 240V power line CAUTION Fuse failure indicates a possible problem within the device circuitry If a fuse blows contact a qualified service representative Replacement fuses are to be installed by qualified service personnel with the unit disconnected from the power source and with all other terminals disconnected If the line voltage selector is changed then the fuse designated for that line voltage must be used 3 6 General Information and Specifications NetScan User s Manual Calibration must be completed periodically to ensure equipment is accurate and can be performed manually or with the use of ScanCal Chapter 6 contains instructions including calibration equipment requirements for the following NetScan main unit calibration for offset and gain Offset calibration for all card types Gain calibration for low volts cards Gain calibration for high volts cards Cold junction calibration for TC cards Not
369. tire command set for NetScan with exception of ethernet related commands which are covered separately in Appendix B Syntax parameters interpretation and error codes are explained Sections on the individual commands include their parameters types typical use related information and a sample program excerpt Appendix B Ethernet API provides ethernet related command information Appendix C Configuration Aspects for Programmers provides information on memory allocation channel and scan configuration triggers alarms and digital I O operation Appendix D Registers Formats amp Queries provides information regarding registers data formats status and event reporting and other operation related factors Appendix E NetScan Program Examples explains the program examples which are supplied on the release disk Typical tasks are covered including various kinds of data acquisition and alarm control Appendix F ASCII Code Summary summarizes ASCCII control codes and character codes Appendix G NetScan Error Messages lists and describes error codes pertaining to NetScan Appendix H Abbreviations Appendices A i NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Commands Contents COMMG NG SVa Kossiga aa a a a ciuedseageauee A 2 SASS Se MSI rr a asl ait ate ca tare heated A 2 2 6 gt ee ee een re ee eer A 2 MIUNTISIE Parameters sosise sinora a E E e E A r RESE able sande ea ERTER A 2 Command STINGS cercen a a a A 2 E
370. to See Note 2 Hi V and S 100 pF Film Type Y Capacitor 1 uF Film Type Capacitor BNC Harness for CSN14 LV B of Connector Removable Portion of Connector See Note 1 Type U Subminiature Plug Subminiature Plug TypeHarness for CSN14 TC P Twisted Pair to See Note 2 Lo V and S On Board Portion Calibrator Voltage and Sensing Connections Banana Plug Solder Harness for CSN14 LV S Note 1 Twisted pair and capacitor connections are electronically identical to those shown for the BNC Harness Note 2 These figures are to be used for relation of electrial connections only For actual harnesses the capacitors must be soldered as close to the connector as possible Harness Types and Connections for Low Volts Card Gain Calibration NetScan User s Manual Calibration 6 13 2 Apply calibration voltage from the precision calibrator to the first channel of each card see following table and verify with a digital multimeter Requirements for both devices are specified in Required Equipment VoltsDC Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4 Slot 5 Slot 6 Slot 7 Slot 8 Note In the slot columns the digit after the G is the channel number and the number immediately preceding the X assigns the voltage value e g G1 1X means Calibrate Gain for channel 1 50 mV 3 After each calibration type U2X and check for a re
371. to configure whether the level condition should be tested for going above the specified level or below the specified level Note This command is only valid for trigger start stop events of T4 and T5 The parameter level is the value which if exceeded by going above or below it as defined should generate a trigger event The parameter hyst is the hysteresis value that with Level is used to test whether the level condition still persists The level condition will persist until the channel readings no longer exceed the level as specified Further in order to come out of the level condition the channel readings must not exceed the aggregate of the level and hysteresis values The format for the Level and hyst arguments follow the rules for readings input defined under the Set Data Format F Command and in the Data Format section of Appendix D EXAMPLE PRINT 1 FO 0X Set the engineering units format to be degrees C PRINT 1 L1 100 0 10 0X Set the level channel to be channel 1 at a level 100 0 C with a hysteresis of 10 0 C PRINT 1 L X Read the current level setting LINE INPUT 1 L PRINT LS The screen shows L001 0100 0 4 0010 0 PRINT 1 T4 5 0 0X Set the unit to start on channel going above the level and to stop on the channel going below the level A 32 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference M Set Measuring Mode TYPE System EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX M m
372. ton Units Full Scale When Units Full Scale is selected as depicted in the above figure you can alter Y Max and Y Min These are the upper and lower limits of the Channel as they will appear on the chart when the channel is selected When you change either parameter Y Center and Units Division are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Center or Units Division while Units Full Scale is selected You can change Y Max and Y Min by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Full Scale mode will maintain its full scale setting across the chart Units Div When Units Div is selected you can alter Y Center and Units Div Y Center is the centerline value of the chart when the channel is selected Units Div is the vertical value of on chart grid increment When you change Y Center or Units Div Y Max and Y Min are automatically adjusted You can not directly adjust Y Max or Y Min while Units Div is selected You can change Y Center and Units Div by using the up and down arrows or by highlighting the existing value typing in the new value the pressing Enter on your PC keyboard Note Ifthe window size is changed a chart operating in the Units Div Mode will maintain its units per division scale setting across the chart The channels in the display wil
373. top the acquisition B Flush Acquisition Buffer TYPE Buffer The Flush Acquisition Buffer B command will flush any data currently in the acquisition buffer Upon execution of this command all data currently in the acquisition buffer will be deleted and is unavailable to be read This command should only be used when it is determined that the data in the acquisition buffer is no longer needed or may be corrupt Once this command is executed data in the acquisition buffer is irrevocably lost EXAMPLE PRINT 1 U1LX Serial Poll the unit INPUT 1 A Get the Serial Poll response IF VAL AS AND 128 128 THEN Check for Buffer Overrun PRINT 1 BxX Data may be corrupt flush the acquisition buffer ENDIF NetScanUsersManual A API Command Reference Appendix A C Clear Channel Configuration The Clear Channel Configuration C command will clear out the channel configuration so that no channels are configured After this command has been performed channel readings will be not be updated therefore no HLL or acquisition buffer updates will be performed until a new configuration is entered via the Configure Channels C command This command may be used when the present configuration is no longer acceptable and you wish to reconfigure channels from scratch EXAMPLE PRINT 1 CX Clear all channels configuration PRINT 1 C1 1x Configure channel 1 of T C type J F Restore Factory Settings
374. tputs For example an argument of 201 for bank2 would be interpreted in binary as 11001001 with 1 as active high and 0 as active low This would affect the digital outputs of Bank 2 as follows Bank 2 Digital Outputs 9 A4 io J m i2 ee ee ee ee Note The setting of a bank will force the digital outputs to the specified setting regardless of the current state of the digital outputs such as if an alarm has been assigned to the output If it is desired to not affect a certain bank maybe because it is being used for alarm outputs a value of 999 can be used for the argument for that bank This will effectively mask off that bank from being updated There are 8 digital input lines and 32 digital output lines available on a rear panel DB50 connector The digital output can be controlled either automatically via the alarm settings or manually using the Set Digital Outputs O command To determine the digital output state use the User Status U commands The Set Digital Outputs O command allows you to enter an output range and specify whether the output should be cleared logic false or set logic true This command will force the specified digital output to the specified condition A 1 will drive the corresponding digital output s high Conversely a 0 will drive the corresponding digital output s low Each digital output line will drive 5 standard TTL loads All digital input lines are one eighth 0 125 TTL loads All inp
375. trl Z Slower Ctrl X Zoom Restore Grid limit lines Off Ctrl F1 Solid Ctrl F2 Dots Ctrl F3 Timestamp Absolute Ctrl F4 Relative Ctrl F5 Allows you to Open a previously saved display configuration file save the current display configuration file or save the current display configuration file in a different location or under a different file name See following note There will be no default Display Configuration file present the first time ChartView is started In this case Chart Setup Wizard activates allowing you to create a display setup When ChartView is shutdown the display configuration is automatically saved in a default configuration file that will load upon the next startup of ChartView If the default display configuration becomes corrupt or if you would like to bypass this configuration when starting ChartView you can hold down the Control Key when starting ChartView This causes the program to ignore the default display configuration and await your creation of a new display Starts stops or pauses chart scrolling Selects the next chart group in the display configuration Used to alter the chart scrolling speed There are fourteen possible chart speeds The range of speeds is from 0 1 sec div to 1 0 hr div Zoom causes the Main Window to display one chart only For example if you were viewing 3 charts and desired to get a better view of Chart 2 you could use Zoom to view Chart 2 using the full chart vi
376. turn of U128 to confirm no errors Response codes and meanings applicable to calibration are as follows Response to U2X Indication for Calibration Mode U128 No error U129 Read Failure EEPROM Error U130 Write Failure EEPROM Error U132 Chksum Err EEPROM Error U136 Cal Err offset gain or temperature sensor out of range U144 Invalid password U160 Invalid command 4 After completing the gain calibration of all cards type EX to end the calibration mode 5 Type U2x to confirm calibration mode is disabled A return of U000 confirms this Note You can view the calibration constants by typing an entry similar to the following C 1X QC for slot 1 You can monitor the calibration voltage by typing an entry similar to the following B to clear the buffer CI IX to addresses the channel this example is for slot 1 channel 1 T1 1 0 0X X to trigger the acquisition Trigger LED flashes X starts acquisition U13X every entry of U13X results in an updated value of voltage in counts Note that x can be used to start or stop the acquisition 6 14 Calibration NetScan User s Manual Gain Calibration of High Volts Cards Required Equipment Volts DC Calibrator 22 2 Twisted pairs to connect calibrator to calibration card Banana Plug Type Harness for CSN14 HV S see note Digital Voltmeter or Digital Multimeter used for verification of calibration voltages see required specifications on page 6 2 No
377. u can use the Chart pull down menu to turn grid limit lines Off or On Limit lines can be solid or dots e In regard to the time stamp region 21 if you stop the chart the time stamp will begin at 00 00 00 upon restarting the chart if using relative time or at the real clock time if using absolute time e More detailed information regarding the pull down menus and toolbar buttons is provided throughout the chapter 4 4 ChartView Software Reference iitsi iO NetScan User s Manual lel Es 2 Chart iew Simulated Instrument File Chat View Acquire Data Window Device Setup f00s3 50 t I7 e50 oe 1058 C A div Ka oS Ca oon i 000200 C fo Center j E E a div i D __ 1 sec div 23 Mnitiaizing Charting Disk GH Buffering in Instrument G Uploading ChartView Main Window and Control Options PageUp PageDown Keypads Note The bulleted list on page 4 4 relates to this table Channel Selection D or I Seb Multiply x2 U Present Value of Selected N A Channel 14 15 16 17 Center Value at Chart Mid Ei or or type in 19 20 21 22 24 25 Mouse t Arrow Keypads Group Select Ctrl G or ae or Start Charts and YB or F5 Indicators Pause Charts YB or F7 top Charts Ei or F6 or Tab to Spacebar Scroll Faster MA or Ctrl Z a or tt or type in From Chart Pull down menu or Chart Setup Di
378. ues from the configuration window Chart channels and or use meters while acquiring data to disk Possible Acquisition States Acquiring and Uploading Acquisition Buffering Acquisition in Instrument and Uploading Data from Instrument Buffer Prior to using ChartView for charting and or meter use while simultaneously acquiring data to disk you need to configure a display and or meter as well as configure the acquisition Channels from the display setup are automatically enabled You can enable additional channels from the Channel Configuration window for the data acquisition to acquire more data however these additional channels will not change your display setup or the channels being monitored In other words you can acquire data from channels you do not chart or monitor 4 2 ChartView Software Reference ssi Ne Scan User s Manual Some of the data acquisition scenarios pertaining to ChartView are as follows 1 Waiting for Trigger 2 Acquiring amp Uploading Acquisition Buffer Acquisiton Device Computer System Acquisiton Device Computer System Data is received by acquisition device but not stored Selected Device has been triggered Data is temporarily stored in device channels can be viewed graphically in scrolling charts as well buffer prior to being uploaded to PC system hard disk As in the first as in one or more meters analog digital or bar graph scenario selected display channels can be viewed 3 Bufferin
379. uisition Buffer 2222200222222 22 ee nnn n nnn nn nn nnn n ne eeeeee C 24 Configuring Alarms 2 220 222 2220 nnn n nen e nnn n nnn nnn n nnn n nnn een nner e eee e nnn e ees C 26 Alarm Setpoints C 26 Digital alarm Outputs C 26 Setpoint Hysteresis C 26 Digital I O Operation 22222022222 n enn nnn n nn nnn nnn n nn nnn nen n nnn en eee e nnn n ne eeeeee C 28 NetScan User s Manual 11 11 98 C 1 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Memory Allocation C 2 Each NetScan comes equipped with 256 KB memory There are three options for additional memory 1 Mbyte 4 Mbytes and 8 Mbytes The memory modules are located in SIMM sockets JP201 and or JP202 on the microprocessor board Refer to Chapter 3 if you intend to add or remove memory modules Memory Module JP201 te Reserved for Second Memory Module JP202 Microprocessor Board Not all components shown Regardless
380. uisition Parameters Scan Counts Specify the number of scans in an acquisition Pre trigger Post Stop Average weight Average weight can be specified only when in the Normal Mode The value for the average weight determines the number of samples to be averaged when in Normal Mode Values of 1 2 4 and 8 are for high speed multiple channel applications for thermocouples and DC voltages where noise filtering is not an issue Values of 16 32 64 128 and 256 are recommended for AC noise rejection Scan Intervals Time between scans frequency of scans Pre trigger and Post Stop Post trigger Use one Interval High Speed Setup Allows for channel and scan rate entries for high speed single channel mode Note These parameters cannot be altered while an acquisition is in progress 5 Review Configuration Reviewing the configuration prior to data acquisition is optional however you should complete a review at this time in the tutorial to help with your familiarization of ChartView In an actual application a review such as this provides you with a chance to correct configuration errors Q 20 Device Interface Check the Interface and Status via the Device pull down menu Q 21 Channel Configuration Check channel and alarm configuration settings via the Channel Configuration Dialog Box Access this box through the Setup pull down menu Q 22 Acquisition Parameters Check the acquisition parameters via the Acquisition Configuration Dial
381. ull Down Menus and two special Pop Up Menus one for configuring the meters and the other for replacing a represented channel with another Note The acquisition to disk has a higher priority then the updating of Charts Meters and the Reading column Therefore data is displayed as soon as the acquisition task is satisfied As the scan rate is increased the acquisition to disk task will take up more processor CPU time and the displaying of data will be updated as time allows If you select linear conversion mX b as the units for channel configuration you should expect a further impact on real time display performance The mX b conversion is discussed in the section Channel and Alarm Setup Dialog Box Note The meter channels selected are independent of the group chart assignments NetScan User s Manual ChartView Software Reference 4 27 Bar Graph Meters Selecting Bar Graph Meters from ChartView s Window pull down menu brings up the Bar Graph window This window displays several channels in bar graph format To activate the display select the Start button from the toolbar At least one meter must be assigned to an active On channel You can select to view up to 32 meters at a given time w 1H eee 3x E ChartView Bar Graph Meters Control View BASS Biel Es 36 E ae O amO 0 100000 E 4 0 050000 0 050000 0 D Select Channel 6 O 000000 O 000000 set Scale 7 Show Peak Hold Indicator g
382. upted Ethernet Interface Configuration A Chapter 1 Configuring and Starting NetScan contains instructions for ethernet setup RS 232 422 Interface Configurations The majority of NetScan users configure their unit for ethernet operation as described in Chapter 1 RS 232 422 serial configuration may be used for non network applications RS 232 setup is recommended for use during NetScan s yearly calibration CONFIG DB9 Connector is Not Used in Serial Appplications LALALALA ALARM TRIGGER SCAN SEND RECEIVE ERROR SERIAL Selector Switch Set to RS 232 422 down position ACTMITYO LINK O ETHERNET DIP Switch TRIGGER TTL IN OUTPUT ALARMS AND DIGITAL I O CHASSIS GROUND CALIBRATION ENABLE RS 232 422 DB9 Connector NetScan Rear Panel 7 6 NetScan User s Manual Configuring RS 232 422 Parameters Hardware CAUTION The RS 232 422 interface is only to be used for serial communications Cable length should not exceed 50 feet 15 meters Note The DIP switch is read only when power is applied to NetScan and for that reason must be set before applying power Note Unless an interface option is used NetScan s serial port operation will be with RS 232 electrical characteristics For serial port use NetScan s rear panel DIP switch settings determine the baud rate stop bits parity and handshake Use the following steps when you desire to change RS 232 RS 422 serial port param
383. uration Setup dialog box from the Chart pull down menu or by clicking of the Chart Setup button in the main window toolbar This method does not use the Chart Setup Wizard and does not reset your chart display configuration setup e Activating the Chart Setup Wizard will reset your chart Display Configuration Setup It will not reset your Channel and Alarm configuration Chart Setup Wizard as described in this text covers the expanded setup applications available with ChartView Plus The basic ChartView program does not permit overlapping channels or having more than 1 chart group Expanded applications ChartView Plus can be activated by use of a special code available from the factory Please consult your service representative for more detailed information Activating the Chart Setup Wizard from the Chart pull down menu will result in the following dialog box and warning Hew Display Setup AN This operation will reset your Display Setup i Cancel The Chart Setup Wizard window appears when you attempt to run ChartView for the very first time as well as when a configuration file does not exist When a configuration file already exists you can easily access the Chart Setup Wizard by selecting Wizard in the Chart pull down menu It is important to realize running the Chart Setup Wizard will result in a reset of your display setup it will not however change your channel and alarm configuration with the exception of new disp
384. urn AR number immediately upon phone or written request Upon examination by OMEGA if the unit is found to be defective it will be repaired or replaced at no charge OMEGA s WARRANTY does not apply to defects resulting from any action of the purchaser including but not limited to mishandling improper interfacing operation outside of design limits improper repair or unauthorized modification This WARRANTY is VOID if the unit shows evidence of having been tampered with or shows evidence of being damaged as a result of excessive corrosion or current heat moisture or vibration improper specification misapplication misuse or other operating conditions outside of OMEGA s control Components which wear are not warranted including but not limited to contact points fuses and triacs OMEGA is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various products However OMEGA neither assumes responsibility for any omissions or errors nor assumes liability for any damages that result from the use of its products in accordance with information provided by OMEGA either verbal or written OMEGA warrants only that the parts manufactured by it will be as specified and free of defects OMEGA MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED EXCEPT THAT OF TITLE AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED LIMITATION OF LIABILITY The reme
385. use of such time scales Aside from selecting the type of timebase desired absolute or relative no user action is required in regard to the timebase display Two Points About the PostView Timebase Does timebase No e When a data file is loaded into PostView for the very first time the relative timebase format will be used e You can not select absolute timebase when the data ves file has no timebase In this case PostView will automatically use relative time PostView uses relative time absolute time selected PostView uses file s existing timebase in absolute time format PostView Timebase Creation Simplified Flowchart The following figure illustrates a partial timebase in the relative format Note that the user could switch to absolute time with Ctrl A on the keypad or by selecting Absolute time from the Options pull down menu The example below resulted from a ChartScan 1400 using ChartView software I j I L J Lehi H 1 l l I l l l l l l l B q ra T J OT eee I I i gl i I j LILI L a a ar I l l l n l r T ry T oe l a l E oe l l I j E LES LIN i l 1 7 a z T77 T 17 KE a M U _ 12 oe oe G L l L IH l l lL _ l _ I l I I l l f li I I I I I I I I I I I I l I I I oe oe eo pe a Oe ee ge Pe oh me TTT TPT SST TT ea Es a ee i O l l l l l l l l l l I l l l 00 00 70 HN 00 00 19
386. utomatic Chart Creation Create Charts Simple Moderate Advanced Create 3 Display Groupe With 2 Charts per group overlapping channels That have T per chart Starting with channel CH1 T The number of Instrument Data Channels available ts 128 The above setup will assign 24 channels starting from channel CH1 through channel CH24 Dialog Boxes for Moderate and Advanced Modes of Automatic Chart Creation ChartView Plus Only ChartView Software Reference NetScan User s Manual It is a simple task to create chart display configurations using the automatic method The following steps apply to this feature of Chart Setup Wizard 1 Select Wizard from the Chart pull down menu of ChartView s main window The New Display Setup dialog box appears Hew Display Setup AN This operation will reset your Display Setup i Cancel 2 Click OK on the New Display Setup dialog box The Wizard setup window appears 3 Select the desired mode tab Simple Moderate or Advanced Moderate and advanced modes are only available with ChartView Plus 4 Use the pull down arrows t or use the cursor and type in a new value to make selections for the number of groups charts and channels as applicable 5 If you desire to start with a channel other than channel 1 use the pull down arrow and select the desired starting channel number 6 When your setup is complete click on the Automatic Chart Crea
387. uts are protected against damage from high static voltages Normal precautions should be taken to limit the input voltages to 0 3 to 5 3 volts All digital I O lines are referenced to digital ground EXAMPLE PRINT 1 O X Get the current state of the digital outputs banks LINE INPUT 1 N PRINT N Screen shows 0128 255 065 024 PRINT 1 O0 999 76 234X Set Banks 1 3 and 4 PRINT 1 O X Get the current state of the digital outputs LINE INPUT 1 O PRINT OS Screen shows 0000 255 076 234 Note that Bank 2 did not change NetScan User s Manual A 35 API Command Reference Appendix A P Program Trigger Times TYPE Channel EXECUTION Deferred SYNTAX Pstart Set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition configured for start stop and or stop on absolute time where start and stop are in the standard time date stamp format HH MM SS T mm dd yy where H is hours MM is minutes SS is seconds T is tenths of a second mm is month dd is day and yy is year Query current start and stop times in the form Pstart stop DESCRIPTION The Program Trigger Times P command may be used to set the trigger start and or stop times for an acquisition that is configured for start and or stop on Absolute Time as configured by the Set Trigger Configuration T command The Program Trigger Times command is to be used in concert with the Set Trigger Configuration command when it is desired to begin an
388. when it is powered on or when a R command is issued Using this mode is the same as power cycling the unit then issuing the F command The factory defaults settings are defined in the Configuring Power Up State section of Appendix D Note Issuing the Power Up Default Settings S1 command and then power cycling the unit or issuing the R command will cause any previously defined configuration to be irrevocably lost The calibration factors for the unit and its slaves however will remain intact EXAMPLE PRINT 1 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings LINE INPUT 1 A Get the settings PRINT A Screen shows Q1 7 7 7 0 T1 3 0 0 Y000100 001000 000000 PRINT 1 S1xX Configure to power up with factory defaults PRINT 1 RX Reset the unit SLEEP 5 Wait for the unit to reset PRINT 1 Q T Y X Retrieve some current configuration settings LINE INPUT 1 A Get the settings PRINT A Screen shows Q1 0 0 0 0 TO 0 0 0 YOOOOOO 000000 000000 A 14 NetScan User s Manual Appendix A API Command Reference T Time Stamping TYPE System EXECUTION immediate SYNTAX Tstate Specify whether or not time stamping will be enabled Valid options for state are 0 Disable time stamping default 1 Enable absolute time stamping and 2 Enable relative time stamping DESCRIPTION The Time Stamping T command when enabled will append a time date time stamp to each scan being sent by the
389. ws developers and NPCI_W3V DLL for 32 bit windows developers The only system requirement is that the Windows TCP IP protocol be loaded and configured With a mechanism called session handles the API can simultaneously handle multiple NetScan units All functions rely on the session handle to keep track of the NetScan device selected for communication A typical session with a NetScan consists of the following basic parts e Initialization Initialization requires several functions to be called in appropriate order These functions include nSWInit nSessionBegin nIOLock and nSERIALConfigure e Actual communications during the session Communication functions include nSerialReceive and nSerialSend e De initialization De initialization is for ending a session and uses the functions NSessionEnd and NSWDeinit Detailed descriptions of each function are covered in the following section Examples programs are also included on the distribution disk Functions nSwinit Function int nSwInit void Parameters None Returns 0 if successful error code if not Description This function is used to allocate system resources prior to beginning a session This function must be called before any others Example ErrVal nSWInit 0 nSessionBegin Function int nSessionBegin short adapter char FAR local char FAR remote unsigned long flags unsigned long reserved long FAR session Parameters Short adapter Always
390. x D are relative to the read and write blocks respectively U7 Returns the input channel to digital output channel assignments in the form A Achan output for each channel that is currently assigned to a digital output U8 Reads the current configuration settings for each channel configured in the unit This command returns the same information in as the C command except that it returns it for all channels which are configured U9 Read the Digital Inputs This command will read the current state of the digital inputs This function is performed by reading each of the eight digital inputs converting each input to a binary high is 1 and low is 0 and converting that aggregate binary 8 bit number into a decimal number The decimal number is then returned as the response nnn where it has the following form 000 lt nnn lt 255 U10 Queries the installed memory option This command will return the amount of memory installed in Kbytes The possible responses are 00256 256 Kbyte option 04096 4 Meg option 01024 1 Meg option 08192 8 Meg option U11 Queries all channels having programmed valid alarm setpoints The response is CCC A CCC A CCC A where CCC is a channel number in 3 didgit format and A is the alarm state with O indicating not in alarm state and 1 indicating in an alarm state An example of a response in which channel 1 is the only channel in an alarm state is as follows 001 1 002 0 003 0 a U12 Reads th
391. y familiarize you with the application Chapter 3 General Information and Specifications gives a general description of NetScan and related hardware including NetScan s expansion chassis and available signal conditioning cards Chapter 4 ChartView Software Reference includes information regarding ChartView ChartView Plus ChartViewNET and ChartViewNET Plus Topics include detailed explanations of the program s pull down menus toolbar icons and keypad control options Chapter 5 PostView explains how to use this independent program to view charts recorded by the ChartView programs Chapter 6 Calibration explains how to use ScanCal a software automated method of calibration as well as how to manually calibrate the master chassis and option cards Chapter 7 Hardware provides detailed information regarding NetScan hardware The chapter includes information regarding the front and rear panels two position voltage selector switch memory addition RS 232 422 serial communication interfaces digital I O lines external TTL connectors signal conditioning modules CSN Exp expansion chassis option and high current CSN relay card option Appendices The Appendices provide programming related information that is not necessary for users of ChartViewNET and ChartViewNET Plus but is useful to those wishing to write their own programs The appendices are arranged as follows Appendix A API Commands describes the entire command set for
392. z such that 38 5 lt freq lt 2000 The default is 2000 Hz Ypre post stop Set Counts or Select Blocks or In Normal mode This command is used to set acquisition counts where pre is the Y 0 count 0 pre trigger count post is the post trigger count and stop Is the post stop count In High speed single channel mode burst mode the post position serves as count count is used to select the number of 256 sample blocks to be collected Options for block count are dependent upon system memory as follows 256Kbytes count value allowed is 2 to 512 1 Mbyte count value allowed is 2 to 2048 4 Mbytes count value allowed is 2 to 8192 8 Mbytes count value allowed is 2 to 16384 Note In each case the number assigned for block count must be a power of 2 U16 Mi modeF freqw wt Query the Measuring Mode This command queries the following three parameters M F and W U17 U17 Return RMS This command computes and returns the root mean square RMS value of the last completed high speed single channel mode acquisition NetScan User s Manual C 3 Configuration Aspects for Programmers Appendix C Normal Mode NetScan has the ability to reject noise resulting from AC line pick up when an Average weight setting of 16 or more measurements per line cycle is used This noise rejection factor is important as it allows for higher accuracy When an average weight setting of 32 or more is used NetScan is operating in a line cycle integration ma

Omega Vehicle Security OMB-NETSCAN 1500 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents